Revelations

Citation preview

REVELATIONS

Acknowledgements The author wishes to acknowledge not only ‘The Stranger’ for without our meeting, my promise to him and his notes, this story may never have been told - but also the subsequent and unexplained drive/motivation (or whatever it was) that compelled me to write this book. In explaining the mechanism behind the ocean tides I have adopted the same approach as Kitty Ferguson in her book titled, ‘Prisons of Light’ published by the Cambridge University Press. The approach as outlined in chapter four of her book is, in my opinion, the most lucid I have yet to come across. I should also wish to recognise and acknowledge all those many authors, contributors and publishers of the numerous scientific journals, magazines, books and electronic medium I have read and attempted to digest. This educational requirement being triggered as a result of my writing this book, necessitating the need to further my knowledge in the understanding of science; physics in particular. The names and contributions are far too many to mention, but they have unwittingly been the educators of my relatively limited knowledge across the scientific spectrum. This book includes images from ‘370,000 Cliparts’ by Planet Medien AG, CH-Zug © Planet Medien AG, Ch-Zug; also images from Corel GALLERY Magic 200,000 which are Copyright © 1997 Corel Corporation Limited. I would also, in particular, like to thank Philip Holbourn for the effort he has spent in editing my notes; to him I owe a debt of gratitude.

Liability Notice

While every effort has been taken with the researching, writing and production of this book to ensure the accuracy of the information contained herein, the Publishers and Author do not in any way accept responsibility or liability for any such erroneous statements or claims herein and/or any loss or damage relating thereof as a direct or indirect consequence of the information contained within this book. Notwithstanding this all opinions expressed in this book are those and solely of the Author. The Metric and Imperial System of Measurement. Although the Metric system is used throughout the book there are numerous places where the Imperial System of measurement is also shown in brackets. The author recognises there are many people who, like himself, have ‘grown up’ with both systems. The author whilst having an appreciation of metric measurements still tends to think and to be more at ease with the scales of distance and size in Imperial Units. As an example the author has a better grasp for the meaning of five hundred miles as against eight hundred kilometres, or twenty-two pounds rather than ten kilograms.

COUNTDOWN TO OBLIVION Copyright © D.J.Haskell 2004 Abridged version for Kindle re-titled REVELATIONS Copyright © D.J.Haskell 2013

For unabridged version see end of this book. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying or otherwise, without prior permission of the Copyright Owner. This book is dedicated to all those people who yearn for and seek out the TRUTH. felix qui potuit rerum cognoscere causa (Fortunate is he who has been able to learn the causes of things) The universe may not just be queer to imagine, but queerer than we can imagine.

J B S Haldane

Reading Notes:

It should be noted that in preserving the factualness of this book the reader should be aware that the actual abduction took place during

the latter end of the 20th Century- indeed during 1994 - why is there this substantial time gap in revealing this abduction experience you may well ask? The answers are as follows: The predominant reason for the delay in publishing this book can be put down to Human failing - although I had managed to transcribe most of the notes within 12 months of my encounter with the Stranger, it did take some considerable time to educate myself in the various disciplines required to sufficiently understand the science and finalise the story. Another factor that has added to the delay was my moving from Shropshire to west Wales; this pushed the completion of the book to the back burner for a considerable amount of time! The final reason for the delay being my reluctance to publish due to the extraordinary and seemingly outlandish claims expressed and recorded by the Stranger! With hindsight it could be claimed the delays have proven fortuitous; events such as the attack on the World Trade Centre have, it can be argued, given credibility to the Stranger’s revelations - especially to the warnings relating to terrorism! Further, it is interesting that such entertainment and film called the ‘Matrix’ used as its basic theme the concept of a virtual reality universe - have the Gods been sowing seeds and been preparing the ground for the revelations given in this book – one can only wonder? It should also be noted that the date relating to the Russian Mars 96, orbiter and lander, in addition to the dates relating to the American space probes to Mars during 1999, and the Author’s note and table at the end of Chapter One, have obviously been edited in at a later date. This was deemed justifiable in giving additional weight to the seemingly unexplainable loss of various Martian space probes during that period. It is deemed enigmatic that the original notes on which this narration is based used capitals for various words such as Earth, World, Sun, Aliens, Universe et cetera; whether there is a hidden code within the use of these capitals or some other esoteric purpose I have not been able to establish. Nevertheless in an effort to preserve the authenticity of the original notes I have kept to the same format throughout the book. Additionally there were a number of quotes in Latin scattered randomly throughout the notes; the

reason or reasons for which I could not determine. Nevertheless I have included the quotes within the book at places I thought most appropriate and I can only assume this was their original intended purpose.The Stranger’s notes also appeared to cover in considerable detail descriptions of the First and Second World Wars, the conquest of Central America by the Spaniards and the advent of intelligent machines. Unfortunately, due to smudging and many pages sticking together, I have had to take the liberty of attempting an intuitive but limited summary of these topics, which included some minor research on my part; you will find these topics are covered in Chapter Two. Every chapter, bar Chapter Three, begins with a quote from scripture. Again I can only make an intuitive guess and assume the Gods have guided the Stranger’s hand in this approach. Although the quote at the start to Chapter Three is not from scripture it is also deemed to be very apt and thus again in preserving the authenticity of the original text this quote has also been included.

PREFACE You may assume from the cover of this book that this is just another ‘run of the mill’ Alien abduction or apocalyptic disclosure? If so, then you are sadly mistaken! You will find the following pages relate a very different and more profound experience. There are, for example, no revelations of being kidnapped by menacing reptilian type beings, little green men, demons, or small thin grey men with almond shaped eyes and large bulbous heads. The experience related can justifiably be claimed as the definitive Alien abduction since it effectively encapsulates all other experiences and manifestations relating to Unidentified Flying Objects and abductions. Additionally, the ‘truths’ you will read about encompass the whole Universe and its very structure, the purpose of Homo sapiens on Earth, the traumas yet to come to threaten the very existence of Mankind and many other mysteries. Countdown to Oblivion is an intellectual challenge. The credibility of the complete abduction experience is reinforced by the information and insights offered. For example, the Aliens lucid explanation of what time actually is and how time travel could be achieved is very compelling; you will discover, if you read the text diligently, that the claims made by the Aliens are extremely difficult to refute... We live in a perceived three-dimensional Universe with objects having length, width and depth. These dimensions are quantifiable and thus measurable such as a cube having sides of, say, 20

centimetres, a house standing 10 metres tall, or a stretch of road 20 kilometres long. Scientists and physicists talk about space – time; meaning that we really live in a four dimensional Universe consisting of time and the other three physical dimensions that we see around us in our normal lives. But what is this fourth dimension called time? Can we feel it or measure it? No doubt your first response will be yes! I can feel the flow of time as it appears to pass slowly whilst waiting for a bus in the pouring rain or indeed, pass quickly when at an enjoyable party. You will also claim that you can measure time in units such as seconds and minutes or days and weeks et cetera. But are you really feeling or measuring time, does this really indicate what time actually is? If you believe there is an actual past or future time for a person to travel to, then you do not have any meaningful understanding to the true nature of time. Thus consider the idea of travelling back into the past. This is fundamentally a misguided notion as there is no past to return to! If there were, then it means the past still exists for you to travel back to. Similarly if it were possible to travel into the future it would mean the future exists now for you to be able to travel there; the Aliens explain about time in the chapter headed Illusions although more specifically about time travel in the chapter headed Time Travel. It must be remembered that in outer space there is no such thing as upward or downward motion, nor is there forward or backward motion, or even left or right - there is just motion. An object in space will move relative to nearby objects (masses) be they galaxies, stars, planets, moons or gas clouds et cetera. One does not travel up to the Moon nor down to the Sun, one travels to these objects. Indeed, there is no back to the Sun or forward to the Moon, motion is either toward, away, around or through (e.g. gas clouds) these objects. So how can you travel forward or backwards into time? Time is purely a Human concept as there is no past, nor is there any future time, there is only just this moment, there is only NOW! It is a mistake to think that the past and future are another ‘land’ so to speak; there is only this moment and nothing outside of it. This moment in time continually changes, or perhaps more correctly,

continually moves and that is basically it! Time is simply NOW. Having made this profound statement and at the risk of appearing to contradict and therefore obfuscate the issue, the Aliens explain the possibility of travelling into what we term the future (acknowledging Relativity Theory) and also how to experience the past. It is interesting to note the Aliens state that the physical body of Homo sapiens is nothing more than a vehicle in which their explanation of you (the soul) resides. Yes! There is a you! Although the answer is far from your conditioned, religious or otherwise, comprehension of life; it is this claim that is intellectually numbing... During an average life span all the cells (remember cells are all fundamentally made up of atoms) in the body, including the brain, are continually being replaced. The body you had several years ago is not the same body you have now! It has been completely replaced. But when you look in the mirror, apart from the aging process, what do you see? Do you see somebody else? Of course not! It is still you that is being observed! But what exactly are you? The Aliens offer their awesome explanation! The University of Virginia’s Division of Personality Studies, to my knowledge, is the only academic department in the World dedicated to the study of previous-life memories, near-death experiences and other paranormal phenomena. Dr Ian Stevenson, the founder has studied many children’s cases relating to reincarnation which on examination provide compelling evidence and appear irrefutable? Thus it comes as no surprise that according to the revelations offered by the Aliens the case for reincarnation is logically inferred was it not Voltaire who stated that, ‘It is no more surprising to be born twice than once’. In chapter five of this book the Aliens claim to have ‘orchestrated’ the outcome of the Battle of Hastings - they appear to be inferring the Norman invasion of England had far greater implications for Homo sapiens other than the subjugation of the Anglo-Saxons and the conquest of England - it can be justifiably reasoned from the AngloSaxon Chronicle that the Domesday Book, a book of 900 pages written in Latin, the Magna Carta and the ‘Feudal System’ laid the foundation for modern day Britain - indeed, this ‘orchestration’ of

Human affairs eventually led to an empire upon which the sun never set - also to that of the current World super power (U.S.A.) and to other countries such as Canada, Australia and New Zealand, predominantly speaking English! On a far much lesser scale, although of some possible significance, the author is still bemused by the possibility of his own surname being linked and corrupted from that of King Harold’s trusty warriors and personal bodyguard, namely the Huscarls (House-carls). As custodians of the planet Earth Mankind has continually abused his position; as a consequence of the ‘Works of Man’ and to his everlasting shame, there is ample evidence that his ‘Ship’ is heading directly for the rocks! In addition to this nightmarish scenario there are potentially numerous natural catastrophic events that could bring about the end of our various cultures or indeed our very existence! The Aliens make it very clear that unless there are major changes in the behaviour of our species, we are all, without exception, on a Countdown to Oblivion. There are many people who can clearly see and accept this terrifying truth, but what of the majority of the Human race? Are we, as a species, irretrievably doomed? Will the Lord cast off for ever? And will he be favourable no more? Is his mercy clean gone for ever? Doth his promise fail for evermore? Hath God forgotten to be gracious? Hath he in anger shut up his tender mercies? Psalm 77: 7 – 9. Or, is it to be inevitable, as prophesied by many seers, that the Gods (Aliens) will intervene and there will be a ‘Day of Judgement’ and only the ‘chosen’ few will survive? In reading this book many doors will be opened for you to grasp the truth. But whether you enter through or not will depend on your mindset and your willingness to shed all your past prejudices. Finally, it is pertinent to remember that two hundred years ago, the French Academy of Science stated that meteorites did not fall to Earth and the phenomenon did not exist - although we know differently now, do we not? - C’est quoi, cette étrange lumière dans le ciel?

CONTENTS

Introduction Chapter One THE STRANGER Chapter Two ALIEN ENCOUNTER

Chapter Three ILUSIONS Chapter Four TIME TRAVEL Chapter Five LUNAR EXCURSION Chapter Six DECEPTION & DELUSION

INTRODUCTION

I wish to make it clear from the very beginning that the book you are about to read is not a record of my encounter but the experiences of a person to whom I cannot put an identity. It originates from a chance meeting (or was it by chance I now wonder?) with a grubby and unhealthy looking man in an English Country Inn; someone whom I had never seen before, someone who had an astonishing tale to tell. This Stranger, who managed to commit me to a promise when he left me with two carrier bags stuffed full with bundles of badly scribbled and stained notes. The consequence of which led to many nights of trauma, numerous hours of laborious and painful deciphering, editing and typing of his notes. This effort eventually produced the book you are about to read. It is about a contact and experience with a ‘Greater Intelligence’. I use the expression ‘Greater Intelligence’ in the first instance rather than an ‘Alien Intelligence’, since the latter expression tends to immediately conjure up a mental image of Aliens from another planet or ‘Other Intelligence’ within our known Universe. The experience is very definitely not about an encounter with Aliens from ‘within’ our known Universe, nor does the expression imply Aliens or Entities from another dimension ‘within’ our known Universe. It is in fact about Gods, that is, Beings from beyond our Universe, Mankind’s Gods; creators of all things on the Earth and in the Heavens. The revelations that are expounded from this alleged contact are the most compelling and credible I have ever come across. I have read many books relating to Aliens reportedly not of this World, of Unidentified Flying Objects and of encounters with extraterrestrials. Although a few have seemed plausible, there has always been a great element of doubt. All the encounters, abductions and the various experiences about which I have read, had to be taken in good faith. There was always very little in the way of substantial evidence other than the claim by the person or persons involved. Any photographs taken were extremely hazy and not well defined and could amount to almost anything; well-defined photographs later always turned out to be hoaxes. Therefore most, if not all of the

claims had to be taken on trust and there was never anything of real substance or credibility other than possibly the cries of a ‘government cover-up’ and the implication of secret agendas of a possible malevolent nature. So what is so different about the claimed encounter that I will relate? There are no artefacts or photographic evidence in support. Indeed, the actual person who claims to have experienced the encounter has disappeared altogether. Nevertheless, the evidence is in the ‘text’ and in the ‘knowledge’ offered by the Aliens who claim to be the true Gods of all Earthly religions. I feel the ‘truths’ expounded from this contact will be sufficient to stifle most criticism or scepticism that might be put forward. You may find, as I have, that it is difficult to challenge the notion that time is simply a comparison of motion as explained by the Gods. Time as perceived by most people is erroneous: time as understood by the masses does not exist and is an illusion. The Stranger’s, or perhaps more correctly, the Gods explanation of time travel is the most astute and persuasive I have ever read. It is such insights that convince me of the credibility of the Stranger’s tale. In the chapter headed ‘Time Travel’ there is an impressive and powerful argument that states time travel into the past in our Universe is impossible although Humans have the potential to travel into the future. But as it is impossible to travel into the past, any journey into the future will mean there will be a price to pay - it will be a one-way trip. The Gods also state in Chapter Three that gravity, as a force, is an illusion using Einstein’s Principle of Equivalence to elucidate their claim. In addition I feel the students of String Theory will be intrigued to identify with the claim of the Aliens that anything you care to mention or identify in our Universe, from atoms to apples, rocks to mountains, planets to stars, and galaxies to the whole cosmological structure is made up from no more than fundamental vibrations or oscillations. The most startling and claimed truth is that the whole Cosmos is but an illusion, a Virtual Reality; a grand game being played out by the Gods. Mortals are but Gods descended into the ‘game of life’; Was

Shakespeare devastatingly near the truth when Jaques opined in Act 2, Scene 7 from the play ‘As You Like It’ and I quote: ‘All the world’s a stage, And all the men and women merely players, They have their exits and their entrances…’ end of quote. The explanation and amplification of the ‘evidence’ or ‘truths’ are given in a simplistic format as is feasibly possible, so as to engender a greater audience. This, I feel, was the fundamental purpose of the contact with the Stranger at the Inn. With hindsight it seems our meeting might have been contrived by the Gods. It was also very noticeable that the notes given to me by the Stranger contained no complex formulae or mathematics. Therefore any formulae or mathematics that I have felt necessary have been confined to the appendices in an attempt to offer a pure scientific explanation. I will also hasten a note of caution to the revelations and postulates expounded in this book as certain currently held scientific concepts and religious persuasions are certainly challenged! This may prove unsettling and portentous to those of a nervous disposition or those of very strong religious beliefs. Where the Stranger’s text was completely indecipherable, a certain amount of necessary and intuitive editing has taken place. Thus, it was also deemed necessary to expand on certain facts and as such I have included material that was not contained in the original notes. For example, if the notes made a brief reference to the Solar System then I have added further details in giving a fuller description. To understand some of the concepts it was necessary to follow up with some research of my own covering such topics as basic psychology, physics, history, and cosmology. I can only hope I have perceived and interpreted the meaning of the original text correctly. In an attempt to clarify certain points I have also included a number of diagrams and illustrations, most of which, I stress, were not in the original notes. The editing and additions I have made do not, I believe, detract from or alter the authenticity and factualness of the actual experience related. Indeed, during the editing stage of the Stranger’s notes it quickly became apparent that certain words such as Human, Alien, Mortal, Beings, Sun, Moon, Earth, World, Universe (our) et cetera, were always spelt with a capital letter? Therefore in

an effort to maintain the integrity of the original notes I have felt compelled to follow this style; intuitively I felt the Aliens, for whatever reason, guided the Stranger in his note writing to employ this capitalisation? At the end of the book are a number of lengthy and detailed appendices. This was deemed not only necessary to allow further clarification of the claims made by the Aliens, but also to expand on a number of aspects with which some readers may not be familiar. Initially, I found the concept of different levels of reality hard to believe which resulted in reading the manuscripts many times before any acceptance to the truth of it all. In the light of this new acceptance a lot of mysteries and enigmas now appear to make some kind of sense. Many Unidentified Flying Object reports and encounters that I had dismissed in the past now warranted a fresh approach and appraisal. It would now seem that apart from the obvious hoaxes and hallucinations, there have been very real experiences and the people involved have been telling the truth, so far as they perceived the events. Other scenarios of which I have been dismissive or been contemptuous about in the past now justify a re-appraisal and possibly a fresh acceptance. Although the search for the Loch Ness monster has proved fruitless I can now appreciate and accept the more sincere reports have a basis in reality, that is, our reality. Or to put it more accurately, the reality the Aliens would have us believe in. Other situations come to mind such as the Yeti, Big Foot and all the various serpents, monsters and ogres reported to have been observed and encountered throughout the ages. And yes, even fairies, elves, hobgoblins, dragons and other such entities now make sense – sense as perceived by the person or persons involved in the experience. Angels and other such manifestations certainly now seem to hold true. Especially so, when one remembers that the word Angel comes from Angelos, the Greek for ‘Messenger’, and also remembering that Angels are deemed to come from another plane, from another reality.

If nothing else, this book will certainly make you think about, and possibly alter, your modern concept of Human existence and the Universe in which we have evolved. We are all victims of illusions, delusions and conditioning. Remember, whether we like it or not, we have all been conditioned since birth. It may be useful to remember scripture here and recall the Old Testament where it is written in Proverbs 22.6, ‘Train up a child in the way he should go: and when he is old, he will not depart from it’. It is but an illusion when we consider we are totally free or even freethinking, for have we not been conditioned since birth? Regarding freedom, we are all governed and restricted by the law of the land. Most would argue this is only just and right for without law and order there would be anarchy. What we have to address is which law is right for the common good and which is restrictive or even manipulative. It does not require much imagination to accept, indeed history will testify, that Mankind has introduced laws for profit, gain, and the pursuit and retention of power. We delude ourselves if we deny our birth and surroundings. From the education we have had, be it at a University or the ‘school of life’, the politics and religion we have been taught and eventually believe in, to the clothes that we wear and the food that we eat; all these suffer prejudice as a result of the many influences we experience as we mature. For example, it is a searching question that if you had been born and reared many years ago in the jungles of New Guinea, without the influence of Western or any other advanced culture would you have found cannibalism abhorrent? The answer is obviously a resounding NO! You would have been moulded and bounded by that culture since birth - it is a wise man, who is aware that a summer insect has no concept of ice. It should be recognised that those who practise cannibalism do not suffer any guilt or misgivings as to their way of life; on the contrary, most cannibals would relish the thought of eating their foe as it was deemed wholly beneficial in that they would take on the strength and

other attributes of their slain enemy. Some tribes ate their departed relatives and in particular the brain. Students of South American history will be aware that the culture of the Moche that predated the Incas in Peru embraced cannibalism. The Moches ate Human meat from their Human sacrifices and drank the victims’ blood mixed with rainwater, believing it would bring longer life. History has shown that Mankind has an inherent and unhealthy appetite for Human sacrifice and as such it takes many forms. But it can be argued successfully that most Human sacrifice has a fundamental religious basis in that it is carried out so as to appease the Gods. Therefore those guilty of these acts again do not feel any sense of shame or guilt. Indeed the opposite is true and they use their ‘religion’ to justify their barbarous acts - and that is just what it is - there is absolutely no reason to justify the taking of Human life under the cloak of ‘sacrifice’. The Aztecs, Incas and Mayas of South America were ‘very industrious’ in the sacrificing of Human life. Even civilisations such as the Minoans when their culture was coming to and end resorted to Human sacrifice in the hope of appeasing the Gods. Today Human sacrifice is still with us with many fundamentalist movements promoting an increase in religious inspired tension and violence; the destruction of the World Trade Centre in the United States on 11th September 2001 is such an example. Those responsible not only sacrificed themselves but compounded their felony by murdering other innocent parties as well. The evidence is not good and Mankind will, I have no doubt, see further atrocities carried out based upon a misguided sense of religious and political beliefs. Unless there is a sudden and dramatic change in global thinking and the Human Race progresses to a higher level of understanding, sacrifice will continue to haunt the Earth and all of its peoples. This book implies the Gods are preparing Homo sapiens for their final intervention into World affairs. The clock is now ticking towards its final moments and the Earth as we know it is now on a Countdown to Oblivion. The crucial question is how and when is this going to happen? Regarding the information given by the Gods to the Stranger, and then in turn, passed

enigmatically to me; I can only surmise that apart from more Alien contacts, events on the World stage will be made manifest so as to enlighten us further. In reading this book it will prove productive if you can endeavour to do so with an unbiased mind. Try if you can, to minimise all the prejudices you have accumulated during your lifetime on this planet and then hopefully the ‘light’ will begin to dawn. The credibility of this tale is for you to decide but in ‘travelling’ the road ahead I trust you will have an enlightening journey. I conclude this introduction with just one provoking thought: Where in fact, does reality end and fantasy begin? non semper ea sunt quae videntur (Things are not always what they appear to be)

THE STRANGER

If I have told you earthly things, and ye believe not, how shall ye believe, if I tell you of heavenly things?

St John 3:12

It all started on a chilly and blustery winters evening just as the build up to the Christmas season had begun. I thought I would make the most of my local Inn whilst it was still reasonably quiet and free from the drunken escapades of employees from the various local businesses that chose to hold their annual Christmas parties there. I am not an unsociable sort of person but I do occasionally enjoy spending time by myself, pondering on my secret thoughts whilst watching the World go by. So, on this particular evening I deliberately sat in a dimly lit corner well away from the merrily dancing flames in the inglenook fireplace. I was hoping to spend an hour or so in my own company, enjoying what I consider to be an exceptionally good pint of real ale and my usual brand of cigar. As I gazed almost sleepily around the cosy interior of the public bar I found myself making eye contact with a man who had just ‘suddenly’ entered the Inn. I could have cursed out loud - for as soon as he had purchased a pint of ale at the bar - he headed straight for the table I was sitting at. The reason he had caught my attention when he arrived at the Inn, was partly because of a blast of cold air as he unceremoniously flung open the Inn door, and also due to his bedraggled appearance together with a very pronounced stoop. I was astounded by his attitude when he sat in the vacant chair opposite me! The sudden opening of the Inn door was bad enough but now he had the effrontery to intrude into what I considered my personal space! His body language dared an arrogant acceptance of his presence and he enquired. “You don’t mind me sitting here, do

you?” Not being quick witted enough to challenge his somewhat illmannered approach and come up with a reasonable knock back I was horrified to find myself replying. “No! Not at all!” The saying, ‘a coward dies a thousand deaths’, fluttered irritatingly through my mind. I then ventured one step further to hide my annoyance and said in a friendly tone. “Please help yourself.” Feeling extremely irritated with myself but bound by the manners that had been bred into me from birth I found myself making polite conversation with the stranger. I knew most of the locals who came here by name and as far as I could recall I had never seen this man before, neither here in this Inn or about the local community. Our conversation started off in the typically British manner by discussing the weather. This soon turned into an interesting debate about pollution and then progressed on to politics, history and religion. It was only when Heather the landlady irritatingly dropped an empty tin tray on our table - began to collect our empty pint glasses and clean the ashtray - that I realized how long we had been talking and I had smoked all of my cigars. The Stranger certainly had a way of engrossing one deeply in a conversation. Apart from his somewhat grubby appearance and the abruption of his initial intrusion he turned out to be, surprisingly, pleasantly disposed; I actually felt reluctant to leave the table and our conversation to approach the bar for another round of drinks. But I thought that as we had been talking for some time it would be prudent, in view of Heather’s obvious impatience, that I should purchase at least another round of drinks. Why I stood up to buy the drinks was due to ‘me being me’ and not wanting to offend Heather; also I needed to purchase some more cigars - if I was totally honest with myself I was also now enjoying his company and our discussion. My next pint of ale was consumed with relish and rather a lot quicker than the first as I discovered that all the talking in the smoke filled and warm atmosphere of the Inn had dried out my throat considerably. Being a smoker the fact that my own cigars might have played a part in this did not even enter my head. The Stranger demonstrated his taste for good ale by showing a visible delight as he eagerly downed his glass - was this also in response to me

emptying my glass so quickly, or was the smoky atmosphere getting to him as well I wondered? This time the Stranger was up from his seat and taking his turn at the bar before I could blink. This made me relax even further as I was comfortable with the thought that I was not going to be ‘suckered’ into buying all the drinks. Heather’s frosty mood towards us seemed to thaw when the Stranger approached the bar for his turn. It was then obvious that Heather’s attitude had earlier been more directed toward the Stranger - bursting into the Inn the way he had, intruding upon one of her regulars and then engaging him in conversation inhibiting the consumption of ‘good ale’. Perhaps to improve her mood further he went as far in purchasing her a drink and took the liberty to order double whisky chasers for each of us. What a treat! It seemed the Stranger had made his peace. As the evening wore on and to my further surprise, we established an extremely good rapport. We were both beginning to succumb to the relaxing effects of the alcohol when he suddenly steered the conversation towards computers and Information Technology. I volunteered that I had my own computer, which I had customised to suit my own needs; I enjoyed Information Technology so much so that I had actually taught a novice computer class at a local college. After a lull in the conversation which found us both gazing deeply into the comforting blaze of the fire, he suddenly started mumbling incoherently to himself; then he started talking about virtual reality and before I knew it he was rambling on about Unidentified Flying Objects (UFO’s) and Alien Abductions. I think at this point he had sensed my now genuine acceptance of his presence after our somewhat shaky start and perhaps my gradual liking of him. No doubt these feelings had been assisted by the amount of alcohol we had now drunk that he felt bold enough to broach such a subject. Indeed he confirmed my thoughts on the matter by offering that a lot of people, in his opinion, were wary of, or uneasy with people who were interested in UFO’s and Alien Abductions. He further offered that he thought this was unfair considering the number of sightings and encounters reported by such people as

airline pilots and other professional people. He also offered that in his opinion an interest in such a subject surely depicted an open and questioning mind. Before I could interject, he asked what my thoughts were on such matters and I quickly replied. “Having been born in 1941 I grew up in an era of flying saucer reports, tales of Aliens from outer space and during my teenage years I had seen many films and read a lot of material on the subject.” I waited for a response but none came so I pressed on. “If my memory serves me right the objects now reported as UFO’s were first described as ‘Flying Saucers’ after a sighting by Kenneth Arnold in 1947. That sighting occurred whilst he was flying over the Cascade Mountains in Washington State when he sighted a number of strange objects skimming the clouds. Eventually, when the press got hold of the sighting they coined the phrase ‘Flying Saucer’, on the basis that Arnold described his sighting as similar to flat stones or saucers being skimmed across a pond. The term UFO came into being during the 1950’s, although when exactly I cannot remember, but I believe it was the American military that invented the acronym.” I was about to continue when he interrupted me by saying. “You appear to have a good memory and seem to be well informed, would you mind telling me more.” As this was a subject on which I had some interest I was happy to oblige and getting into my stride continued. “During the early 1950’s I read a book written by Desmond Leslie and George Adamski whereby Adamski claimed to have met a Venusian in a Californian desert; the book included photographs purporting to show both flying saucers and a ‘mother ship’ with scout craft emerging from it.” I continued by saying, “Adamski also claimed to have made a trip around the Moon in one of these Venusian craft and spotted rivers and lakes whilst they were flying over the far side. Lunar landings and surveys of both the visible face and the back of the Moon show this is nonsense. Indeed, the Apollo missions certainly confirmed how barren the Lunar surface is!” Here I paused, sipped my beer before continuing. “At the time of reading Adamski’s book there was a tantalizing plausibility about his

account and one felt it was necessary to read all the available and relevant material before decrying his claims. However, after a while his more outlandish tales of having seen rivers and lakes on the far side of the Moon it became obvious his tales were no more than an elaborate hoax. It is amazing the number of people who still believed in his stories.” At this point my attentive listener stopped me in my stride, saying. “I do admire your open mind and clinical approach to the subject, but please continue.” I felt a little annoyed at his seemingly needless and patronising interruption, putting it down to the drink, and tried to pick up the momentum again before continuing. “There have been numerous reported cases of abductions and sexual interference to Humans and it is such cases I have difficulty in believing. For example, consider the abduction of Antonio Villas Boas in Brazil. He claims an egg-shaped object came out of the sky one night in 1957 whilst he was ploughing a field by the lights of his tractor. The object landed nearby which caused the tractor engine to fail. Then Humanoids appeared from within the object and started to approach him. Boas, being terrified, tried to run away but the Humanoids managed to catch him.

Adamski Style Flying Saucer.

Then with Boas struggling and screaming they dragged him into their UFO. According to Boas, whilst he was on their spacecraft they took off all of his clothes and took blood samples from him. Further he claims he was raped by a peculiar looking female who apart from making noises like an animal claimed she wanted to have his baby. All the reports I have read on this case state a full investigation was carried out by a doctor with the result that there was no evidence of Boas making up the story. Indeed, a doctor who examined Boas a few months after the incident said he found a number of peculiar scars on his body as well as noting symptoms similar to those of radiation poisoning. It is this type of case I find just a little bit too bizarre. I can but conclude that it enters the realm of fantasy as I believe it would be highly improbable for a normal male to have sexual intercourse with a far from attractive female in such hostile conditions? Although I

would acknowledge that supporters of this tale would claim Boas was under some Alien influence that enabled arousal, or something of that nature. To this extent, one way or another, I guess you cannot win.” I took this as an opportune time to buy the next round of drinks and to return the compliment of the Stranger’s earlier gesture by ordering whisky chasers as well. On my return the stranger thanked me and nervously grasped his beer glass putting it quickly to his mouth and did not stop till he was satiated. I pretended not to notice and paused to take a drink expecting my companion to make a comment but nothing was forthcoming. Observing that my companion seemed more relaxed and portrayed an absorbed and contented listener I continued with my theme. “A case that did intrigue at the time back in the 1960’s was the renowned Barney and Betty Hill abduction experience. This experience can be described as the first significant case of Alien abduction. The Hills’, after a holiday in Canada, were driving home at night to their home in Portsmouth, New Hampshire, USA. As they travelled through the White Mountains of New Hampshire they suddenly spotted a strange light moving through the sky. Several times they stopped their car so they could look at the object through binoculars. As they continued on their journey the object suddenly appeared very close to them; first in the front of the car and then toward the side of the car. At this point, if I remember correctly, Barney Hill stopped the car and got out onto the highway for a closer look with his wife’s binoculars. The UFO then silently shifted direction and again approached the car from the front. Looking through the binoculars Barney was astonished to see portholes along the length of the object. But what he suddenly found unbelievable were what appeared to be Humanoids within the UFO. Panic struck, Barney ran back to the car and the Hills’ then drove like the wind to get home. The terrified pair made it home without further incident although they reported noises and strange vibrations from the car during this latter part of the journey. According to reports at the time, the whole episode would have been forgotten except for the fact that Betty began to have recurring

nightmares about the whole experience. Even Barney began to suffer from apprehension and lack of sleep, which in turn caused a worsening of his duodenal ulcer. It was these events that triggered Barney Hill to go over the whole incident in his mind. He became very disturbed when he suddenly realised he could not account for over two hours of time between the period of encountering the UFO and arriving home. As time went by the Hills’ became more and more concerned and agitated about these events, and as their health was deteriorating they sought medical attention. After consultation with a local doctor they eventually ended up visiting a Boston psychiatrist to see if hypnotic regression could be instrumental in rationalising the whole experience. To the psychiatrist’s astonishment and amazement the regression sessions revealed a spine-chilling tale of Alien abduction. Both the Hills’ recounted they had been taken on board the Alien craft against their wills and they took pains to explain that they were completely powerless to prevent it happening. They described the Aliens as small in stature with pale skins and large eyes, with their whole being not very attractive from a Human point of view. On board the UFO they both claimed to be victims of unwanted, but numerous medical checks. In one of the medical checks Betty Hill claimed to have been subject to what appeared to be a pregnancy test, whilst Barney Hill claimed to have sperm taken from him. The Hills’ also claimed that they could communicate with the Aliens, and in an attempt to bring back evidence of their experiences they asked the leader of the Aliens if they could return with one of the books on board the UFO; after some discourse amongst themselves the Aliens refused the request. One of the more intriguing claims of this abduction case and taken by many devotees of UFO investigation as proof of the credibility of the whole tale was the star map shown to Betty Hill by the leader of the Aliens. Later under hypnotic regression Betty was able to draw the star chart from memory. At a later date a schoolteacher who was also an amateur astronomer attempted to see if the star map could be matched to any nearby star system. After building a scale model (based on the 1969 Catalogue of Nearby Stars) of the stars within a

radius of 33 light-years from the Earth, the teacher discovered the map corresponded very closely to a view of our Sun and neighbouring stars from a few light-years beyond the Zeti Reticuli system. Additionally, several astronomers confirmed the accuracy of the model; this had the effect of giving the tale more credibility. Even further, so as to add more intrigue to the case, it was discovered that a number of stars were not known to Earth astronomers till the publication of the 1969 catalogue, and this was approximately eight years after the Hills’ claimed abduction experience and Betty Hill’s drawing of the star map. Needless to say this added even more fuel to the case of UFO buffs, although the critics claimed it was just one of those coincidences. The critics have also claimed that this particular story, given its universal press coverage, opened the floodgates to all the abduction claims to date. Later investigation poured doubt on the whole story and another case was virtually relegated to the – how can I put it - complex workings, imagination and possible malfunctions of the Human brain.” Again I paused to offer my companion the chance to make a comment but he appeared content to listen to my outpourings. As I felt like a break I excused myself and went to the bar to purchase some cigars. My weakness being that the more I drink, the more I smoke only to curse my shortcoming the following morning when I awake with a sore and furry tongue, not to mention the fuzzy head. When I returned to my seat the Stranger asked me if I would be good enough to continue and tell him how much more I knew and thought about Alien abductions. Taking a sip of my beer and lighting up again, whilst thinking I will be sorry in the morning for buying more cigars, I continued thus. “During the eighties and nineties the number of alleged Alien abductions has mushroomed with the most common type of Alien being recognised and identified as the ‘Greys’. These creatures are claimed to be intelligent non-Human beings that are short in stature, have large, black, almond shaped eyes and grey skins. They have the ability to get up to all manner of tricks and horrifying activities. Such as appearing from out of nowhere in a darkened bedroom whilst you are fully conscious but unable to physically move, and your partner

sleeps soundly totally unaware of what is going on. They can glide through doors or walls; render their victims totally helpless whilst transporting them via ‘beams’ to the inside of their spaceships where they carry out all manner of nightmarish medical checks. Most of the material I have read on these abductions is really the stuff of your most horrible nightmare and as far as I am concerned they are either the product of an unbalanced mind or the outpourings of an author out to make a ‘quick killing’. As far as I am concerned I rate reports of such Aliens in the same category as fairies, hobgoblins, ogres, and little green men et cetera, tales to tell young children with the intention of hopefully stopping them wandering of into the woods alone! The most outlandish claims of Alien intrusion in my opinion are all the horrendous reports of cattle mutilation. It is these acts that I do not accept as they have all the hallmarks of Human intervention displaying the cruel and perverse side of Human nature.” Hardly pausing to take a breath I continued. “Apart from strange objects claimed to have been seen both in the skies and on the ground, contact with and abduction by strange Alien beings, there is also the enigma of the ‘Crop Circles’.

Typical face of a ‘GREY’ Alien. It is not something you would wish to confront in the privacy of your own bedroom at night.

As far as I can remember they started making news headlines back in the early eighties with reports from the Hampshire and Wiltshire areas of England.” At this point I lifted my pint glass to take a drink before continuing my explanation of the crop circles when my attentive listener became very agitated and anxiously interrupted me by saying. “Yes! Yes! I know all about crop circles, but I do not want you to digress from your observations on UFO’s and Alien abductions. So before you

continue let me tell you what I know of the so called crop circles.” I could sense a degree of cynicism in his voice and not wanting him to become more agitated I quickly nodded for him to continue. The Stranger then made short work of his whisky chaser and took a deep gulp of his beer, leant forward and said. “I know that in the summer of 1981 a person called Pat Delgado brought the existence of some mysterious circular depressions in the fields at Cheesefoot Head, Hampshire to the attention of the national press. I also know of a local meteorologist being involved whereby he attempted to explain the cause of the flattened crop circles as a natural atmospheric occurrence such as a whirlwind or similar type of vortex. But as the number and complexity of the crop circles grew, he found it more and more difficult to account for the mysterious and complex patterns; it was becoming clear that the formation of the more complex crop circles had to be of an artificial origin. Pat Delgado and another fellow called Colin Andrews started to compile case studies. They conducted interviews with farmers and other witnesses. They also photographed the formation of the crop circles from hillsides, from the air and in close-up on the ground. With every aerial viewing and site visit they made, every measurement and close examination they carried out, more curious details seemed to emerge. They also claimed that on examining the swirled and flattened circular formations hardly any of the plants involved were damaged. All this activity and investigation eventually led to a book being published called ‘Circular Evidence’ by Pat Delgado and Colin Andrews. This covered a detailed investigation of the flattened swirled crops phenomenon and was published in 1989. During the latter part of the eighties hundreds of crop circles were appearing all over the World with about just as many theories to account for their origin. Most of the circles were of a simple circular format with only the more complex formations catching the attention of the media. It has to be said that the investigations carried out by Pat Delgado and Colin Wilson did not solve the puzzle of the crop circles but merely presented all the evidence.”

At this juncture my associate suddenly stopped, took another swig of beer and asked me if I agreed with what he had just said. His sudden halt and question caught me totally by surprise and whilst rapidly gathering my thoughts I needed to take a long deep drink of my beer before replying. “Yes! I have not only read the book you have just mentioned but many others as well on the subject of crop circles. It does appear though that something very strange is going on. I am not too sure that Aliens are involved in the more complex designs? Although at the same time I find it difficult to believe that people are skilled enough to construct such complex patterns in a space of a single night?” My opinion, that the more complex circles were possibly beyond the capabilities of people, triggered the Stranger to interrupt again by saying. “Forgive me, but you are misguided as I know the simple crop circle formations are the result of a natural atmospheric phenomenon. Given time the evidence for this will eventually be caught on video and therefore confirmed. I also know for a fact that the more elaborate circles are the work of skilled and clever hoaxers.” Then he repeated himself. “Yes! I know it as a fact that the more elaborate circles are the work of clever hoaxers.” I did not press him any further on this subject as he appeared to get very agitated when he said he knew the more complex designs were that of clever hoaxers. I judged it prudent to continue with my observations on UFO’s saying. “Over the years there have been so many hoaxes, some obvious and others not so obvious, and that having read and viewed so much material on the subject of UFO’s, you will probably find it as no surprise to realise that I now take it all with a pinch of salt. Perhaps I am becoming a bit of a cynic.” My decision to continue appeared justified and I was happy to observe he had become more settled again, so I continued. “With the coming of the space age, I have become very sceptical of the notion of our planet being visited by extraterrestrial beings. The premise for my conclusion being based on the fact that probes had flown past most of the planets in the Solar System with landings being achieved on both Mars and Venus. All of the planets, barring Earth of course, have shown themselves to have such hostile

conditions as to be unacceptable to Human life form. I can accept that there might be other forms of life, albeit of a very low level, on a planet such as Mars and maybe on some of the moons of Jupiter or Saturn, such as Europa and Titan but so far there has been no real evidence. However, having said that, there are a number of seemingly mysterious photographs that have been taken of the surface of Mars during the National Aeronautics and Space administration (NASA) Viking missions.” Taking a quick puff on my cigar I continued. “Numerous people claim the 1976 photographs taken of the Cydonia region of Mars purport to show an image of a Human like face which has been aptly dubbed the ‘Face on Mars.’ It has to be admitted that when looking at the photographs produced in newspapers, magazines or computer compact disks it is easily discernible and indeed does appear to have Human characteristics. NASA has virtually ridiculed the assertion, claiming it is no more than a trick of the light drawing an analogy to the numerous similarities that can be found here on Earth. Such shapes under certain light conditions can be perceived in all manner of things, for example gnarled tree trunks, cliff faces, mountains and cloud formations et cetera. UFO buffs, amongst other people, are not happy with this explanation as they point out that the Cydonia region was photographed in July and August, 1976 from different orbital positions which due to the different times afforded different lighting and angle of shot.” Pausing to take another puff of my cigar I then added. “It is claimed that later enhancement of the photographs by computer experts, instead of giving credibility to the NASA assertions, added to the mystery by claiming they could detect new features such as the presence of eyeballs. The enigma does not end with the ‘Face on Mars’. There are other questionable objects on the surface in the Cydonia region. Not far from the ‘Face on Mars’ are objects that are throwing triangular shaped shadows on the Martian surface under certain light conditions.

The planet Mars has an equatorial diameter of 6794 km (4222 miles). Its mean distance from the Sun is 228,000,000 km (143,000,000 miles). A day on Mars is almost the same as the Earth at 24 hours 40 minutes, although the Martian year is nearly twice that of the Earth. Mars experiences global dust storms and powerful telescopes can detect occasional clouds in the tenuous Martian atmosphere. The Martian polar caps increase and decrease in conjunction with the Martian seasons.

Various sources are claiming these to be pyramidal constructions built by either a now extinct Martian civilisation or by other entities that not only built or were involved with the pyramids on Mars but were also the intelligent source for the construction of the pyramids on Earth.”

I stopped at this point to offer the Stranger a chance to respond but, again, as he appeared quite content to listen to me I took a quick drink of my beer and continued thus. “There are certain people who are convinced that something sinister is going on amongst the advanced nations here on Earth that are capable of space exploration. They will cite the unexplained failures of the Russian Phobos 1, orbiter and lander, which were lost on route to Mars during 1988. The Russian Phobos 2, orbiter and lander, that was lost in the vicinity of Phobos during 1988, and also the Russian Mars 96, orbiter and lander, that failed to leave Earth orbit. These all add up to a significant number of failures and obviously beg the question of why so many unsuccessful missions? When you consider the total effort involved and the cost of these missions, not to mention loss of national pride, it really does make you think! Where the loss of one mission could be called a frustratingly costly and unfortunate accident, are we justified in thinking the loss of two missions in such a short space is bordering on incompetence? What are we to think then on the loss of three or more missions? Still, it has to be said, these things do happen. Could it be that we mere mortals do not fully appreciate the hugely complex technicalities and vast distances (millions of kilometres) involved in these missions, to realise, that perhaps a score of five out of ten is bordering on the miraculous. Adding more fuel to the ‘sinister goings on’ fire, it is not only the Russians who have been the victims of unexplained failures as these same people think NASA is compounding the felony by pursuing an elaborate conspiracy by quoting, as an example, the unexplainable failure of the 1992 Mars Observer mission. It failed according to NASA to send back pictures of the Martian surface, which reportedly included the Cydonia area of Mars! According to NASA the probe was entering its parking orbit when all contact was lost. During 1999 two American space probes to Mars failed, and failed quite spectacularly! The first, being the very embarrassing loss of the 80 million dollar Mars Polar Lander on 23rd September 1999. NASA would have us believe the failure was fundamentally due to

confusion over imperial and metric units, causing a navigational problem? Really! I would not expect sixth form students to be so incompetent; with a multi-million dollar spacecraft and all the expertise within and around NASA it really does take a bit of swallowing. The second failure in 1999 was the loss of the 165 million dollar Mars Polar Lander. This craft, according to NASA, was on course and functioning correctly when twelve minutes before ‘touchdown’ all contact was lost. Again, really! These two episodes, within a matter of months, amount to nearly 250 million dollars down the pan with not so much as a firing squad in sight. Still I guess there must have been a few smacked wrists, what is a couple of hundred million dollars anyway; just who is kidding who here? Still, they say life is stranger than fiction. (See Author’s Note at the end of this chapter). So the mystery remains, is there something sinister going on or not, you have to ask? NASA does not help to defuse the situation by its great reluctance to plan further photographic fly-overs of the Cydonia area. Personally, I cannot see the reason for this reluctance especially when they are hoping to map the planet with their Mars Global Surveyor. From a near-global orbit the probe will image most of the planet’s surface from an average height of 378 km (236 miles). As I understand it, the mission the Mars Global Surveyor will complete, is one orbit around Mars approximately every two hours; with each new orbit placing the probe over a different area of Mars. Thus it does not take much imagination to work out that over a period of time the whole of the planet’s surface will be mapped, so why the alleged reluctance relating to the Cydonia area?” At this point my drinking companion put up his hand gesturing a halt! “Forgive me, but I feel I have opened up a floodgate, you do get carried away, don’t you!” he spluttered. The interruption was justified as I was well and truly becoming very loquacious and half apologising I went to the bar and ordered more drinks. Whether or not it was my turn to buy the drinks I was past caring but thought it an appropriate juncture to break the conversation and give him time to ponder on my observations and opinions. On returning I found my companion more settled. As a consequence and as I was enjoying

myself coupled with the fact that he had thrust himself on my company, I selfishly continued without due consideration to any opinion he might now have. “With regard to the other anomalies in the Cydonia region, such as the claimed pyramid constructions, the case for an extinct Martian race is further encouraged by the analysis of the Mariner and Viking images which show clear evidence that water may once have flowed in great abundance on the Martian surface. If water did indeed flow cross the Martian surface many aeons ago then the implication is that there must have been major changes to the climate of Mars, as the environment on Mars today is not conducive to the presence of water. Mars has a very thin atmosphere consisting mainly of carbon dioxide, with small amounts of nitrogen and other gases. It can be misleading when referring to an atmosphere on Mars; with the pressure being below 10 millibars everywhere it is more like a vacuum than an atmosphere. It is also very cold due to its distance from the Sun and its very tenuous atmosphere with the warmest midsummer temperatures reaching about 220 C in the day and the night temperatures plummeting to -530 C. In fact surface temperature on Mars can range from 220 C to -1250 C. Therefore if we discount all our neighbours in the Solar System as being able to support intelligent life then we have to start postulating about other possible life supporting planets orbiting other stars in our Milky Way Galaxy. I believe there are about 100,000 million stars in our Galaxy (see Appendix Seven) and given this huge number I consider it arrogant to dismiss the possibility of life on the planetary systems around many of these stars. Even when you take account of the fact that more than half the stars in the galaxy are binary, with some systems consisting of three or more stars, who is to say there are no life harbouring planets orbiting any of these stars? The only problem as far as I can envisage is the vast distances involved; the nearest star to Earth is Proxima Centauri, which is about four light-years away. So, even travelling at the speed of light, which to my knowledge is impossible, would mean a round trip

taking approximately eight years to complete. Other stars in our Galaxy are tens, hundreds and even thousands of light-years away, so even if one could travel at the speed of light you could not make the journey within a Human life span. So I find it difficult to accept we are being visited by Aliens from within the Milky Way Galaxy. I appreciate there are millions of galaxies, separated by millions of light-years, within the known Universe. But due to the enormous scale of it all, and to my mind, it more than quarantines us very effectively from coming into contact with any extraterrestrials. Although taking into account the immensity of the known Universe I consider it very foolish to discount that there are no other life forms recognisable or unrecognisable. So it should come as no surprise to you that I regarded people who have claimed to have been abducted or seduced by Aliens as a little odd to say the least.” Struggling to his feet and then leaning forward across the table in a very determined manner, my self-appointed drinking partner looked me straight in the eye and said. “You seem very sure of your facts don’t you? But what would be your reaction if I told you that I had been abducted by Aliens, experienced many trips in their spacecraft, given information on many things such as virtual reality and time travel. Then as a consequence and by the medium of dreams been compelled to write about these things.” Jokingly I replied. “Whatever you’re drinking, I’m going to have the same.” I finished my sentence with a slightly nervous chuckle fearing my earlier assessment of this ‘character’ was possibly wrong and I have been stupidly ensnared into a drinking session with a crackpot. “No! No! Please don’t misunderstand me!” My companion blurted out. “I am telling you the truth. I can see from your expression you think I am mad or drunk.” He did not help his case when raising himself up from his stool by spilling some of his beer over himself and then muttering an obscene explicit to himself. Suddenly with a wild look in his eyes, he blurted out. “Stay there! Don’t go away, I won’t be a minute!” He then drunkenly staggered towards the Inn door. As he disappeared out into the night I was slightly dumbfounded and failed to quickly make my escape before he was back with two dirty

carrier bags that were stuffed with paper. Almost collapsing on his stool he nervously but excitedly slurred. “Now you will see - look at some of the papers and you will find I am telling you the truth! The contents of these notes will surely show you I am not mad.” He then dragged out a few sheets of almost indecipherable scribbling and with trembling hands thrust them at me. “Yes! You read these and see if I am telling the truth or not,” he challenged. I ran my eyes over his notes, but due to the amount of alcohol we had consumed struggled to concentrate - with great difficulty I began to decipher some of his scribbling. Although not an expert by any means, I found myself reading about such things as time travel and most mind boggling of all, about a Virtual Reality Universe! The implications of what I was reading took my breath away. The deciphering may have been tiresome, but the content of the little I read was impressive and I began wondering if indeed he was telling the truth? Suddenly sensing a change in attitude he said. “Look! I’ve no desire, neither courage nor the strength to have these notes of mine properly typed up and subsequently printed. But it must be done! People have a right to know of these things. Please say you will take on this task as I have had as much as I can take. Just look at me, I am a complete mess and on the edge of a nervous breakdown, I just can’t take anymore, please do it,” he pleaded. “You told me earlier that you have a computer and have already written a book, so apart from understanding my handwriting, it should be a fairly easy task for you to undertake. Please say you will!” He insisted again. Apart from the drink dulling my senses it was that terrible tiredness and pleading in his eyes that made me agree and I said I would have a go. “Thank you, thank you.” He drunkenly gushed and then gave the impression that a great weight had suddenly been lifted from his shoulders. “You must let me pay for the rest of the drinks. You just do not know how relieved I feel - thank you again - yes, thank you! Although there is just one more thing I must ask of you...” “What is that?” I slowly replied wondering what was coming next. “Don’t be alarmed!” He quickly assured me. “It is just that I would like your word and handshake on the matter.” Judging there would be no

harm in this gesture and as it would certainly help to calm him down I agreed and shook his hand, at the same time giving my word that I would see the task through to the end. Having done as he requested I felt justified by adding that if I managed to type up his notes and was successful in having them published we would need to sort the problem of possible payment and how much he would want. His reaction to this possible payment was swift and intense. “No! No! Definitely not! I don’t want payment of any kind! I just want peace of mind. I don’t care what you do! Please just make every effort to get my notes published and if you make any money through your efforts, then it’s up to you what you want to do?” Well! I thought to myself, I certainly was not going to spend a lot of time deciphering and writing up his notes without seeking some recompense, be it now, or at a later date! He may think he has a message for Mankind, but I was not too sure. Although his dramatic entry to the Inn and his intrusion into my company - his ability to engage my attention and encourage my verbosity did intrigue me – that terrible pleading look in those sunken eyes of his, did fire an intense curiosity and desire to decipher his notes and thus fulfil my promise to him. My mind was still dwelling on these thoughts and before I could reply he was away to the bar and ordering another round of drinks. Up till now my thinking was relatively clear, but whilst he was at the bar I could feel the ale and the whisky beginning to take control and cloud my thinking. When he returned he appeared a lot calmer although much more the worse for wear that was made obvious by his teetering and spilling beer as he clumsily put the drinks on the table. “Well, that’s settled then,” he managed to slur. “You just don’t know how relieved I am. Oh! The release! Cheers.” Our conversation (if that is the right word) over the next hour was understandably ‘beer talk’, and I am afraid I have no recollection to what we rambled on about, except for the last thing that he mentioned and it struck me as rather strange even then. He seemed to slightly sober up and with a strange benevolent look slurred. “You will be doing a wonderful service for the Human race and your Guardian Angel will look over you.” The look on my face obviously

triggered his next words. “No! Please, do not interrupt me, for what I say is true, for believe it or not, I have met my Guardian Angel and many other Messengers which come from beyond our Universe. Yes, there have been many Messengers in the past and even today there are lots and lots of people who are being favoured by Angelic Messengers.” I could remember choking on my cigar at this point, which only encouraged him to continue albeit in a much more excited and agitated manner. “I see you take me for a fool for what I have just told you. That will be short lived for you will see, you will see!” These last words almost sounded like a threat and he brought the whole proceedings abruptly to an end. Whilst still having about half a pint of beer left in his glass he staggered to his feet and slurred. “I don’t feel well, too much to drink, I must go now,” and there was a considerable pause before he finally slurred. “Remember your promise; you must remember you have given your word to me.” Whereupon he staggered across the room, struggled to open and stumbled through the Inn door, and without any further due ceremony, vanished into the night. By now my mental processes had been well and truly dulled by all the alcohol and it took a while before the thought hit me. “Hell! This guy must be driving.” I stuttered aloud. Sanity kicked in and I rushed out into the car park to catch him. Alas it was just the cold night air and the quiet of the countryside that greeted me. He was lost to the night. “Oh! Good grief!” I said to myself, “I hope he will be alright.” Seeing there was nothing else I could do I returned to the Inn to finish my beer. I sat and tried to reflect on the evening’s events but duly failed, although it did suddenly dawn on me that I did not even know his name. I guess that was down to the manner of his initial approach and consequently being so absorbed in our various discussions aided and abetted by the amount we both had drunk, this oversight did not occur to me. Shrugging my shoulders to an invisible audience I picked up the two ‘tatty’ carrier bags with his notes inside and departed. As I shuffled off down the country lane for home I again tried to recollect the evening’s conversation. But on failing again to do so, I concentrated

on my navigational skills to find home. Even though the cold night air and walk had sobered me up slightly, on arriving home I was now in no mood to pursue the evenings events; being both tired and cold I just wanted my bed. So without a seconds thought I unceremoniously slung the two carrier bags containing all the documents into a corner of the kitchen and did just that - I retired gratefully to bed. The following morning over breakfast I thought about my enigmatic drinking companion from the night before. Hoping he had had a safe journey home or to wherever or what his destination had been. I was still very curious and uneasy about his claims and the notes he had given to me. Not to mention my commitment to him and his last words which seemed almost threatening? But struggling with a hangover from our previous nights encounter, with an irate wife complaining about the state I was in and for leaving two tatty carrier bags full of dirty notes on the floor of her kitchen, I decided to store the contents of the two carrier bags in a cupboard in the kitchen with the intention of looking through them at a more convenient time. The storage of two piles of dirty notes in one of the cupboards was not taken lightly. I therefore deemed it would be prudent to quickly finish off breakfast and attend a number of pressing commitments I had for that day. Returning home tired that evening I was not in the mood for much talking. Also I judged it would not be wise to mention the previous evening’s episode nor look at the notes stored in the kitchen; that’s if, it occurred to me, they had not been thrown out by an indignant wife? The next day other priorities demanded their turn and again the reading of the notes were put on the back burner. As the days passed my memory of the whole episode began to fade. But then, after about two weeks, I started to experience disturbed sleep patterns. For a few nights I could not understand why this was so. Then one night I had a very vivid and unsettling dream reliving the drinking session, my promise and commitment I had made to the Stranger. I suddenly woke up sweating profusely, my mind in turmoil as I remembered his last words to me in the Inn. I cannot really

describe what came over me, but I leapt out of bed and made straight for the cupboard where the carrier bags were stored. But before reaching the stairs a terrible thought struck me - what if my wife had actually thrown them out? At this point I started to panic and almost falling down the stairs and knocking over a chair I eventually reached the kitchen and feverishly wrenched open the cupboard door. What a relief, the notes were still there. By this time, awoken by all the noise I had been making, my wife appeared at the kitchen door demanding. “What on earth was going on?” Still shaking I sat down and began to explain about the Stranger and the dream I had experienced. “It’s too much alcohol and an over active imagination, that’s your trouble!” She retorted. “If you want to write a book about whatever you are going on about, then do so. But you will have to think up a better excuse than that for your over indulgence!” She continued, “Just look at yourself, you had better go and have a shower and pull yourself together.” On that observation my wife left me in the kitchen and returned to the bedroom to dress. As I was still distraught and perspiring heavily from my nights dream I decided she was right; the best thing to do was have a shower and try to calm down. It was patently obvious, that my wife who had no interest in such things as Aliens or UFO’s, was not going to be a receptive listener and was still bristling from my recent drunken escapade. Having had my shower I was now finding myself much more relaxed and therefore I sat down and attempted to read the Stranger’s tale. Numerous pages were extremely difficult to understand because of the bad handwriting, the smudging and the staining. As I had problems in making any coherent sense of his writing, I decided the best thing to do was to read and decipher the notes as best as I could - type them up on my computer and perhaps then, when I read them - they would hopefully make much more sense. The morning and the rest of the day passed quickly and I became a lot more settled. In thinking the task before me would be a simple matter I was soon to be sadly disillusioned. With the best of my effort I was getting bogged down with a lot of the detail. This was not

helped by his terrible scrawl - numerous sections were also impossible to read due to the dire state of his notes. Hence as the days passed I found it more and more necessary to do a lot of research on subjects such as psychology, physics, cosmology and history in an effort to make sense of a lot of his claims. As I proceeded with the task and comprehend what he was stating, I was beginning to get more and more hooked on the task before me. Also, intriguingly, I found myself becoming increasingly annoyed if I was deflected from my work. So, much to my wife’s irritation, I relentlessly pressed on with a total disregard for other people’s feelings or time. My time and effort were eventually rewarded. I had honoured my commitment to the Stranger as I had deciphered all of his notes, typed them up on my computer and with much research on my part had finally produced the book you are now reading. I should add that I owe a lot to my wife’s patience and indulgence with me over this period; I must have been very difficult to live with during the deciphering, researching and writing of this book. Therefore conscience dictated to make amends and I atoned by buying her a new wardrobe which happily, pleased her very much. Additionally, I felt we both needed a break and as such I booked a much deserved holiday for us both in the sun. Over the previous years I had read a lot of material regarding UFO’s and related subjects but the revelations in the Stranger’s notes were completely different. It is my opinion that his experiences and claims are very convincing and I must confess are extremely disturbing. They conflicted with many of my own preconceived ideas that I had about life and the Universe. Therefore I offer no apology in offering a word of caution to those people who may find the following chapters about our Universe and indeed our very existence very challenging, unsettling and possibly frightening! A further intriguing aspect you will discover on reading this book is the similar motivating dream episodes experienced by both the Stranger and myself. Although it must be stressed the Stranger’s night time traumas and experiences were, according to his notes, much more intense and chilling than those of mine. Nevertheless the question that begs to be answered

is this purely coincidental or is it the manner in which the Aliens have their very being and wishes made known? Since my involvement I have pondered on this many times and have wondered how many other people have travelled this path and have been inhibited, for whatever reason, from voicing and making known their own encounters. In producing the book, the reader will come across a number of additional photographs and diagrams to the original notes, that I felt were desirable to illustrate the text; as they say, a picture is worth a thousand words. I must also confess that the diagrams were also included to help me elucidate on a number of issues. I certainly had a lot of trouble with the chapters headed ‘Illusions’ and ‘Time Travel’. I can only hope I have done justice to the original material. You will find in reading this book there is no obvious continuity between the chapters. This is due partly to a considerable number of pages being very badly stained and as such unintelligible - significantly there appeared to be many pages missing; pages which I can only assume linked all the events. Thus I have done my best to attain the perceived correct chronological order. I do not pretend to be a great or gifted writer and have also tried to faithfully reproduce the original text and images. In doing so a lot of the encounters come across as lectures given by the Aliens and because of the content can read almost like a text book - with the possibly of leaving the reader somewhat breathless in their revelation? - I deem this as a small penalty to pay for the truth. As such I have not consciously deviated from the original text, thereby ensuring the integrity and factualness of the original notes. Nevertheless in this opening chapter – and at the risk of contradicting myself - I have exercised a certain amount of ‘writer’s license’ in expanding on my conversation with the Stranger, especially when discussing UFO’s, abduction cases and the possibility of life in our Solar System, the Milky Way Galaxy and beyond. If you find the ongoing style tedious due to the length of the lectures I implore you to press on. The claims resulting from this contact will astound and astonish you. If you ‘stick with it’ I can assure you that your diligence and patience will be well rewarded. The following

chapters are the Stranger’s tale, the authenticity of which, I leave to you, dear reader to decide. Although I am convinced of my conclusion, which I hope you will share by the time you have finished reading this book. Author’s Note: According to The Sunday Times, December 28, 2003 there have been 32 attempts to reach Mars since 1960 when the USSR launched the first; two-thirds of which have failed.

ALIEN ENCOUNTER

And I looked, and, behold, a whirlwind came out of the north, a great cloud, and a fire infolding itself, and a brightness was about it, and out of the midst thereof as the colour of amber, out of the midst of the fire. Also out of the midst thereof came the likeness of four living creatures. And this was their appearance; they had the likeness of a man. And every one had four faces, and every one had four wings. And their feet were straight feet; and the sole of their feet was like the sole of a calf’s foot: and they sparkled like the colour of burnished brass. And they had the hands of a man under their wings on their four sides; and they four had their faces and their wings.

Their wings were joined one to another; they turned not when they went; they went every one straight forward. As for the likeness of their faces, they four had the face of a man, and the face of a lion, on the right side: and they four had the face of an ox on the left side; they four also had the face of an eagle. Thus were their faces: and their wings were stretched upward; two wings of every one were joined one to another, and two covered their bodies.

And they went every one straight forward: whither the spirit was to go, they went; and they turned not when they went. As for the likeness of the living creatures, their appearances was like burning coals of fire, and like the appearance of lamps: it went up and down among the living creatures; and the fire was bright, and out of the fire went forth lightning. And the living creatures ran and returned as the appearance of a flash of lightning. Ezekiel 1:4 – 14

The most unsettling realisation for me is that I have witnessed and indeed experienced the same compulsive dream phenomenon as the Stranger. I do not pretend the night time traumas I experienced were as intense or chilling, or that the detail was any way near to the amazing amount of information as my drunken drinking partner had

recollected and put to paper, but it is nonetheless an interesting and disturbing coincidence. My dreams merely re-played my meeting with the Stranger at the Inn; although it could be argued that the most disturbing coincidence was the extreme compunction (if those are the right words) to write up his notes and produce this book. It is very sobering to recognise that if my dreams were also a manifestation of an actual event - then what of the person I had met at the Inn? The Stranger had written what seemed an introduction to his notes and therefore to maintain the integrity and authenticity of our meeting and his recorded adventures I start his incredible story thus:

The persistent dreams or perhaps some would argue that a better definition would be nightmares only stopped when I began to put pen to paper. Indeed, without the intervention of a very strong feeling compelling me to record the details, then the following tale and revelations would possibly have remained forever in my dreams. Therefore you can imagine my amazement (even, after having read over my own narrative many times) to find these bizarre happenings were coming from my very own hand. I still find it difficult to accept that they were actual incidences I had been exposed to; the only reality being that each episode (bar my initial encounter) was finalised and wiped from my mind once I had, to the best of my ability, committed the details to paper. The only exception to the dreams was the sample of Lunar rock the Aliens allowed me to bring back to Earth as you will discover later in my narration. I would imagine a psychoanalyst saying that people dream every night, with some dreams not registering at all whilst others remaining crystal clear to the moment of awakening and beyond. In my case, even the most vivid dreams are soon forgotten and I tend to have very little recollection of even the most outlandish nightmares. So it came as a very, if not uncomfortable surprise at the time, to find I could remember the following events in astonishing detail! I am now

convinced they were not dreams in the normal sense of the word. I was to my amazement, recalling all my very real ‘live’ experiences of ‘actual contact with extraterrestrials’. Although I use the term extraterrestrials, the truth is, the Aliens I came in contact with were not such in the sense that we understand the word. They were Beings or more accurately, Gods from beyond our concept of the Universe. Our Gods, the Gods of old, the creators of the Universe and all life that exists in it. The evidence for such a statement is based on the memories I subsequently put to paper; the experiences seem to belong to a fantasy world, a surreal world and far removed from reality. Having read over my notes time and time again, I have absolutely no doubt in my mind that I could not have written them from my own conscious thoughts or imagination. To be honest, even after numerous readings, I still do not understand most of the detail. I am convinced the experiences are not the result of dreams. How do you dream about things of which you have little knowledge or no interest? Having been brought up in a working class family I have had a minimum level of education. There were times when my father was unable to work because of ill health and my mother had to scrub doorsteps for the family to survive. Also being a sickly child I missed a lot of the meagre schooling that was on offer to a poor working class child at the time. The schooling I did receive concentrated mainly on English, writing, arithmetic and religion. Very little science or art was taught and subjects such as astronomy, geology, biology, physics and classical history were consciously not recognised nor thought appropriate. There was, however a modicum of teaching covering modern history. I use the term modern history in a very generous sense. Looking back if memory serves me correctly it was more a conditioning to the wonders and magnificence of the then British Empire. The large red areas on the World map, which hung in the main assembly hall, are still vivid in my mind. It was only as I grew older I learned of other disciplines but considered them to be unattainable, secured within the realms of University life; far beyond a person of my humble background.

An additional factor that hammered home the truth of my encounters was the experience of the first traumatic encounter! I can still vividly recall the first meeting with the extraterrestrials and being taken aboard their craft. Even now I am struggling to find the words to convey the reality of it all. I can assure you there is only one possible conclusion that I can come to - I have definitely been a victim - some may say otherwise - of not only an Alien abduction but also an encounter of far deeper and more mind shattering significance than I was mentally equipped to deal with. As you will soon learn this encounter with the Beings has left its mark - the reason for this is still beyond me. Following a short period of nightmarish dreams, of which I could remember very little detail, I suddenly awoke in the early hours of one morning soaked in a pool of perspiration and a mouth as dry as dust. I sat up in bed and although bleary I had a vivid and very real recollection of the night’s revelation. Further, and to my surprise, I felt an overwhelming and compelling urge to go downstairs and write about my dreams. Incredibly my brain seemed to be telling me that if I put pen to paper it would, so to speak, purge my whole being. It would feel almost like making a confession - it would cleanse my soul and free me from the nights torment. So it will come as no surprise to you that I spent most of the day writing and rewriting the nights experience; it was a slow, painful process. However, by early evening when I had completed my task, the relief was indescribable now I could relax and sleep in peace. This feeling of peacefulness and tranquillity, a sense of having cleansed my soul, lasted for a number of days and nights. Hence it came as a nasty and devastating shock when the dreams started again. The scenario in the morning was again repeated with my suddenly sitting up in bed soaked in perspiration and able to recollect, in a most vivid manner, all the details of the nights happenings. Again, I felt the same overwhelming and compelling urge to hurry downstairs and to record my dreams. Once more my whole being was driven by an intense feeling that if I put pen to paper I would be cleansed with my mind at rest freeing me from the nights torment.

Amazingly, all the subsequent dreams appeared to pick up almost from my previous nights unwelcome dreams - although the earlier experiences were becoming much less pronounced as new events took precedence in my mind. The same very strong desire to holistically cleanse my system by recording the happenings seemed to flood through me. Again I sought refuge and salvation in rushing downstairs and committing the details to paper. Having toiled for most of the day the same feeling of relief flooded through me when I had completed the task - once more I felt at peace with the World - I was taken with a sense of peace and tranquillity. Would this be the last, I wondered? What exactly did it all mean? Again, in the early hours of the following morning, I awoke in the now familiar pool of perspiration with a dry mouth and the same overwhelming and compelling urge to go downstairs and add to my growing notes. Events had now repeated themselves -I was having a prolonged dream during the night and then early the following morning suddenly waking up, agitated and sweating, together with this uncontrollable compulsion to commit the details to paper - this was then followed by a number of nights of restful slumber before the next dream; this pattern continued for about six weeks and the events were certainly draining my strength. Suddenly the disturbed nights miraculously stopped as abruptly as they had begun. I had by now a lot of material documenting my dreams. Such was my condition by this time I just put the papers in a drawer and did my best to forget the whole thing. I was extremely tired and had lost an appreciable amount of weight. My appetite had but almost disappeared. I was extremely irritable with myself and any unlucky person who happened to cross my path. As days turned to weeks the trauma of the nights faded and my strength started to return. I was again eating heartedly and in a far better and more contented frame of mind. It came as a startling shock when the dreams began to occur again. Once more I would awaken in the early hours alarmed and perspiring - though to a lesser extent. Again the same compulsion manifested itself; I had to record the details. When completed again I had a feeling of euphoria flooding through my body. Such a feeling

as I would imagine a drug addict might feel - not that I had ever had any experience of drugs. Having started again, the scenario continued for several weeks - the nightmarish dreams at night - then having this terrible urge to put pen to paper the following morning and always followed by this feeling of euphoria once I had completed my task. At the time it was quite beyond me and I was not altogether sure why I behaved in such a determined fashion. I cannot explain why I had this compelling feeling to complete with a degree of urgency the task of putting all the detail on paper; I do remember experiencing a kind of apprehension in reading through the material I had written. Yet it was confusing and disturbing insomuch that I had experienced the dreams, written about them, filed the papers and then forgotten the detail. It was not until long after the last dream that I had both the necessary courage and curiosity to retrieve all of the papers and read all of them! I cannot reiterate enough that during the period of recording the details, I was in a determined and quite frequently, a fatigued and very agitated state. At the time, although it might seem strange, when I was recollecting and writing the details of the dreams, none of the information seemed to be registering. I felt that I was floating through the whole experience - in effect I was in a trance like state. Having thoroughly read my experiences on numerous occasions, it was bizarre that I could not, on a conscious level, actually recollect my encounters with the Aliens. The only conscious memory I have and which remains vivid and yet puzzling is my first encounter with them on the military range? All the subsequent encounters seem as if it was someone else who had been taken - I was in some way recounting and writing of their adventure. I have sat for hours trying to search the far reaches of my mind for any hint or clue as to my actual involvement. I have to confess that I cannot recall anything that would initiate such a dream experience. I now have only my notes to recall my tale. I can only reiterate that I have no conscious recollection of the subsequent encounters. It is, amongst other things, the lack of conscious memory to reinforce my written record

of the actual experience that has brought me almost to a nervous breakdown. I have only my notes; if I did not experience the events why did I write about them? Why could not my mind consciously recall the encounters? Another aspect of the whole apparent fantasy that has greatly troubled me came about when I sought private medical help for my deteriorating health; the doctor and specialists carried out numerous examinations and tests. However they seemed to have difficulty in explaining my ‘alleged’ nightmares and my overwhelming compunction to write about them. When I started to mention the details I had written about as a result of my dreams the medical staff certainly did not want to know. Neither did they show any real interest in my notes. This I found puzzling. I perceived they interpreted the situation as a self-induced fantasy. When I offered to try and explain the detail of my notes they said it was not necessary. All they called upon me to do was to just talk generally about my experiences. “It would be therapeutic,” one specialist said. I found the response both strange and upsetting as I imagined he would have at least given the impression of being very interested in my ‘jottings’ if only to placate me. I wondered at the time that perhaps the Aliens were manipulating him too - or was I, as a result of my dreams becoming paranoid? I just did not know any more. During one of the many tests and examinations which involved xrays and body scans the doctor asked if I had broken any bones or suffered skeletal pain in the last couple of years. I said that I had not and enquired why he was asking such a question. He replied the xrays and body scans had revealed I was suffering from an advanced stage of osteoporosis. At the time I did not have a clue what the condition was and asked the doctor what he meant. He replied that he was intrigued and amazed that I had not fractured any bones as I had an advanced stage of what is commonly known as brittle bone disease. You can imagine my own amazement and surprise when he volunteered that a superbly healthy individual such as an astronaut, when subjected to a long period of weightlessness, suffered from the disease. As you can imagine, this last statement really caught my

attention. I asked the doctor if he would mind explaining the whole process to me. This he readily agreed to do and I have included his explanation here; I feel it is important to record the details so you can make your own judgement. Briefly for the record the doctor’s explanation was as follows: he said that bent backs, losing height and brittle bones are not inevitable signs of growing older but they are the result of a disease known as osteoporosis. The disease affects roughly about one in four woman and fewer men. It develops silently over many years, gradually and without any initial discomfort. Symptoms usually begin to show after the age of fifty but can appear as early as the late thirties. He said osteoporosis literally means porous or brittle bones; bones that have lost much of the calcium that they need to remain strong and firm. As to the causes of the disease he said that to make and maintain strong and healthy bones you need a diet rich in calcium together with exercise throughout your life. The most common type of osteoporosis appears in women and follows the menopause or change of life and is associated with the loss of the female hormone, oestrogen, when the ovaries stop working. The disease may be inherited, genetically in families. Other contributing factors are lack of movement as a result of having been bedridden for a long period, or being paralysed. In men, women and children, osteoporosis can also be caused by certain diseases or the side effects of some medicines such as steroids taken over long periods. Additionally, too little calcium in the diet, lack of exercise, excessive alcohol and smoking are all thought to increase the risk of osteoporosis. The doctor then stressed that in our modern World inactivity was a contributing factor to the disease; so as to emphasise his point said the disease shows up most dramatically in astronauts who lose calcium from their bones very rapidly in weightless conditions. This highlights the importance for all of us of keeping mobile; again, emphasising that the bedridden or desk-confined office workers, who drive to work and take no exercise, are at greater risk. He said men are less at risk because of their denser bone structure but that older men still need to ensure that they take regular exercise and that their

calcium intake remains good. He then added that one in forty men is prone to the disease. After having fully recognised the implication of the above, you can imagine that my mind was in turmoil. Before the episodes with my dreams I had not been a heavy drinker although I did occasionally enjoy a pint or two of beer. I did not smoke. Although I had had a sickly childhood in my late teens I became a very active person and never succumbed to the ease of lifts or escalators, preferring to use the stairs instead. I was a regular swimmer, walked and cycled a lot, and ate a high calcium diet as I had a particular fancy for all cheeses and dairy products. Thus by the time I reached my twenties it would be very difficult, from an outward appearance, to perceive I had actually suffered a poor and sickly childhood. There was no history, as far as I knew, of this disease in my family and I had not been on any long-term medication nor had I taken any steroids. Before the trauma of my dreams I was a fairly tall and big boned person. Although I have to admit to a poor and sickly childhood and did recognise that my condition could be the legacy of such an unfortunate upbringing. Yet memory dictates that although I came from a very poor family there was always plenty of milk to drink both at home and at school. Nevertheless, I have to admit my recent experiences have left me a former shadow of myself. I was uncomfortable with the thought that weightless conditions could have had a dramatic effect on my bone structure. I pondered if my abduction by the Aliens had exposed me to weightlessness and possibly this was their way of subtlety leaving a further mark of my involvement with them? Having had time to reflect over my notes time and time again also taking into account my present physical and mental condition, I am more than convinced I have been a victim of an Alien abduction. I use the word victim because of the present state of my mind and body, the Aliens would probably argue otherwise and that there is a higher purpose to all the events; only time will tell. So I leave you with the experiences of my encounter with the Gods and their subsequent mind-blowing revelations. I leave you to formulate your own conclusions. But the truth is hard to avoid. I

make no apologies for reiterating and stressing that I have no conscious memory of any of the events (apart from my initial contact with the Beings) about to be revealed to you. The only awareness of my experiences and subsequent knowledge is recorded in this tale which, as has been explained, came to me in the form of many dreams:

The dog was way ahead of me and soon disappeared into the dusk. Only his frantic barking that echoed back through the darkening landscape gave testimony to his very existence. I could not help thinking to myself that perhaps yet another rabbit had probably eluded him, but I guess it was more the thrill of the chase than the actual capture that excited him. I had taken Ben for walks on the military training range numerous times before, letting him run and chase rabbits safe in the knowledge that they would nearly always escape his clutches - or was their escape, as I had pondered many times before, due to his kind nature and his wishing them no real harm; he is satisfied with an exciting chase and then demonstrates his kindness by allowing them to escape at the very last moment could it be that some dogs have such ‘ahimsa’ qualities? I was still idly playing with these thoughts when my gaze was taken by a faint point of light in the eastern sky that appeared to be growing in intensity. I looked at my watch and saw it was about 9.30 PM and surmised that it was rather late for any such activity on the range, when my attention was again drawn to Ben’s insistent barking and I started calling for him. How long I stood there shouting his name I cannot now say for an unearthly stillness seemed to envelope the range and time suddenly did not have any meaning. The next thing my senses became aware of was the point of light I had spotted earlier. It was now quite intense and appeared to be closing in rapidly. “Heck!” I suddenly muttered out loud, it must be a military helicopter on special evening manoeuvres and now I would

be in trouble as the authorities were not too keen on civilians roaming their ranges at will, for obvious reasons. Very quickly the light seemed to be all around me and totally encompassing; my first instinct was to run and seek cover in the hope that I might avoid an embarrassing encounter but the light appeared to have a hypnotising effect and I seemed unable to make the necessary decision. An increasing sense of trepidation took hold as it suddenly dawned on me that I could not detect the sound of rotor blades or that of an engine. Indeed all I was aware of was a deathly hush. What the devil was it? Was it some secret military flying machine? If so, what kind of trouble would I be in? My imagination started to work overtime and amazingly I started having mental images of flying saucers. Could it be one of those reported unidentified flying objects that I had read so much about? Horror-upon-horror - my imagination now had control of my neural system - suddenly I wanted to run, to escape, or to hide - but I could not, for my body froze. I found it impossible to turn my head away from that intense eerie light. My survival instincts urged me to run but my legs were rooted to the spot. Panic overwhelmed me; I had never been so terrified! For what seemed an eternity I stood there rigid with my eyes and mouth opened wide in total amazement. The eerie silence seemed to choke me and I struggled for breath. I cursed my lungs for needing air for the very sound of my breathing and the beating of my heart seemed to announce to the entire World that I was here, conspicuous and visible for all to see. Gradually I felt warmth about me. I could detect a vibration, subtle but nevertheless it was there. My fear seemed to subside within me and a sense of curiosity began to flood over me. “What the hell?” I managed to stutter and my heart almost stopped beating out of sheer disbelief - for there before my gaze in a throbbing but now paler light was an object that defied recognition - I could not relate the image in front of me to anything I had ever seen. My mind gave up trying as the object conjured up many images in my head. I could not describe it in the way I would a car, aircraft or any technological

development I had known or was familiar with. My mind raced on. What was I looking at? What was I experiencing? Was I dreaming? I desperately tried to make sense of what I was seeing. Time stood still as my brain raced on. Strangely, I started to imagine what a Stone Age caveman would experience if confronted with an object not of his world, such as an automobile. My thoughts raced on, he would not be familiar with metal, plastic, glass or possibly even the simple concept of the wheel. How would or could he describe what he saw? In terms of his own environment and existence he would probably think of it as a large boulder with magical properties. I could imagine the scenario as he grappled to describe his experience to his companions. His language would also be very limited to that needed for existing and surviving in a very primitive and hostile world. He would probably have words only for emotions, trees, plants, animals, simple tools, fire, wind, rain, the mountains, sky, rivers, lakes et cetera. In some respect a simple world, devoid of any technology whatsoever with just a few words for abstract thoughts. Would he have the concept of a superior entity; what were his Gods? I could see him scrambling back to his cave, excitedly struggling to describe this ‘magical boulder’ he had stumbled upon. An object that had the touch and feel he had never experienced before and most amazingly you could see into the object; similar to looking into a clear stream, although you could not put your hand in as if some invisible barrier or force were preventing you. How else could he describe glass? I was now in a similar position to my imagined Stone Age caveman and my mind continued to race. What would he make of a sophisticated jet fighter or even a radio or television set, every day items I take for granted. My mind was like an express train, I thought my brain would explode, when I detected a movement off to the right of me. I felt my brain could handle no more. “Oh! Good grief!” I exclaimed. There was something or somebody nearby! Fear and panic rapidly started escalating again and my survival instincts were screaming at me. “To hell with the caveman and my stupid thoughts I must get out of here!” But again my legs disobeyed my brain; I was trapped.

My heart missed a beat as a ‘voice’ broke the weird silence. "Do not be afraid as we wish you no harm. Please turn and face the direction of my voice. Please do not be afraid as my image will not offend or be hideous to your sight." The voice was both reassuringly soft and full of authority as it again ‘persuaded’ me to face its source. Slowly and with great caution I managed to turn my head towards whatever it was! The relief that swept over me when my gaze fell upon the source of the ‘voice’ was beyond explanation. For there standing in the pale light was a friendly, smiling face of a medium sized man aged about thirty years. "What else did I expect?" I told myself, and I thought I was going to faint out of relief. My nervous mutterings were interrupted as he softly spoke again. "I understand your fears Earthman". "Hell! What's this Earthman stuff?" I managed to exclaim. My brain returned to red alert. “It can't be? You must be an Alien! This UFO nonsense must be for real!" I blurted out. My thoughts were still in the fast lane. "Oh! Good grief! Why pick on me?" I shrieked. "But why not you?" He quickly replied. I then excitedly and nervously retorted, "This conversation cannot be for real, it's like something out of a science fiction movie - no wait a moment - it's a hoax! Yes, that's it! - it’s a hoax!” I unconvincingly tried to reassure myself. “Now keep your cool,” I continued muttering, “I will call his bluff." But it was too much - I was only kidding myself and I could not handle it - I then lost control of my speech and started rambling incoherently. The Alien seemed to be in no hurry as though it fully understood and expected all of my reactions. I felt myself become dizzy - then go weak at the knees - the next thing I knew I was laying on the ground with the Alien looking down at me - a kind of nausea began to take hold and then I blacked out. When I eventually regained consciousness I found myself lying on a very comfortable couch situated in what appeared to be some sort of room or cabin. Looking around I could not really make sense of the things about me. The room was pleasantly warm with no windows or any sign of a doorway. The light I can only describe as the same intensity and feel of a sunny day although it did not betray any

source appearing to emanate from all directions. Possibly because of the serenity of the surroundings my sense of fear and panic had subsided and I was feeling pleasantly relaxed, though curious. My mind returned to the encounter on the military training range and the Being with whom I had made contact. Suddenly an opening appeared in one of the walls forming the room. Framed in the aperture was the same Being I had met on the training range. This time I did not sense any great fear. “Well how are you feeling?” He inquired. “I feel fine!” I managed to hear myself say. “But where am I and what am I doing here?” The Being then hesitated, as if to give me a couple of seconds to gather all of my thoughts. “You are perfectly safe and on board our spacecraft, we have scanned your mind and subjected the necessary parts of your brain to a small but significant and complex pulsating electromagnetic field. The force field applied contained multiple frequencies and numerous subtle harmonics, necessary to induce and adjust the organic electro-chemical requirement of your brain, thus facilitating a feeling of relaxation and security. Please do not be alarmed at this procedure as it is not harmful.” The Being hesitated again, as if waiting for a response. But none came as I was stuck for words and did not have a clue to what he was talking about. I could not follow or understand what he was trying to explain to me about frequencies, harmonics et cetera. After a few seconds, which seemed an eternity to me, the Being continued. “My name for the purpose of your understanding is Alzanatla and I am the commander of this craft. Accompanying me are numerous other crew members.” Then as if on cue another aperture appeared in one of the other walls of the room and two other Beings entered and introduced themselves as Dique-zul and Karaz-hu. The two Beings were of slender build and both had long, curly but neat fair hair. I judged they were both about six feet tall and they moved with such grace that made Humans, by comparison, appear somewhat clumsy in their movements. Their eyes were quite large and coloured blue of such piercing intensity that they appeared to see right into your very soul. Each of them had a very striking charisma culminating in a very pleasing presence. I wondered if this

feeling I was experiencing was in fact due to the brain scan they had submitted me to. Dique-zul was the first to speak. “Hello, I am pleased to meet you I am what you might call the second-in-command of our vessel; I am also a Universal Consul. My colleague, Karaz-hu can be deemed a Teacher and Philosopher.” At this juncture all the Beings became silent and I sensed it was my turn to say something. All I could conjure up at that moment was. “I do not fully understand? You all talk such excellent English just as if you came from Earth!” “What did you expect?” interrupted Karaz-hu. “We are trying to communicate with you.” At this point I felt a little foolish but quickly added. “I did not expect you to speak as if you had been born to the language such are the words you are using, I was expecting...” Before I could finish Karaz-hu interrupted again as if to spare me the embarrassment of saying something foolish. “We are fully conversant with all Earth languages and dialects; we are completely knowledgeable to all the ways of your kind for your planet has been under surveillance since the beginning.” For no apparent reason I found myself blurting. “I do not understand you look so much like us? In fact you all look very handsome and wholesome.” Karaz-hu smiled an understanding smile replying. “We do not wish to unnecessarily alarm you as we are not totally of your appearance, such that we are of Human form, but not like you. Let me put it this way, on your planet, the Scandinavians, Chinese, Pigmies, Eskimo’s and Negroes are all Human, but different in appearance! This also, in a way, is the difference between your form and us.” “But hold on!” I challenged. “You look extremely acceptable to me, but you say you are not like me, I do not understand?” The answer came swiftly. “Be patient and allow me to explain and then you will clearly see what I mean. We come from outside your Universe, and we are your true Gods.” The look of disbelief on my face triggered him to repeat. “Yes! That is correct; we are your true Gods. Time and space as you understand them have no meaning outside of your Universe from whence we come. Indeed, your understanding to the true nature of time and space is erroneous. It is our purpose to enlighten you on these aspects as well as revealing

other truths to you. The speed of light is a barrier in your Universe, that is, it is a limiting factor to the motion of objects that have mass. On entering your Universe we have taken on mass and as such are ourselves limited by the light-barrier. Nevertheless we can easily circumvent the problem of the ‘light-limit’ by entering your Universe at any point, at any relative time. The understanding of space by most Mortals is that it is a total vacuum. Perhaps the more enlightened might claim it is only intergalactic space that is approaching a vacuum as inter-stellar space has a tenuous spread of particles. Thus it will no doubt surprise you to know that even in the ultimate perceived vacuum of space, that between the filamentary structures of super clusters of galaxies (see Appendix Seven), is seething with virtual particles. Indeed, at every point in space a virtual infinity of these particles are appearing and disappearing. It is beyond you to understand our existence and I cannot relate to you our being in terms that you will fully comprehend. Suffice for you to accept our existence from beyond your Universe. We cannot take you into our existence for we would have to alter your form and that would mean death for you; I am sure you are not ready for that yet. When I use the word death it is only in terms of your Universe, for if you were to accompany us from whence we come there would be no returning in the Mortal form you now have. If you were to return it would be as a different Mortal or as a God in Human form as I will explain to you later. We are your Gods, the Gods of old.” I could feel the blood drain from my face at the implication of what he was saying to me. I began to tremble at the thought of possibly facing my creators - were they telling the truth? Then Alzan-atla put his hand on my shoulder, and looking me in the eye said. “Do not be afraid! Do not question the reality of what is happening to you; it is the truth! Now please allow Karaz-hu to explain.” Whether it was the reassuring hand on my shoulder or the intense look he gave me I just do not know. I just nodded for Karazhu to resume his explanation. “There are millions of life forms in your Universe, some you will readily recognise and there are others of which you will have no comprehension. Indeed there are many life

forms such that if one should be staring you in the face you would not recognise it. Consider the millions of stars in your own Milky Way Galaxy. Then consider the numerous galaxies currently known to your astronomers. The enormous scale of it all testifies to more than a very strong possibility of other life forms. There are trillions upon trillions of stars with attendant planets in your Universe. It is not just Human arrogance that denies other such possibilities, but an evolutionary subconscious seed that encourages these thoughts! The Human subconscious has been programmed from birth to be aware of the immense scale of your Universe and the unconquerable distances that lie between stars and galaxies. Early in Human history when your species considered the Earth was the centre of all creation; this subconscious seed was fertilised to the extent that Humans perceived themselves as the pinnacle of creation with the stars in the heavens being created purely for their admiration. Nevertheless Humans still recognised and had, on rare occasions, actual contact with superior beings that existed beyond the heavens, namely the stars, and called them Gods. This as you will now perceive was obviously a reference to us.” I was absolutely flabbergasted and the expression on my face obviously motivated the Being called Dique-zul to approach me. I drew back nervously from his approach whereupon he softly said. “Do not be afraid, I mean you no harm. Relax and allow me to place my hand upon your brow. It will have a soothing effect and will also allow your mind to absorb much more information.” Since I really was not in a position to resist, I bowed to the inevitable and allowed, with some trepidation, Dique-zul to approach closer so that he could place his hand on my forehead. The response was almost instantaneous as I quickly felt at peace and strangely eager for a continuance of their explanation. My reaction to the approach of Dique-zul was not lost on Karaz-hu as he quickly continued. “For all intents and purposes, you are alone in the Universe. Distance has precluded any contact with other intelligent life forms. As such you are effectively quarantined one from another. Consider this. Suppose you did construct a spacecraft that could almost travel at the speed of light. What purpose would it

serve? For example, supposing there was intelligent life on a planet of the star system nearest to Earth and this if you do not know, is part of the triple system of Proxima Centauri. It would take nearly nine years for a round trip. Unfortunately the trip would be a waste of time if its prime purpose were to meet up with another life form. We can assure you that intelligent life compatible to yours does not exist in the vicinity of Proxima Centauri. We can also inform you that the distance to the nearest compatible intelligent life form is at a distance beyond the average Human life span of three score years and ten, even when travelling at nearly light speed. Now what purpose is served by embarking on a voyage that will exceed the average Human life span? Think of the complexity of such a spacecraft. Besides having to travel almost at light speed it has to sustain a life support system and very importantly an environment suitable to maintain the sanity of its occupants. When life forms begin to approach this kind of technology they quickly appreciate this type of space travel is pointless. It serves no meaningful purpose and more importantly recognise they already live on a vehicle hurtling through space. That is, their own home planet being connected gravitationally to their own star; similar to the Earth which is captured gravitationally to the Sun as it travels around the Milky Way Galaxy. Hopefully you will recognise your Human form is not conducive to inter-galactic or indeed even inter-stellar travel. Nevertheless throughout the Universe there are millions of star systems with life supporting planets where inter-planetary travel is a reality. It is true to say that the life forms of quite a number of these planetary systems have actually attained limited inter-stellar travel, although the point I made earlier about life forms being effectively quarantined from one another is fully justified.” Interrupting again, I stammered. “I do not understand?” Karaz-hu countered quickly. “I will explain, but you will find my enlightenment incredulous. Because of the conditioning you have been subject to in the past and your Human limitations you will find it utterly unbelievable. But however, it is the truth and the more thought you give to my revelations the more acceptable they will become. Your

very existence, the Universe, everything you see and feel about you does not exist in reality, that is, our reality outside your Universe. Your existence is a Virtual Existence. In your World of computers there is the ability to create virtual reality and although extremely simplistic by our standards can be very real to the participant of your reality. Now imagine in your World whereby technology has developed a very advanced computer. Attached to the computer is a ‘membrane’ that can cover the whole Human body encompassing all the senses such as sight, hearing, feeling, taste and smell. Once covered by this membrane the person would be completely isolated from all of the ‘inputs’ of the outside World. This advanced computer will direct all the information to the senses. In using a virtual reality programme the computer is designed to run indefinitely and have a fail-safe power source. It will be important to introduce a sub-programme to alert, at suitable intervals, the user in their virtual reality world to exactly what is happening; for should the user have a memory relapse they would be trapped forever, or till such time when another user discovers them in their ‘virtual reality cocoon’ and releases them from their predicament. With the membrane covering the whole body and the computer running they will be living in a virtual reality world. If, for example, the computer programme is such as to portray a tropical island they will find themselves in this tropical paradise experiencing the sound of the waves and the smell of the sea. They will feel the warmth of the Sun upon their body. Indeed, they will, as far as their senses can determine, be on that tropical island. They will feel the hot sands beneath their feet as they walk along the beach. The Sun will burn their skin and they will seek refuge in the cool waters of the surf as it breaks upon the beach. Everything is real, so real that it would be easy to forget they came from another world. It is only their memory that has an anchor in another reality. If they are operating the computer by themselves, it is only this memory, and the computer sub-programme, which will be a lifeline, so to speak, to ensure a return to their original reality.

Now consider a very highly advanced civilisation, and then multiply this by a factor in excess of a trillion, trillion. That is if your mind can conceive of such a thing. Now ask yourself, what kind of virtual reality could this civilisation create? Well my friend the answer is all around you as the World in which you live and breathe is an illusion. For you exist in a Virtual Universe of our making. Yes! That is correct! You are living in a virtual reality. I have already said we are the Gods of old, the Gods of all your religions. Everything in your Universe, from galaxies to grains of sand, can be reduced down to our equivalent of your binary digits, of 0’s and 1’s! This is far below the level of atomic nuclei, electrons and even quarks - I will try and expand for your understanding so that you may fully comprehend just what I am explaining to you.” At this juncture Karaz-hu approached me and putting his hand on my shoulder told me to be at ease. Then Dique-zul came close and put his hands on my forehead in a similar manner that he had done earlier. It was obvious that both Karaz-hu and Dique-zul had sensed my growing fatigue and shock to their presence, not forgetting Karaz-hu’s astonishing revelations. Almost instantly I felt rejuvenated and at ease with myself; again I felt an eagerness for Karaz-hu to continue. This he did without further ado. “As you are aware, all things in your Universe are made from matter, (see Appendix Four). Now matter, as you know, is composed of molecules. Since water is obviously abundant on the surface of your planet we will take it as an example and examine a litre of this liquid. We can divide the litre quantity of water to half a litre, then a quarter and keep sub-dividing till we come to a limit where further subdivision would effectively alter the properties of the liquid; this is the molecular level. Further sub-division would find that a water molecule is made up from one atom of oxygen and two atoms of hydrogen; now we are at the atomic level. Atoms in their turn are composed of electrons, protons and neutrons; thus we arrive at the subatomic particle level. Over two thousand years ago your Ancient Greeks thought the Universe was made of tiny ingredients they called atoms and that everything around them was made from combinations of these elementary building blocks. Your current day

physicists now know that atoms can be broken down into electrons, protons and neutrons. Further, protons and neutrons can be broken down again into particles called quarks. Quarks come in two varieties, namely ‘up’ and ‘down’. A proton consists of two ‘up’ quarks and one ‘down’ quark; where a neutron consists of two ‘down’ quarks and an ‘up’ quark. There are other particulates such as neutrinos, muons, charm, strange, bottom and top quarks, tau and muon-neutrino et cetera. But fundamentally, everything in your Universe can be envisioned as combinations of electrons, and ‘up’ quarks and ‘down’ quarks. The story does not end here, for a number of your physicists claim that at the ultramicroscopic level, electrons and quarks consist not of particulates as we have identified so far, but fundamentally of motion in the form of vibrations. These physicists liken these motions to vibrating strands; they offer that these tiny vibrating loops are something akin to tiny, onedimensional filaments almost like infinitely thin rubber bands, vibrating to and fro; the study of which is known as Superstring Theory (or string theory, for short). Each elementary particle has only one internal string. The vibrating string appears as a point particle, where the mass and force charges are determined by the string’s oscillatory pattern. Thus the properties of an elementary particle such as the quark or electron are determined by the precise resonant pattern of vibration which its internal string executes. It is vitally important that you understand this. I offer no apology in reiterating that the mass of an elementary particle such as the electron or quark is determined by the energy of the vibrating pattern of its internal string; the greater the energy, the greater the mass and vice versa. Thus an electron is a string vibrating one-way, the ‘up’quark is a string vibrating another way and so on. Now you must fully understand the scale of the things I am informing you of. The strings of string theory are so small that on average they are about as long as what your physicists refer to as the Plank length

- (the Plank length is about 10-33 centimetres) - which to you is absolutely mind boggling small. String theorists also require the Universe to have 10 or 11 dimensions to work. This, initially, sounds preposterous as it is difficult to visualise four dimensions let alone that of ten or eleven. Most people have little difficulty in visualising three dimensions such as length, breadth and depth but struggle with the fourth dimension of time. An analogy can help to the acceptance of numerous dimensions. Consider a daily newspaper as an example. When you view the paper you see it in two dimensions, that of length and breadth, you do not readily perceive the other dimension of depth. So, unless you have extraordinary eyesight you will need a magnifying aid to see the depth of the paper. Another good example would be a garden hose hung linearly between two posts. From a respectable distance it is very difficult to perceive the width (girth) of the hose - it appears to have only a one dimension, that of its length. It is only on close approach and examination that you can detect a second dimension and possibly observe an ant crawling around the surface of the hose. The example of the garden hose demonstrates some subtle and important features of spatial dimensions, namely, they can be large and extended and as such plainly visible, or they can be small and curled up and much more difficult to detect. This, the theorists of string theory say is the situation with the extra six or seven dimensions, they are far too small to detect. Indeed, they are so small as not to have any meaning in everyday life in the same manner that motions at the quantum level are not manifest when you observe the movement of an object. Further, do not let the comparison to that of a rubber band or even a piece of string confound or misguide you as these are composed of molecules and atoms in your Universe, whereas the actual strands of string theory are composed of vibrations. I again stress that you must also fully understand the scale of things, as one of these string loops is approximately a hundred billion billion (1020) times smaller than an atomic nucleus. There are a number of physicists who consider that strings may not be the absolute elemental particles and strings in turn may be

composed of ‘something else’? - it is these physicists that are on the right track as indeed strings do have other properties - although this ‘something else’, will be far beyond their comprehension.” Although I was happy for him to continue Karaz-hu stopped at this point. Putting his hand on my shoulder he asked how I felt. “Fine,” I replied, “I am amazed to think that possibly I have understood you so far as my knowledge of the things you have been talking about is minimal. Although what I do find absolutely astonishingly and if I have understood you correctly, is that everything I know or can touch or feel is nothing more than motion at the fundamental level.” Before I could say any more, Karaz-hu smiled, nodded and continued thus. “I stated earlier that the Universe and everything in it is composed of our equivalent of your computer programming O’s and 1’s. Now it is important for you to remember that the mass and force charges of an elemental particle such as a quark or electron are determined by the precise resonant pattern that its internal string executes. But what will astound your physicists will be my claim that strings themselves, on a far lower level, are created by a form of digitised 0’s and 1’s, although it is not the electronic form of switching and programming you associate with your digital computers. I use the analogy of digital switching and digital computer programming for your understanding only. The truth, or if you wish, the science, will be completely beyond you. Indeed, your scientists will never be able to explore this level of reality. To measure something you need to touch or prod that thing and in doing so you disturb that thing. When you measure the voltage of an electrical circuit with the correct voltmeter you still disturb that circuit, although as the disturbance is so small it does not matter and Ohm’s law will still prevail. At the microscopic level and beyond these disturbances do matter, also bear in mind that at the ultramicroscopic level Humans will never ‘see’ the fundamental building blocks of creation. In your everyday World you perceive everything as happening in a smooth manner, cars accelerate smoothly and decelerate smoothly (apart from learner drivers), plants, animals and Humans grow in a

continuous manner to maturity; nature appears not to move in jumps. Everything seems to follow an analogue law. Taking our example of the acceleration of a car, it does not suddenly leap from 30 to 40 kilometres per hour; it accelerates in an analogue fashion. But this is nothing more than an illusion for at the quantum level everything behaves in a jerky fashion. Indeed, motion at your level of experience runs smoothly but at the quantum level it runs in discreet jumps. In a way it is similar to the way you perceive a photograph printed in one of your newspapers. At a distance the details appear smooth and continuous but on closer examination you will see it consists of numerous discreet bits of information in the form of dots. To your theoretical physicists who pursue string theory I can say congratulations as they are approaching the truth of all things within your Universe; all matter can be said to be nothing more than motion that is ‘ultra-microscopic’ string oscillations. Yes it is a fact; the basic building blocks of your Universe and reality are nothing more than a myriad of vibrations and oscillations.” Karaz-hu halted his lecture and looking straight at me said. “Do you fully understand the significance of what I have just told you?” Well! What could I truthfully say? It was all way beyond me; the only thing that I could grasp was we were all made up of something smaller than quarks or electrons called strings. They in turn were somehow made up of motion in the form of oscillations which again in turn are composed of some kind of digital information in the form of 0’s and 1’s, and all this being the basis of our virtual existence. Karaz-hu was obviously reading my mind, as he quickly countered. “Please do not be dismayed with your lack of understanding. You will, when the time is right, remember the details and it will be for others to comprehend the truth.” I was just about to trip into ‘anxious mode’ over what he meant by others comprehending the truth when he suddenly started his lecture again. “Now as I mentioned earlier everything in your Universe can be reduced down to the equivalence of your computerised electronic 0’s and 1’s. This is of a great simplification for you to try and understand. It is our equivalence of your computer technology using an immense

variety of 0’s and 1’s in the form of oscillatory loops that make up all the matter in your Universe. Do not take the computer analogy ‘too’ literarily, as I must stress it is the nearest comparison that has any meaning for your mind to comprehend the universal truth. Everything around you, the animals, plants, trees, the oceans, mountains, continents, the Earth, the planets, the Sun and stars, the galaxies and the Cosmos are of our making; being nothing more at the fundamental level of oscillatory loops created by us, your Gods. I do not apologise for the reiteration when I say again that the whole Universe and everything in it is nothing more than a virtual reality existence and indeed a gigantic computer programme; it is important for you to fully grasp this truth. When I use the term ‘computer programme’ I do so in the sense that you will have some understanding of my explanation to your existence. I can see by your face you deem this revelation incredulous, if not utterly ridiculous. No doubt you are struggling for words, if not a myriad of questions to put before me. But allow me to continue and I will hopefully convince you of the truth. A truth you may not like given your understanding of the workings of the Universe. If you can accept the concept of a Virtual Reality Universe then anything in your experience, which has confounded you, will now make more sense. If, for example, you consider all your myths, legends, mysteries and enigmas you will see that they begin to have more credibility in the light of a Virtual Reality Universe. When people long ago believed in fairies, elves and other such things, can you not see that certain people have, for whatever reason, actually experienced this reality - the rationale for this is very complex, and possibly far too obtuse for you to comprehend, suffice to accept that it is a truth! The same applies to your many mythical monsters of land, sea and air. Even as I speak such monsters as the Ogopogo in Canada, are still being sighted. The Ogopogo known to the Indians as N’ha-a-itk is a large water serpent and in the past the Indians would offer sacrifices to the serpent in an attempt to pacify it. Canadians are well aware that it has not escaped the commercialisation of modern man. The Yowie in Australia has been known to the Aborigines for thousands of years. It reputably can reach a height of seven feet, is

covered in hair and like the Yeti is accompanied by a terrible smell. The Chupacabra of Mexico is a terrifying beast that sucks the blood out of goats. During 1996 a large number of rams were found in Chiapas completely drained of blood with puncture marks in their necks. It has also been claimed to be found in Florida, Brazil and Puerto Rico. Norway has the Selma, a lake monster that resides in the peaty waters of Seljord. As you know the most famous of all lake monsters is the Loch Ness Monster that also lives in peaty waters, such as Loch Ness in Scotland. The locals of the Pine Barrens, New Jersey in the United States are well aware of the Jersey Devil and its blood curdling shrieking that can be heard across the swamps. Many people have had their livestock mutilated and have had their blood chilled by its terrifying screams. I should stress at this point that beyond the reality of the true sightings, there have been numerous hoaxes and cruelty carried out by man, for one reason or another. The legendary Yeti of the Himalayas and Big Foot of North America are the World’s best known hominids and are very real to those exposed to such images and experiences. Moving on and examining your World from a theological aspect, Humans have always had some sense or notion of a shadowy double that survives death. Your Christian religion talks about the immortality of the soul. After death the soul is said to be separated from the body and then exist in an unconscious state. The soul is then said to be eventually re-embodied on the future day of judgement and then to live forever in a Heavenly Kingdom. Does not this sound very close to the true reality I have been telling you about?” I could only nod in wonderment as Karaz-hu continued his lecture. “Many of your cultures have recognised an existence corresponding to the soul with many attributing souls to all living things. There is also evidence of your ancestors having a belief in something not of the body but yet living within the body. Perhaps your ancestors were very much nearer the truth than they knew. Indeed, Plato was sown a seed of truth by us in a dream and consequently the Platonics of ancient Greece considered the soul to be of an immaterial and

incorporeal substance, akin to the Gods, yet part of your World. You should be aware though, the ancient Greek concepts varied considerably according to the particular era and philosophical school. Such that Epicurus considered the soul to be made of matter and as such both body and soul ended at death. Pythagoras considered the soul was of divine origin and existed before and after death. The early Christian philosophers adopted the concept of Plato and adhered to the immortality of the soul and thought of the soul as being created by God and infused into the body at conception. Although the sum of Human knowledge increases every day, for every mystery that is solved, new ones emerge to confound your scientists. Take the case of Human spontaneous combustion where victims for no apparent reason just suddenly burst into flames. For those who wish to pursue and investigate this phenomenon there is plenty of evidence; your scientists are highly sceptical such that cases are rarely well documented, investigated or studied. Temperatures of at least 8000C are required to dispose of Human bodies in your crematoriums; even after burning for more than an hour quite large pieces of bone will remain. It is quite rare for the body to be reduced completely to ash as which is usually the case with spontaneous combustion. Human spontaneous combustion is all the more intriguing when investigators report that although the body has been incinerated with great heat, clothing worn by the victim is sometimes not even scorched. Regarding your many myths and legends Atlantis features highly in your folk legends. Atlantis was described by Plato in two of his dialogues, Critias and Timaeus as follows, ‘At the centre of the island (of Atlantis) was a plain, said to be the most beautiful and fertile of all plains, and near the middle of this plain was a hill of no great size. Around the hill were two rings of land and three of sea, like cartwheels. In the centre of the hill was a shrine sacred to Poseidon and Cleito surrounded by a golden wall through which entry was forbidden. There was also a temple to Poseidon which was covered all over in silver, except for the statues, which were of gold. Two springs, hot and cold, provided limitless water supplies, and there

were indoor heated baths for kings and commoners, for women and for horses. On the outer rings of land there were dockyards and harbours surrounded by a wall which was densely built up with houses. From this crowded area rose a constant din of shouting and noise throughout both the day and night. Beyond were the plains, which brought to perfection all those sweet scented stuffs the Earth produces now, whether made of roots or herbs or trees or flowers or fruits. All these, that hallowed island, as it lay then beneath the Sun, produced in marvellous beauty and endless abundance’. Yet again Atlantis has been a reality in your World, maybe not quite as Plato’s description, but it certainly did exist, and was a mighty empire. It also disappeared beneath the waves within a night and a day. A great civilisation now buried beneath the sea, although its shadow is still thrown with vestiges in the form of pyramidal constructions which are still visible in the continents of America, Africa and Asia. Sometimes Mortals cannot see the woods for the trees, but then again you must recognise that many truths are lost in the mists of time. Speaking of such things and regarding your own land, how many of your countrymen are aware of one of the greatest threats to the English court which occurred during the 14th century? How many of them have heard of Owain of the Red Hand? He is known, honoured and commemorated in France near La Rochelle. The French know him as Le Chevalier a la Main Rouge. He was raised in the French court and became a French warlord invading places such as Guernsey and Switzerland and is to be found in the folklore of not only those countries but Spain as well. Such was the fear of him by the English, that he was the victim of a well paid assassin in 1378. Whilst he was besieging the English in Mortagne Castle, France, he was dealt a fatal blow when a John Lambe plunged a small spear into his back! The informed Welsh will also know him as the Sleeping Prince. Local legend has it that he is asleep with his men in a cave near Carreg Cennen Castle in Carmarthenshire, Wales, ready to rise again and come to the aid of his countrymen when in times of dire need.” Though tempted to ask Karaz-hu for more detail about Owain of the Red Hand I felt from the look on his face it would be futile.

Karaz-hu suddenly raised his voice. “I must move on!” Knowingly interrupting my thoughts he continued. “The great modern myth is that of flying saucers, or to use your latest acronym, UFO’s. I can tell you now that many people, apart from the hoaxes and imagined sightings, have had observational experiences of these aerial craft; have seen Aliens and have been abducted by Aliens. None of which have come from your Solar System or indeed your own Milky Way Galaxy. All these encounters are the product of our doing. One of the many reasons is to enhance the ‘mind’ of Mortals and make them aware and wonder at the majesty of the many regions of the Universe. To enlighten the peoples of the Earth as to how insignificant are their petty squabbles and wars in the whole scheme of things. The astute members of your race will sense and know, when contemplating the global scenario that the end of the present system of things is not far away. The Human race is facing a ‘Countdown to Oblivion’. We are the Masters of your Universe, the titles we have given ourselves, such as Universal Consul, are for your ears only, as they have no meaning in our reality. It will come as a great surprise and shock that Human existence is fundamentally the basis of an extremely subtle and complex ‘Game’; a game of deep meaning and unbelievable complexity. I use these words for your benefit and not ours, and I use the word Game in an infinitely responsible way, if that has any meaning for you. We are here to enlighten the World as the Game is approaching an end for your current civilisation and cultures. Your prophets, seers and holy books have foretold its closing chapters. Yes, there will be a day of judgement - both in the Universe you experience and in your true reality.” “True! True reality!” I managed to blurt out. “What the devil do you mean?” I gasped as my mind was in turmoil and I just did not know what to make of it all. Karaz-hu quickly interrupted. “Yes, all life originates from our reality and you are all Gods in our reality. That is, Gods who have chosen to experience your Universe in the form of Mortals; thereby volunteering to enter the Game. In doing so, we are born again, so to speak, into your Virtual Reality and become of

Human form. It is only when we experience death in your existence that we return to our own reality.” It was at this point Karaz-hu reiterated that Homo sapiens, evolution, history, the Earth, the Solar System and indeed the whole of my Universe was basically nothing more than a grand illusion encompassed in their great Game. The reasons for which are very complex and only make sense and hold any relevance in their ‘reality’ and as such an understanding and explanation would be completely beyond all Human comprehension. “But I do not understand?” I asked feverishly, as I was now slowly gathering my thoughts together. “Why are you discussing it with me rather than the President of the World’s foremost power, the Pope, a brilliant scientist or any other person more qualified than me? I tell you honestly, I am at a loss as to what to make of it all - it does not make any sense! You say you come from outside our Universe and that you are all Gods. If this is true why do you have to create and play this Game in what you say is our Universe? Good grief, you say I am part of a Virtual Reality Universe. What do you expect me to think? Surely, if you are all Gods, then you are omnipotent and all wise and powerful. You would not have the inclination for such a Game as you call it. Don’t Gods have better things to do with their time?” I could not believe I had just said that when Karaz-hu put up his hand and stopped me abruptly. “Be patient and I will try to explain further. But you must see and appreciate that because you have no conceivable concept of our ‘reality’ it is very difficult to explain to one of your level of intellect and understanding. Do not be insulted or confused as a brilliant physicist, philosopher or religious leader would not fare better. It is to your level we wish to communicate and thereafter for you to communicate to the rest of Mankind.” That last remark totally blew my mind. What the heck did he mean by my level of intellect and what did he mean for me to communicate to the rest of Mankind? I did not have the mental or physical strength to interrupt him this time as I felt I had been pole-axed; it was all beyond me.

He continued. “Forgive me for using the word game but it is the nearest definition I can use for your mind to conceive. We Gods are also subject to a higher level of intellectual consciousness and there is a purpose in our enterprise, which I will not even try to explain to you. You would have absolutely no comprehension as to the meaning of it all. I can see you are not convinced and given Human arrogance and spiritual naivety that is understandable. You delude yourself by thinking you might be able to understand the purpose of the Game even if I took sufficient time to explain it in depth. But it is not so, and I will not waste any more time pursuing this point.” I had no option but to nod my head in agreement although I must admit to feeling that if Karaz-hu did take his time I would understand. “Not so!” Karaz-hu interrupted my thoughts, “You will not understand and it is your illusion. Now I must continue. In your World we have allowed free will and thinking, thus giving you the choice between good and evil. Unfortunately Mankind has allowed evil to dominate resulting in the current World situation that exists about you; its wars, pollution and its disease. I really should not have to expand on these negative issues as you should be well aware of them. They are the result of short-sightedness, greed, and self-interest. It is a great pity and it is to your universal shame that Mankind has developed in this way; it did not have to be so. But alas, without the intervention of a vastly superior power, your kind is doomed; your Armageddon is fast approaching. I will save you interrupting me by answering the question you have in your mind. Yes! When I refer to Human’s, I am indirectly referring to us, or more precisely the Gods that have entered the Game. You must remember that when one of our ‘kind’ enters the Game they are no longer Gods. They become Mortal growing from a seed in the female womb and will only return to the status of a God on death in your World, albeit to be judged on their life in your World. Again I will prevent an interruption and partly answer the question you have in your mind such that if the outcome from a judgement falls below a certain criteria, your thoughts tell me you are wondering what happens then? But that unfortunately is another story and I must press on.

Looking to the immediate future of your species, overpopulation and environmental stress will manifest itself in high levels of aggressive and selfish behaviour leading to extremes of civil breakdown and the consequent rise in all types of crime. Neighbour will turn against neighbour, children against their parents, parents will have both pity and contempt for their offspring. This in turn will fan the flames for civil wars, ethnic strife and terrorism. Nations will turn against nations, with untold small wars breaking out across the globe. Coupled with pollution, global warming, thinning of the ozone layer, the north and south polar caps melting, sea levels rising, volcanic eruptions, earthquakes, tidal waves, tsunamis, plagues, famine and pestilence, lack of fresh water, crop failures and running out of fossil fuels; all will make life intolerable. A lot of people are still blind to the obvious and yet for a simple example they have only to turn their eyes to the skies above them and witness how a potentially blue sky, under certain atmospheric conditions, will quickly become covered in a thin veil of whitish cloud as a result of the convergence of vapour trails from jet airliners. This is the visible face of civil airliner pollution and I leave you to contemplate the effect of the unseen pollutants. These pollutants are increasingly being spewed out globally, twentyfour hours a day. If you then add to this, the output from all of the World’s military aircraft and private aircraft, you can draw your own conclusions. Regarding your land transportation, although not visible, apart from the smoke of an exhaust, the particles and pollutants emitted by internal combustion engines are not immediately obvious. But I tell you this; the day of reckoning is fast approaching. Think of the traffic you see every day in your cities and on your motorways and then multiply this number by all the towns, cities and roads around the World. It is not only the tons and tons of noxious particles and poisonous gasses they push out - but the significant amount of oxygen that is being consumed. I think you will agree the current prospects for your kind do not inspire much hope for the future and I can see from the ‘shattered’ look on your face and your worried thoughts that you have been paying attention.”

I suddenly felt utterly despondent and just let Kara-hu continue with his depressing vision of the future. I could not think of anything useful to add or say and just gestured for him to continue. “Your species are deluded into thinking the coming of the UFO age is a prelude to the invasion by extraterrestrials. This is not so. The prime reasons for these events are far more complex than you could possibly imagine. I do not have the time or inclination to enlighten you further as to the reasons. Suffice to say that the greatest threat to your existence is not from outside the Earth’s environment, but from within, indeed from Mankind itself. It could arise as the consequence of the development of nuclear weapons or from biological warfare. Should this deadly scenario be avoided the continuing advent of population explosion and environmental abuse will deal their deadly cards. No doubt you can easily postulate that there would be no simplistic event to account for Human demise. It is to this arena that we have arrived in an effort to enlighten Mankind to its true and intended destiny. The Game, specific to your kind, started with Homo hablis about one and a half million years ago, then Homo erectus and subsequently Homo sapiens appearing about one hundred and thirty thousand years ago. Previously the Game involved the Gods and the age of the reptiles, which ran for millions of years. You must fully understand that your notion of time and space has no meaning to us. The Game encompasses your whole Universe of space and time; specifically, regarding your planet we have been involved from the Precambrian, Cambrian, Ordovician, Silurian, Devonian, Carboniferous, Permian, Triassic, Jurassic, Cretaceous, and Tertiary through to the Quaternary periods of your time. Indeed, from when the Sun and other planets of the Solar System were no more than nebula dust and gas. It will come, no doubt, as a great shock to you, when I say that Homo sapiens have not been the only intelligence that has existed on the Earth. During the latter part of the Cretaceous period a highly intelligent reptile inhabited your planet. It was in many ways far more advanced

than your kind. Evidence for this, not only lies under the ice in the Antarctic and Greenland; but also in the depths of both the Atlantic and Pacific Oceans. I will not enlighten you further as I am digressing other than to say that natural catastrophes brought about the end of this advanced form of life. We are here to make you aware of your potential Earthly destiny which is the amalgam of Human and artificial intelligence. A number of Mortals have had their minds seeded by us to this destiny. As such they are proceeding towards this goal. I should make it very clear that although we have the ability to seed Human minds with information it is not for us, according to the laws of the Game, to interfere in Human decision making. Humans have the gift of free will, and as such decide their own future for good or evil - it is fundamental to the Game.” Karaz-hu suddenly stopped as Alzan-atla had suddenly entered into our presence; I consider this an apt description as I did not detect his approach and he did not enter through any visible door? “I am sorry to interrupt you, but time is pressing.” Alzan-atla informed Karaz-hu before disappearing as quickly as he had appeared. Then Karaz-hu approached me and putting his hands on my forehead said. “Relax we are coming to the end of this contact with you - but before it is completely over I need to impart some more information.” The placing of Karaz-hu’s hands on my forehead had the same power as before and I quickly became at ease and eager for him to tell me more. My feelings were not lost on Karaz-hu as he soon continued thus. “Currently your computers can play chess, write computer code and design circuits just as well, if not better than Humans. This has all happened in a span of about a decade. The next decade, or possibly two will show a progress in artificial intelligence that will be equivalent to Human intelligence. Indeed, you will have to redefine intelligence to identify your notion of Human superiority. You need only look at your present day industry to see how far robotics has progressed with many factories needing little or no Human input. You are fast approaching the time when artificial intelligence will take the role of decision maker in many key roles of

your society. The question you must now be asking yourselves is what will transpire when machines will have the capability and capacity to replicate themselves almost like living organisms? Sex will play no part in the replication process and these intelligent machines will deem the breeding and development period of Humans wasteful and of no use. Thus the intelligent machine will be built fully matured in this sense. Once this starts to take place the next step will be for the machines to improve themselves - for have they not been given intelligence? The evolved machines will have far greater memory and recall than Humans and will then easily surpass the level of Human intellect. It is no good Human’s living in denial and continuing to perceive their presence as the only superior intelligence on your planet, for it can surely happen. The machines will teach and educate each other and eventually develop their own language to inhibit any Human interference in their communication and progress. All computer controlled weapons systems, satellite and all other means of electronic communication and control will be dominated and fundamentally controlled by these robotic machines with artificial intelligence. These robotic entities would have the ability to tap into the vast data banks of all of Mankind’s knowledge, which will obviously include World history. This capability should send a chill down the back of any intelligent person who has any understanding of the history of the Human race. It does not take a genius to realise that the destructive and barbarous nature of Homo sapiens throughout their history will cause the robotic entities to regard Humans as a kind to mistrust and greatly fear as a potential enemy. The one great thing to be learned about your kind from history is that you learn nothing from history. This would be an insight into Human behaviour the robotics would soon come to recognise. Having identified this failure and short-coming of the Human race, the intelligent machines could obviously use it to their advantage. They will quickly recognise that the history of your kind is steeped in blood, treachery and exploitation. It will not take a great effort for the robotic entities to perceive that this recurring aspect of history is the

failure of Human rulers. They will rapidly identify from the written record that in all ages, good and benevolent government has constantly been foiled by self-interest, greed, corruption, nepotism, short-sightedness and lust for power. Indeed the lust to obtain and retain power has been the reason for many a failed treaty, social unrest, violence and wars. When Germany invaded France during World War Two you needed only to examine Hitler’s thoughts and feelings regarding the ‘Treaty of Versailles’ and the many implications to find your answers. This ‘so called’ peace settlement imposed by the Allies at the end of the First World War solved very little. Europe was effectively redrawn by the new powers with new frontiers and countries; a League of Nations was set up to prevent future wars and history has shown how ineffective it proved to be. The unrealistic economic and territorial penalties demanded by the victorious Allies left Germany weakened and resentful; a frustration that was to be eventually exploited by Hitler and the Nazis, leading to the Second World War. By the same token, the events that led up to the outbreak of the First World War were rooted in conflicting national rivalries, aided by new military and naval technology. This came about as the direct result of the defeat of France and the unification of Germany in the FrancoPrussian War of 1870 –1871. The newly created German Empire, (which included the former provinces of Alsace and Lorraine), upset the old balance of power in Europe whilst the rapid and remarkable economic expansion of Germany also provoked widespread envy and alarm. With Germany pursuing an aggressive international policy fear of Germany’s military and industrial power motivated Republican France to seek an alliance with Czarist Russia. France was also anxious to avenge the defeat of the 1870-71 war and recover lost Alsace-Lorraine, while Russia needed a counterbalance to the Austro-German alliance. Great Britain was also locked into an arms race with Germany; the German Navy Laws of 1898 and 1900 aimed to provide Germany with a fleet of ships that would challenge the Royal Navy and effectively undermine Britain’s supremacy at sea. This was perceived

as enhancing German influence and bargaining powers in World affairs. Ultimately by 1914 the major European powers were split into two rival alliances with France, Britain and Russia ranged against the Central Powers of Germany and Austria-Hungary. Thus any incident or act of aggression involving any one of these countries threatened to trigger a ‘Domino Effect’ plunging all the rest of them into war; thus it was that the assassination of Archduke Franz Ferdinand (heir to the Austrian throne) and his wife in Sarajevo, finally triggered war in Europe, which lead ultimately to a full World War. Lust, treachery and exploitation were not confined to the ‘Old World’ and quickly manifested themselves in the ‘New World’. It is difficult to know where to begin as there are so many examples; Central and South America come quickly to mind and serve as a good example. You should be aware that from 1492, when Columbus discovered Cuba and Hispaniola the Europeans and their descendents undertook to impose their will and ways upon the people of the New World. As you probably know, Hispaniola is your modern Haiti and Dominican Republic. It was the name Christopher Columbus gave to this island and was the first Caribbean island to be settled by the Spanish. But the self-interest, greed and diseases of the invaders decimated the native tribes. Indeed, in the very beginning when Columbus had landed and been welcomed by the friendly natives (the Tainos), little did the inhabitants realise that their fate was sealed. Christopher Columbus actually wrote to the Spanish king telling him of the docile and peace-loving nature of the people. When he landed in Hispaniola Columbus and his crew were warmly welcomed by the local Tainos. Yet the coming of the Spaniards to the Americas was to prove a disaster for the indigenous native population as the simple culture of the Tainos was destroyed and replaced by cotton plantations - indeed the cotton plantations were worked by the Tainos as slave labour. The colonists chopped down the tropical forests to enlarge their fields, but the cotton plants diminished the soil. As a consequence and due to the lack of the windshield that had been previously provided by the forests, sand quickly covered

the fields. Subsequent European settlers further diminished the island by continuing the destruction of the vegetation and its inhabitants. Having virtually turned the island into a wasteland the settlers abandoned it. From the earliest days the Spanish expected the Tainos to toil for them in the fields and to mine for gold. This was only the start of the exploitation of Central and South America. After the Spanish had invaded and quickly conquered Cuba, they turned their eyes elsewhere. In 1517, Francisco de Cordoba sailed to the Yucatan Peninsular, Mexico and made contact with the Maya. His stay was brief as the Maya attacked the Spanish causing them to flee and although the Spanish managed to struggle back to Cuba, Cordoba unfortunately died of his wounds there. It was not long before another expedition was organised and in 1518 Juan de Grijalva led a second expedition to Mexico where he traded with the local natives for gold ornaments. When Grijalva and his expedition returned to Cuba the Spanish there became very excited by all the gold they had returned with. Lust and greed played their deadly hands and another expedition was quickly organised and led by a man called Hernan Cortes. Thus in 1519, Hernan Cortez set out on an expedition with eleven ships carrying only 500 men and sixteen horses to conquer Mexico. Before setting out Cortez made a speech to his men telling them, “I am setting out on a great and beautiful enterprise which will be famous in times to come. I know in my heart that we shall take vast and wealthy lands conquering people such as have never been seen before…We are going to fight a just and good war which will bring us fame. Almighty God, in whose name and faith it will be waged, will give us victory. If you do not abandon me, as I shall not abandon you, I shall make you, in a short time, the richest of all men who have crossed the seas.” Cortez was not aware at the time, but he was sailing toward the coast of a great empire ruled by a people called the Aztecs. Subsequently these ‘Conquistadors’ destroyed an empire of many, many people.

Next it was the turn of the Maya. After the conquest of the Aztecs, Spanish armies spread all over Mexico, looking for gold and rich lands to invade. During the 1520s, the army of Pedro de Alvarado attacked the Maya who lived in Guatemala. An army under Francisco de Montejo invaded Yucatan where the northern Maya lived. The struggle against the Maya was not as easy as that against the Aztecs as the Mayans did not fight in the open, where the Spanish could use their horses, but in forests. The use of the forest enabled the Maya to set ambushes; they also poisoned wells and dug holes to trap the Spaniard’s horses. The Maya also lived in many separate kingdoms; as such had no overall ruler to capture. In the end Alvarado struggled for six years to overcome Guatemala and Montejo finally gave up trying to conquer Yucatan. It was not until 1697 that the Spanish captured the last Maya stronghold. The Inca Empire stretching down the west coast of South America did not escape the lust and greed of the Conquistadors. Francisco Pizarro set out for Peru in 1531 with only three ships and one hundred and eighty men. Although small in number the Spaniards had far superior weapons and had horses. The Indians had never seen horses before and were frightened by them. A few dozen armour-clad Spanish cavalrymen using metal swords and lances easily overcame an army of many, many Indian warriors. The stone axes and wooden mallets of the Incas were very primitive weapons and thus were no threat to the Conquistadors who were clad in body armour and wearing metal helmets. The Spaniards also had firearms which had a significant psychological effect on the Indians. The treachery, cruelty and exploitation of the Incas by Pizarro and the Spaniards is well told in your history books and I will not pursue this subject any further. I must stress though that this was exploitation at its very worst. Future highly intelligent robotic entities in studying just the history of the Americas could only come to one inevitable and logical conclusion. This would be to quickly eradicate such a threat forever by destroying all Humans. Alternatively, because of their higher intellect and superiority intelligent machines may deem Humans not

as a complete threat but keep them as potentially dangerous, but amusing pets - do not Humans function in this way? A lot depends not only on how artificial intelligence evolves and develops but also how it integrates into Human society and of course, the plateau, in your Universe, of the ultimate intelligence. Another possible option open to your species which could be deemed the next logical evolutionary step for Mankind, is the linking or merging of the Human brain to an intelligent machine; it should be noted though that the life force or soul of Man would remain. Think of the potential if you could improve your memory and process information a million fold. You would certainly become a very superior being. Imagine a highly attractive and an extremely fit artificial body that is resistance to all known diseases; a body that easily surpasses your most capable Olympic athlete. Now couple this to a brain that can, via the electromagnetic spectrum, tap into all the World’s data banks. Life span will far exceed those imaginable today. A shared consciousness will inevitably evolve to initiate a future none of your species can possibly predict or imagine. I make no apology in reiterating that the soul will remain in Man; artificial intelligence may be supreme in storing and rapidly processing information in your reality but it will never surpass the intelligence encompassing the soul. The soul is one and all; it is derived from God in another reality. Thus with the advent of parallel processors and the evolution from non-organic to organic microelectronic components these events are no longer in the realms of what you call science fiction. Homo sapiens are rapidly reaching a cross roads whereby the next evolutionary steps could be either, The coming together of Homo sapiens and artificial intelligence or, For the Human race to be eliminated, or at the very best, to become slaves or pets of a new and extremely superior machine intelligence?

That, of course will be dependent on whether there is: Complete or partial elimination of the Homo sapiens due to self inflicted destruction as a consequence of global pollution; or widespread plague, diseases and the possibility of wanton destruction and global war. Intervention by a far superior intellect to direct a path to salvation. I speak of these things within your Universe and your notion of existence and reality. Thus we are here to open minds to the possible consequences of Human acts and deeds; the decisions are with you all. Now let me tell you a tale about clothes and an aspect of evolution. Have you ever wondered why most of your species wear clothes?” Karaz-hu gave me a look that demanded an answer and I was taken by surprise. I wish he wouldn’t suddenly spring such questions as I was completely absorbed by his dialogue on artificial intelligence and the outlook for Mankind. “Er, no,” I managed to utter, “I really had not given the matter any thought.” Karaz-hu gaze altered to that of a resigned but understanding school teacher and he interrupted me before I could say another word. “Have you never thought that it was odd or weird, that fundamentally, it is only Homo sapiens on your planet, which pursue the act of wearing clothes? “Er, no,” is all that I could offer again. Karaz-hu looked slightly disappointed by my reply and continued. “Humans have not evolved from apes as taught by students of evolution. God created Man and Woman in the form you now see. I use the singular form of God but you must recognise that where we exist we are many, but as one, if you understand my meaning; although I suspect you will have difficulty with the definition, nevertheless you will have to accept my statement as the truth; what you might call an act of faith. So it is truly correct to see us as one omnipotent entity, which

you call God, or as many Gods as some of your cultures will recognise. When Humans were first placed upon this planet they were naked and placed in the tropical zones where garments were not required. Food and good clean water was abundantly available; Humans wanted for nothing. But as Mankind multiplied in numbers and although food was still plentifully available they began to explore. Then for one reason or another, they began to forage beyond their initial boundaries. Spreading to the temperate zones, and quickly recognising that continued existence in these zones would require an extra skin in the form of clothes. Indeed the first clothes were nothing more than the hides of animals. From the temperate zones Mankind spread to the Polar Regions, and dressed appropriately. I should also add that various ice ages imposed the necessity for clothing. Then as Mankind progressed their coverings became more sophisticated, until the man made fabrics of your present day culture. Your students of evolution may well throw their hands up in horror and declare this is rubbish and they can prove this and that from various artefacts and the fossil record. Indeed, there is a lot to learn from the fossil record; but who is to say that their version is the correct one. Suppose I told you the World was actually created by us, some 280 million years ago. What if I were to inform you that when we created your World we also created all the evidence in the rocks, to provide a previous fossil record - thus creating all the various rock strata, ocean trenches and mountains et cetera to give the illusion of a geological past prior to the period you call the Triassic. I should point out that your Sun and the planets, apart from the Earth and Moon of course, were formed and have evolved as we have determined. This is why the Earth and your Moon are so different from all the other bodies in your Solar System. Have you never wondered why the Earth has such a large Moon and why your planet experiences such precision in a Solar eclipse? The Earth and Moon relationship is very special - the Moon causes your ocean tides and the Earth’s axis to nod; called nutation by Earth astronomers. The ocean tides are extremely important to the diversity of life on your planet. The Moon also has a significant but

subtle influence in Human affairs. The Earth and the Moon are locked together such that it would be very difficult for the Earth to topple over on its side and rotate about its axis similar to Uranus; a planet that has an axis inclination of eighty-two degrees. If, for whatever reason, the Earth did topple over and spin on its side, then life would have found it very difficult to get a foothold and sustain itself on the planet. An Earth spinning on its side would see dramatic changes in its weather; there would not be any seasons, as you now know them. If we take, as an example the northern hemisphere then at aphelion (furthest point of the Earth away from the Sun) and perihelion (nearest point to the Sun) respectively, the Arctic would experience extreme heat and then extreme cold, with all the attendant vagaries manifesting themselves at all the other points in the Earth’s orbit. The Arctic would face the Sun continuously for almost half of the Earth’s orbit around the Sun, then it would face away from the Sun for almost the other half of its orbit; the Antarctic would be affected in the same way. Thus the global weather pattern would be far different to what you experience now with its axis inclination of twenty-three and a half degrees. The climatic changes during a twelve month period would be so extreme that plants, animals, and bird life as you know them could not exist. Indeed, Homo sapiens could not exist either under these conditions. Humans are created in our image and were placed upon your planet approximately one hundred and thirty thousand years ago. When I say Humans were created in our image I refer to an image, that is, our respective image, compatible to your Universe.” Karaz-hu suddenly stopped, gazing at me with a questioning look, he asked. “Well do you have any questions?” I could only look in utter amazement at the implications of all of his revelations. I needed time to think about his claims regarding the structure of our Universe. Was it true that we Humans live our lives in a Virtual Reality existence? Do our bodies and everything about us consist of nothing more than vibrations at the fundamental level? Are our souls actually Gods from another reality which exists outside our Universe? Are these Aliens the true creators of Homo sapiens? What was the purpose of the ‘Game’ he mentioned? What will be the

future for Mankind and exactly what did he mean when he said we were on a Countdown to Oblivion? My mind was tumbling with all these questions when he interrupted. “Never mind, do not over concern yourself, I must move on.” Karaz-hu jolted me out of my questioning thoughts with ones even more challenging by continuing. “Have you and your fellow beings not yet realised there is form, there is structure to creation? Have you not looked at the World around you? From the smallest particle to the stars above, all this follows a definite plan. Have you not wondered why? From the creation of galaxies and the life and death of stars, to the birth and demise of planets all follows a definitive and sequential pattern. Look beyond Kepler’s Laws. Look beyond your simple Ohms Law; ponder deeply on the disciplined particle movement within Dalton’s Law of Diffusion. Even as your scientists seek to unify the four prime forces have you not realised that life itself, that is, life on Earth at all levels, follows a defined and prescheduled configuration. Have you not considered the implication of DNA and the sequence of life, the pattern of mutation and evolution from the bacterium to the Blue Whale? Did this happen by chance? Is it all part of a divine plan? Consider, was it not your own Einstein who challenged whether or not God played dice with the Universe when he wrote to Max Born, ‘You believe in the God who plays dice; and I in complete law and order’. God has given you control over all living things on Earth, you are part of a high spiritual design. But Mankind, in his greed, in his very desire to be above all things has turned his back on his Spiritual Creator and is thus in danger of destroying his own very soul. For it is Man’s soul that sets him apart from all other creatures and should distant him from, and place him above, the intelligent machines he strives to develop; for the latter do not have and can never have a soul. I reiterate and stress that God does not play dice! Your Universe to its very edge, beyond all you can observe, the stars themselves, the structure of matter; indeed your own form and above all your own

Spiritual Soul, none of these has come about by chance. Even the ‘Game’ itself, is part of a Master Plan; The Master’s Plan. Finally, when you have had time to contemplate over the truths that have been revealed to you, question the claim of most of your physicists, who state that your Universe was created 13 billion years ago as a result of a Hot Big Bang; a Universe that is supposed to have started with an infinite temperature and density at the Big Bang singularity. Ask yourself exactly what do they mean by infinite temperature and density? Playing the role of the Devil’s advocate I would offer that these words have no more logical meaning or intelligence than the claim that your Universe is no more than a Virtual Reality existence? Except the Virtual Reality concept does have more meaning as has been explained to you. At another time, as pleases us, we will reveal the birth of your Universe which will encompass the background microwave radiation as detected by your species; also the creation and motion of galaxies and stars as you now observe them.” At this point Alzan-atla suddenly appeared again. “It is time for you to return to Earth now,” he said. I had been so absorbed with Karaz-hu that I had not given any real thought to Alzan-atla’s coming and going; additionally it also occurred to me that I had had no concept of time till this moment and I also mused about the length of time I had been with the Aliens. Alzan-atla terminated my thoughts by repeating. “Come it is time for you to leave us!” “Wait!” I blurted out. “There is so much I want to ask, know and see.” Alzan-atla quickly replied. “Do not concern yourself for we shall meet again. For now you must return to Earth.” Without any further ceremony I was then led to another part of their spacecraft and beckoned to lie down on a couch. On reclining I noticed a soft, warm light above that appeared to approach and then engulf me. I could hear Alzan-atla talking to Karaz-hu in the very distant background; then everything faded from my consciousness. The next thing I became aware of was the sound of excited and heavy panting, accompanied by a wet and warm tongue licking my face. My sense of smell told me everything; even before opening my

eyes, I knew it was Ben. How can one express in words my sentiments? You will never know the feeling of relief that ran through my body on seeing him; my beloved and trusted friend. Ben appeared more than excited at my recovery and I thought his tail would become detached from his body at the ferocity of its wagging. Suddenly I felt very guilty as I judged I had exposed him to possible danger. But my self-remorse was short lived as the experience of my encounter came flooding back into my mind. “Oh! Good grief!” I shouted out startling Ben. “What the devil has happened to me?” My mind then started racing and questioning the events that had happened. Had I passed out and dreamt it all? Did it all really happen? Had I really met Aliens and been abducted? It suddenly dawned on me to look at my watch and to my amazement it was five minutes past ten and therefore only about half an hour had passed. On realising this fact I began to settle and think a bit more clearly. My mind then came up with what appeared to me to be a rational explanation. I must have seen the light and it must have been some type of military craft, which on close approach somehow struck me with a glancing blow without the personnel onboard realising what had happened. Thus I must have been knocked unconscious and then dreamt of my encounter with the Aliens. To my mind it made some kind of sense when I thought about my situation; I had indeed seen a strange light and what appeared to be a strange craft and then as a result of being rendered unconscious by this craft, my brain then filled in all the rest culminating in a bizarre dream. No doubt Ben had been frightened by the light of the craft and run away to hide somewhere. When he sensed the threat had gone he returned and found my, by then, semi-conscious body and attempted to fully revive me with his affectionate licking. The more I thought about my situation the more I reasoned that this was the only logical explanation. Yes! It all appeared to make sense and made me feel a lot happier apart from one niggling point. I could not detect any pain, bump or abrasion on my head or body to testify to being struck by the craft. A wind had now come up across the range and it was threatening to rain. As I was beginning to feel quite cold I decided it was time to leave.

I put my hand in my pocket to retrieve Ben’s lead half expecting to find it missing. But to my delight it was there and this further encouraged me to accept my latter idea of what had happened on the range was the correct explanation. Yes! Thank heaven it was Ben’s lead. Thus with the dog suitably restrained I headed for home. On reaching home I naturally examined my head for any sign of a bump or abrasion but found nothing at all. It was then I noticed the clock on the wall and it was telling me that my time on the range could not have been as short as my watch had indicated. The clock was showing the time as quarter past three in the morning. I could not believe it as I had left the range before ten thirty and normally it only took about half an hour to travel home. Where had the time gone? I could only guess that perhaps my watch, by coincidence, had stopped when I was rendered unconscious on the range and I had in fact been knocked out for far longer than I had thought. This thought satisfied me at the time and as I was feeling cold and very tired I made myself a hot drink and then retired to bed. The following morning my experience on the military range was still nagging at me. I could vividly remember seeing the light, encountering Aliens and being taken aboard their spaceship. But I still believed, as I had the night before, that the Alien encounter was the result of a dream! This was reinforced by the fact, that at the time, I could not recollect any events whilst supposedly being on their spaceship, except for finally laying down on a couch and seeing a light above me before recovering consciousness on the range. I therefore decided it must have been a dream and to keep the whole episode to myself. I deemed it would appear to be a bit far-fetched and I did not want to take the risk of appearing to be a little foolish if I told anyone else of my experience. Although I have to be honest and admit that after the incident I never ventured out alone on the military range with Ben again in the night. I always made sure I was well out of the area before darkness fell as I did not relish experiencing another such incident and told myself then that I was lucky not to have sustained a much more serious injury. Deep down, trepidation was fighting to surface; but fear dictated! I could not accept the other possible scenario of contact with Aliens; thus I suppressed it as

much as I was able to. As days turned to weeks the vision of Aliens began to diminish and the whole episode began to fade from memory. An enigmatic numbness replaced my trepidation and fear. Then without any warning the uninvited dreams started and the reality of the situation thrust itself upon me, not giving any quarter and so my nightly torments began. Thus I began to fully realise and accept I had been abducted by Aliens; but most astonishingly these Aliens were in fact our Gods’! But more astoundingly Gods with a choice of paths into our reality; they may enter our Universe as Gods, although under these circumstances it seems they are obliged to take on semi-Human qualities such as acquiring mass? Or they may enter ‘The Game’ and become as Homo sapiens. Therefore, in another existence, we are all fundamentally Gods; we only become Mortal when we enter ‘The Game’ and then experience life on Earth; on our demise in this World we become Gods again albeit to face a judgement in another reality! As a result of my suffering and the detail in my dreams I have now absolutely no doubt to the truth of all this. Of course you could claim it is all subterfuge on my part for whatever reason. I realise there is no way I can prove the events by actual photographic evidence, tape recording or a technologically advanced keepsake given to me by the Aliens. But I can only ask you to accept that I would be incapable of absorbing and retelling, even parrot fashion, the amount of varied and to my mind, complex information which you have read in this chapter - and will also find in the following chapters. I have to accept it was due to the influence and conditioning, or whatever it was the Aliens had subjected me to. As far as I am concerned the proof of my encounters is the astounding claims of my abductors. Claims I feel physicists will have great difficulty in refuting - although it is recognised that a closed mind will always deny the evidence before its eyes. In the following chapters it will become very apparent that most of my time on board the Alien spacecraft (as in this initial encounter) was given over to, for want of a better description, long lectures! The Aliens obviously had a ‘captured audience’ in more ways than one!

As such they had me listening, absorbing and retaining a very significant amount of information. The evidence of the detail is in my notes and I make no apology for the lengthy reiteration - I have recorded the details of my dreams exactly as they occurred and I can only surmise the Aliens have a very good reason for this...

ILLUSIONS

Curious, I took a pencil from my pocket and touched a strand of the [spider] web. Immediately there was a response. The web plucked by its menacing occupant, began to vibrate until it was a blur. Anything that had brushed claw or wing against that amazing snare would be thoroughly entrapped. As the vibrations slowed, I could see the owner fingering her guidelines for signs of struggle. A pencil point was an intrusion into this Universe for which no precedent existed. Spider was circumscribed by spider ideas; its Universe was spider Universe. All outside was irrational, extraneous, at best raw material for spider. As I proceeded on my way along the gully, like a vast impossible shadow, I realised that in the world of spider I did not exist.

Loren Eiseley, The Star Thrower, 1978

My

first recollection of this episode was on board the Alien spacecraft and Karaz-hu beckoning me to drink the liquid he had just poured into a tall glass. By what means the Aliens transported me aboard their craft I have no memory of. “We have many ways in which to enhance the way your brain functions.” Karaz-hu proclaimed as he watched me consume the drink he had just handed me. “The liquid you are drinking will enable you to absorb and retain a ‘vast’ amount of detail, which you would not normally be able to do so. It will also assist you overcome your inherent prejudices and delusions. Although you are of average intellect your limited knowledge will mean that a considerable amount of information I am about to impart will be totally new and stunning for your mind to accept! You must recognise that due to many failings such as arrogance, apathy and ignorance et cetera, Humans are blinded to a host of evident truths.” “Good grief!” I thought to myself. “It sounds as if I am to be admonished and in for some kind of heavy moralistic lecture.” “Not so!” Karaz-hu interrupted my thought train as though he had read the thoughts in my facial expression or, indeed, my mind. “I will enlighten you on a number of truths of the World about you, the real World, not the World you think you know and see. Please finish your drink and relax on the couch you see before you.” Making myself comfortable on the couch after having consumed my drink I nodded my readiness for Kara-hu to continue and without a moments hesitation he did just that. “I do not think it would be a gross exaggeration to say that most of your kind would admit to living in what you commonly refer to as the present. Most people perceive time as past, present and future. So it may come as a surprise to you if I stated that it is an illusion and that

you do ‘not’ live in the present but more accurately in the past. Everything you see and hear has already happened albeit a significantly number of things on a very small time scale, but it is a truth.” “No! That’s not right,” I interrupted. “That cannot be correct as I am hearing and seeing you now, this very moment which is the present time.” “Wrong!” Karaz-hu cut me short. “It is not the present as there is no such thing, and it is an illusion. Please allow me to explain.” I nodded in agreement as Karaz-hu began to continue. “Now you have to appreciate exactly what you mean and understand by the past, the present and the future. You cannot segregate past, present and future into discreet compartments. If it were possible you would then have to define when the past ended, when the present time starts and finishes and where exactly the future begins. This is not possible. Time is like a piece of wood floating on an ever-flowing stream. The piece of wood is continuously ever moving. As such the past is inexorably flowing into the future. Therefore you only have past and future time. You cannot stop the piece of wood and say this is the present time; surely you will agree that it is not logical. Indeed everything you see about you is a consequence of how the brain processes data. Thus it can only have happened in the past. To illustrate this point further, let me take for example your Sun. If from Earth you look at the Sun through a darkened glass you are not seeing the Sun as it is ‘now’ but as it was approximately eight minutes ago. You must appreciate that because of its distance from Earth, an average distance of 149 million kilometres, (93 million miles) it takes light approximately eight minutes to cover this distance. So if the Sun should suddenly extinguish itself, you would not feel the effects for eight minutes. Further when your astronomers observe the next nearest stars to the Earth, namely the triple star system called Alpha Centauri, they are seeing them as there were just over four years ago. This is because these stars are 4.3 lightyears distant from the Earth. Remember a light-year is the distance that light will travel in one year. That is 9,468,000,000,000

kilometres, (5,880,000,000,000 miles). Hopefully you will now comprehend more fully the significance of when you are looking at a star of say 20 light-years distance you are in fact looking 20 years into the past. Similarly when you observe a star 1000 light-years away, you are looking at the star as it was 1000 years ago. Again when you observe a galaxy 3 million light-years distant, you are seeing it as it was 3 million years ago! Therefore it follows that the greater the distance away of the celestial body you observe the further back into time you are looking. This is simply because light has a finite speed and as a consequence requires a finite time to travel a finite distance. Regarding objects being observed very much closer such as a building or vehicle, the principle remains exactly the same. It is only the nearness of the object that gives the illusion you are seeing them as they are now; that is, the present time in your understanding. As you look at me as I talk, you think it is now. This is incorrect, as I have explained to you. It takes time, albeit minutely small compared to the scale of the Universe, for the light reflected off my body to reach your eyes and my voice to reach your ears. Then time is required for the eye to function and the subsequent information to reach and be processed by the brain. Similarly when you converse with someone, the sounds of the words you hear are actually spoken in the past, even though the past may have been only a fraction of a second before.” Interrupting Karaz-hu I conceded. “Fine! I take your point and understand what you mean by your explanation. I can also appreciate the fact that when I look at the night sky I am looking into the past. Although I must admit I had not given any thought to near objects. I naturally assumed I was seeing things as they were now, but surely it is academic? I can now understand from what you have been saying and agree that when I look at any object I am looking at the past. But since the time it takes for light to reflect from these objects is so minutely small it might just as well be the present.” Karaz-hu quickly interjected. “In one respect you are quite right as the time and distance scale nullifies any meaningful effect for close objects, but it is important for you to realise the truth of what is actually happening otherwise your understanding of time and motion

will be confused and erroneous. The fundamental point I am trying to explain and get across to you, is that everything you see and experience in life is in various degrees of magnitude, an illusion. A common illusion that springs to mind is the motion of the Sun and Moon across your skies. As an example, it appears as if the Sun actually moves across the sky, rising in the East and setting in the West. The ancient peoples of your planet certainly believed in this, and numerous forms of worship developed from this mistaken understanding. It is worth remembering that it was not until Nicholaus Copernicus, during the sixteenth century, proposed that the Sun and not the Earth was at the centre of the Universe that at last the penny was beginning to drop. When Copernicus was in his early thirties he wrote a short pamphlet that discussed the motion of the sky and outlined his hypothesis that the Sun and not the Earth was the centre of the Universe. He conjectured that the Earth rotated on its own as it revolved around the Sun. In an effort to minimise any criticism and avoid possible charges of heresy, he distributed his pamphlet in hand-written form to scientific friends. But, by 1515 it became well known and by 1530 church officials were asking about his work. Knowing the Earth moves around the Sun clearly demonstrates that all things are not as they appear.” Karaz-hu paused here, smiling at me as he continued. “Indeed a lot of people on your planet make a very good living by exploiting the art of illusion; magicians are an easy and obvious example with World governments, and international companies perhaps not such an obvious example. Moving on, there are many reports of what you term as UFO’s being detected by radar but not visible to the naked eye - and vice versa why is this so? Why is it that certain individuals seem to be always spotting Alien craft whilst other people never seem to observe the slightest hint of anything strange? A large number of trained observers, military personnel, aircraft pilots, astronomers, workers who spend most of their time outdoors (especially during the night) never observe anything strange - or do they? Are they inhibited; for one reason or another in reporting or commenting on what they have experienced? There are a growing number of these trained and

professional people who do report unexplained happenings. Why is this so? To begin to answer some of these questions we need to be clear in our minds how Humans actually see and comprehend the World about them. But, before doing so, we must accept that many sightings can be obviously put down to misinterpretations, illusions, wishful thinking and indeed hoaxes. It is also possible (as an example in Human perception) for a group of say, one hundred observers to be looking at the night sky where possibly only one or two percent will see something strange, whilst the rest of the group will not. The probability of only a very small percentage of observers spotting something strange does not in any way prove they are hallucinating or erroneous in their observations, in fact, the very opposite may be the truth. Remember the old adage of ‘not being able to see the wood for the trees’. Therefore we will explore the mechanism you know as sight and how the brain interprets the data being sent to it. Humans, due to their very nature, tend to be very arrogant and seem to think there is possibly no object in the Universe, or indeed on your planet they would not recognise in one form or another. The truth is far from this - you may at this very moment be ‘looking’ but not ‘seeing’. When people wake in the morning and look around them the majority have little problem in recognising all the usual and familiar objects about them. They tend to give the matter little or any further thought. All assume they are seeing the World as it actually is and there would be very little they could not recognise or name. So it may come as a surprise if I tell you that what you see and perceive to be may not be the reality of it all. It may be very unsettling to be confronted with the idea of the World and Universe you see and know is really the fabrication of your mind. People are continually extracting patterns from the objects they see, trying to match them with something meaningful. The truth may be far from comforting for you. A common fallacy with Humans is when their eyes observe an object such as a butterfly and convey this image to the brain, correct recognition takes place straight away. This is not so! What is actually happening is the eye is receiving light rays reflected from the object and converting the light

energy into electrical energy. This in turn is then conveyed to the brain via nerves where an image is formed of what the mind actually thinks is being seen. To know what it is looking at the brain has to be taught and remember that the shape of this particular object is a butterfly. It should be recognised that if a person born blind could suddenly and miraculously see later in their life, they would not automatically recognise all the objects about them, joyously exclaiming, ‘It’s unbelievable I can see the blue of the sky, the colours of the flowers, the shapes of buildings et cetera’. The brain has to learn what it thinks it sees. This is the reason why the American Indian referred to the steam train as the ‘Iron Horse’ and why other native peoples referred to aircraft as ‘Flying Birds’. Imagine the situation where you have never seen a machine before, living in a world close to nature, surrounded by plants, trees and animals, when suddenly you are confronted with a jumbo jet. What would you see? It certainly would not be a jumbo jet, as you normally perceive it. Since the brain in this imaginary scenario would have never experienced such an object before. This is probably the most problematic aspect to understand and you would no doubt extort, “Don’t be ridiculous, of course you will see the jumbo jet, you just won’t know what to call it!” What has to be accepted is that a brain having been developed in a ‘natural’ World will try and make some sense of the data fed from the World in which it exists. If the jumbo jet is moving across the sky the brain will compare the aircraft to all moving objects it has learnt of in the past and can now recollect. Ultimately the brain would probably come up with a vision of a strange looking bird, or whatever creature it can relate to - it would immediately, definitely not, see an aircraft as you perceive one. This takes a little while to comprehend, but think about it and the reality of what I am telling you will slowly dawn on you. The brain recognises patterns such that when reading a book you are not looking at the printed letters but are recognising the familiar general patterns they form – a skill you learnt as a child in remembering the alphabet and then at a later stage learning simple words, before progressing to more difficult words.”

At this point Karaz-hu directed my gaze towards the wall in front of him and suddenly seven vertical lines appeared on what I assumed was some kind of integral video screen or a projection of some kind? My guess was for that of a video screen, but then again it could have been any form of projection or display; although I could not really detect any light needed for a projection. Thus I therefore decided it must have been some sort of screen, even though I could not perceive any edge to the screen - if that makes any sense? I have reproduced the lines as shown in figure 1 and Karaz-Hu’s dialogue was roughly as follows. “The simple image clearly demonstrates how the brain deals with what you see.

Fig 1

Looking at the image you will not just see seven vertical lines but three pairs of two, with an odd line on the right. This is the brain creating an ordered relationship, as the tendency to structure what you see is very compelling. If we add horizontal extensions to the lines you will now observe three broken rectangles - and a vertical line with two horizontal lines to the left of the broken rectangles. (See figure 2).

Fig 2

I’ll only believe it, when I see it for myself, is a very familiar phrase but how accurate or meaningful is it? Even trained observers can be fooled. When you look at an object are you really sure you see what you think you are seeing? They say a picture is worth a thousand

words so what do you make of the picture you now see in front of you?” Suddenly a different picture came into view and I initially perceived it as an image of a young lady. (See figure 3). “This is known as Leeper’s Ambiguous Lady,” Karaz-hu volunteered. “Many of your books on psychology make use of it, as it happens to be a very good demonstration of how one can erroneously interpret information as a process of visual perception. In particular how subjects can be conditioned into seeing preconceived images by raising their expectations, a technique you Humans call Perceptual Set.” My ‘enlightenment’ by Karaz-hu continued with him saying something along the lines. “Before concentrating on the picture I will give you a few clues:

The Young lady is looking over her right shoulder.

She has a small band around her neck.

You can just see her left eyelash and the tip of her nose.

She has a feather protruding from her hair.

Well, can you see the young lady? From the clues offered above you should have little difficulty?

Fig 3

But what if I say you have been misled and you are wrong. The picture actually depicts an ‘Old Hag’! So let me offer you the following additional clues: The old hag has a large nose.

Her left eye is plainly visible. She is looking downwards. Her mouth is slightly open. You should now be able to see the ‘Old Hag’ but which perception is correct - or are they both correct? I think you will now begin to recognise and accept how easily the brain can misinterpret the data that is fed to it from the eyes.” Looking at me intensely Karaz-hu asked. “Are you comfortable and do you follow everything I am explaining to you?” My response was surprisingly immediate and I replied. “Yes I think I understand most of it although I have to accept the information about the workings of the eye and brain; I have to admit my ignorance in these matters.” Karaz-hu smiled reassuringly. “Do not over concern yourself, relax and it will be useful at this point for me to explain and for you to understand, in simplistic terms, the mechanism of the eye, transmission of light data from the eye to the brain and then very simply the function of the brain.” I nodded for Karaz-hu to continue adding eagerly. “Yes it would be interesting.” My enthusiasm was due, no doubt to the drink I had had earlier. I was not tired in any respect and keen for him to go on. He continued. “Humans have five senses; these serve as the primary sources of information about the outside World. The senses consist of sight, hearing, touch, taste and smell. The sensory systems operate by means of receptors, which convert physical stimulation into electrical information. This electrical information is then fed to the brain via nerve cells connected to the receptors. Receptors are classified into types, based on the physical stimulation required to activate them. For example the eye has Photoreceptors

which are sensitive to light energy, and the skin has Mechanoreceptors which are sensitive to mechanical forces such as touch et cetera. Taste and smell are detected by Chemoreceptors, which are sensitive to chemical substances. Approximately four fifths of everything you know reaches the brain through the eyes, thus the eyes can, without exception, be deemed as your most important sense. Fundamentally, the eye can be regarded in some way as the lens of a camera that is forward looking when the head is motionless and pointed straight ahead; movement of the eye, head and body extends the visual range of the eyes. Objects that absorb all the light are seen as black, whereby objects that reflect all the light are seen as white. Objects that absorb certain parts of the light spectrum and reflect others are seen as colours. The eyes transmit constant streams of images to the brain by electrical signals. When you look at something the light reflected from that object enters the eye via a transparent covering called the cornea.” Karaz-hu indicated toward the wall again and an image appeared - but this time a very detailed of the Human eye. Being unable to reproduce the same detailed image I have included a simple diagram of the eye, see figure 4. Having drawn my attention to the image on the wall Karaz-hu continued. “Light then passes through an aperture in the iris called the pupil. Next it passes through the lens focusing the image of nearby objects on a layer at the back of the eye called the retina, which is extremely sensitive. The retina is composed of numerous photoreceptors called rods and cones. The photoreceptors are stimulated by electromagnetic energy, converting light energy to electrical energy.

Fig 4

The rods and cones have the ability to generate a very minute voltage (a fraction of a millivolt) when struck by a photon of light. Thus the greater number of photons that strike any particular photoreceptor, the greater the voltage generated. The rods and cones are specialised for different purposes. Rods are designed for seeing at night, because they operate at low intensities and lead to colourless sensations. The cones are best for seeing during daylight hours, because they respond to high intensities of light and result in the sensation of colours. Thus Human vision during daylight hours is marked by colour vision and the ability to see fine detail, whilst at night, only black, grey and white is experienced together with a loss of fine detail. Each rod and cone has a nerve connection and these nerves gather and exit the eye at a position known as the ‘Blind Spot’. Because you have two eyes this spot in each eye is not patently obvious although a simple experiment will prove its existence.” How Karaz-hu conjured up the card I cannot say, whether it was because I was paying so much attention to his dialogue that my awareness was distracted, but it seemingly came out of nowhere. The white card had a black X and black N drawn on it, as shown in figure 5.

X………………………….N

Fig 5

“Hold the card at arms distance and look at the X and letter N,” he instructed. “Now close the right eye and concentrate on the N with the left eye; then at the same time bringing the card slowly towards you. At a point roughly four to six inches from your face the X will disappear and then reappear as you bring the card closer to your face.” I did as I was told and amazingly the X disappeared at about six inches distance from my face. Karaz-hu smiled and continued. “If you carry out this experiment with both eyes open, the X will not disappear, as one eye will compensate (fill in) for the other.” This I did also to verify what he had just said. “Now the purpose of this simple experiment is not purely to demonstrate how an image, although in your field of vision can seemingly become invisible due to the blind spot, but also how the brain functions in these circumstances. To reiterate, as it is necessary for you to fully comprehend, that when Humans look at an object their eyes receive information in the form of light waves reaching the retina. The visual cells in the retina convert the light waves into electrical signals, which are sent to the visual area of the brain. The brain does not just receive the information passively; it interprets what it has seen and tries to make sense out of what it thinks is being seen.

It is important for you to recognise that Humans can, and do, erroneously interpret information as a process of visual perception and that they can be conditioned into seeing preconceived images by raising their expectations. This was adequately demonstrated with Leeper’s Ambiguous Lady. A further example of the way Humans see things is to look again at the wall and at a figure you Humans call the Necker Cube.”

Fig 6

Directing my attention yet again to the wall I could see a large cube. The conversation with Karaz-hu went roughly as follows. “If you look at the cube (figure 6) for any length of time you will notice changes taking place. The first impression will be of a cube facing in one direction, but if you keep looking at it, you will find that it suddenly

reverses itself so that the face, which seemed to be at the front, is now at the back of the cube. Further, this occurs when you are trying not to let it happen! It is important to realise that this is not a deliberate or conscious thing but something the Human brain does whether you want it to or not. Thus the Necker cube demonstrates a very important aspect of Human perception. When you look at something, the Human brain is unconsciously guessing or forming hypotheses about the information fed to it from the eyes. Most of the time you do not realise that it is a hypothesis because there is not any problem with the guess. For example, if you look at a dog and hypothesise that it is a dog then nothing is likely to make you realise that it was only an estimate. Although with the Necker cube there are two distinct but equally likely hypotheses which the Human brain can interpret what it is seeing - it has no other way of deciding which one of them is more correct than the other - thus what you see appears to ‘flip’ backwards and forwards. Hopefully you will appreciate that if you were seeing ‘exactly’ what was there, all you would see is a set of lines on a piece of paper. Therefore this little exercise adequately demonstrates that you do not necessarily see what is there. You interpret what is there instead. If you could just see the Necker cube as lines on a sheet of paper, you would not have any trouble with it at all, but instead the Human brain sees it as a representation of a three-dimensional object and so it cannot decide which way round the thing is supposed to be. Summarising, Human perception is interpreting and trying to make sense out of the information you receive through your senses. To a large extent, your everyday perception is influenced by your environment and the kinds of things that you are familiar with. Having demonstrated how easily the Human brain can be conditioned or fooled into what it thinks it is seeing I will move on to other things, but not before we have some refreshments.” As if on cue a Being I had not met before appeared with what I can only describe as a tray of chocolate biscuits and coffee. He smiled at us both, set down the tray on a small table situated between Karazhu and myself and then left without further ado. I could not help chuckling to myself that it all seemed so surreal. Here I was, on an

Alien spacecraft, with a Being claiming to be one of our Gods, in fact one of our Creators. Yet I was sitting down and having coffee and biscuits with him. I must admit that I was having great difficulty in comprehending the experience - just who will believe such a thing back on Earth I wondered? At this point Karaz-hu interrupted my thoughts. “Yes who indeed would believe you?” “Oh! No!” Is he again reading my mind I wondered, as my thoughts ran on? “You think too openly.” chuckled Karaz-hu and he continued. “But yes, you are correct as there will be very few of your fellows who would believe such a thing. It just would not do for your Captain Kirk to be seen sitting down having coffee and biscuits with Aliens during his encounters now would it? Indeed having coffee and biscuits with friendly extraterrestrials would not cut the ice. This is purely a failing of your Western culture as far too many see reality through the eyes of your cinematic world and Hollywood has a lot to answer for; there is surely nothing more normal and natural for me to offer such refreshments and identify with your own hospitality. Never mind and do not concern yourself as there will be many other things to impress your doubters and I will take that as my cue to continue.” He paused and smiled before going on. “If we now turn our attention to what is described as linear motion on your planet we will explore some anomalies and half truths and then you will be able to appreciate there is no such thing as linear motion, indeed there is no such thing as a straight line, it is an illusion. However you should appreciate that linear motion as dealt by your physics on Earth and its practical application adequately serves its purpose. It is when you start to explore and understand space and time you have to appreciate the true nature of the Cosmos.” Here Karaz-hu paused for a moment. “All things are an illusion!” He suddenly declared. “As an example I will give you an insight to the illusion of throwing a ball straight up into the air.” Then out of nowhere appeared a kind of hologram depicting two small people standing close to one another, with one of

them throwing a ball up into the air. I have reproduced a sketch of this somewhat surreal vision in figure 7. Karaz-hu appeared amused by the expression on my face and continued. “You can see that the person on the left, let us call him person ‘A’, is throwing a ball vertically upwards and let assume it is to a height of 6 metres. He is being observed by a person on his right which we will call Person ‘B’. Both person ‘A’ and ‘B’ will observe the ball following a straight, vertical path with the ball eventually slowing down due to the pull of gravity.

Fig 7

The ball appears to stop momentarily and then reverse its direction of motion back towards the ground. Due to the pull of gravity the ball will accelerate towards the ground at 9.8 metres per second per second. The observation by person ‘A’ and ‘B’ of the ball following a vertical trajectory is an illusion due to scaling and both of them occupying the same frame of reference. The ball does ‘not’ follow a vertical path, then stop and then reverse its direction. The truth of the matter is the ball actually follows a ‘curved’ path.” I had to interrupt Karaz-hu at this point stating this cannot be so, since you can easily see the ball following a straight path up and down.” Karaz-hu cut me short. “You were not fully listening to what has been explained to you, as I mentioned the illusion was due to scaling and both people being in the same reference frame. Let me explain further for you.” At this juncture the hologram changed to

show a railway trolley with two people standing on it. The person ‘A’ on the left was again throwing a ball up into the air with person ‘B’ on the trolley watching him. An additional third person ‘C’ was standing on the ground at a short distance witnessing the scene; I have reproduced a sketch depicting this scenario in figure 8. Again Karaz-hu showed amusement at my facial reaction and continued. “This is similar to the people standing on the ground except you can now see that person ‘A’ and ‘B’ are now standing on a stationary railway trolley. Additionally there a third person ‘C’ standing on the ground at a suitable distance observing the two people standing on the railway trolley.

Fig 8 Now person ‘A’ is repeatedly throwing a ball vertically in the air whilst standing on the stationary railway trolley. Both person ‘A’ and ‘B’ will see the ball rise and fall in a vertical manner and person ‘C’ will also observe the ball to rise and fall in a vertical manner.”

As I was gazing at the hologram and wondering what was going to happen next, the railway trolley started to move from left to right. This time a definite chuckle came from Karaz-hu, as the look on my face must have been too much for him. “Please excuse me, I am not mocking you,” he quickly interrupted. “It is just my reaction to Human behaviour, now I must continue. As you can see the railway trolley is now moving from left to right and person ‘A’ is still throwing the ball upwards. Now both persons ‘A’ and ‘B’ will still observe the ball rising and falling in a vertical manner. The point now is what does the person ‘C’ standing on the ground observe?” Karaz-hu gave me a questioning stare, but as I had nothing to offer he quickly volunteered. “The person ‘C’ will actually see the ball follow a curved trajectory.” At this point the ball started to glow as the hologram darkened, hiding the railway trolley and its two passengers. It was amazing as all I could see was this illuminated ball following a curved path; I have reproduced the curved path of the ball in figure 9.

Fig 9

Karaz-hu looked at me intently for a while and as the hologram faded from view he stated, “This example clearly demonstrates that although persons ‘A’ and ‘B’ see the ball rise and fall in a vertical manner, the true trajectory of the ball is a curve as seen by person ‘C’. The example also clearly demonstrates that observed motion is not the same for all ‘observers’. If we explore this situation a little further and imagine two people, ‘A’ and ‘B’ standing on the Earth’s surface at the equator, with person ‘A’ again throwing a ball upwards and person ‘B’ standing nearby, both will again observe the ball rising and falling in a vertical manner.” This time there was no hologram and I had to use my imagination. Seeing that he had my attention Karaz-hu continued. “Now imagine person ‘C’ observing from a position in space, but not moving at the same rotational speed of the Earth, being stationary with respect to the Earth; the rotational speed of the Earth at the equator is approximately 1680 kilometres per hour, (1044 miles per hour). Now person ‘C’ will see the ball follow a curved trajectory. (See figure 10). If we just consider the motion of the ball and that of the Earth, then only person ‘C’ can claim to observe the true motion of the ball, but try telling persons ‘A’ and ‘B’ on the Earth’s surface the ball has a curved trajectory when their visual perception is telling them otherwise. (This is depicted by the hollow ball shown in figure 10).

Fig 10 The astute person may say the above example is only true if observed from the appropriate direction. What if person ‘C’ was situated such that person ‘A’ was travelling toward him, he would then observe the ball rise and fall in a vertical manner, although the true trajectory would, again, be a curve. The only difference being that, dependent on speed of approach, he would see both person ‘A’ and the ball appear to increase in size. If person ‘A’ was travelling away from person ‘C’ then both the ball and person ‘A’ would appear to decrease in size, again dependent on the speed at which they both receded. But again, the true trajectory would be a curve, as you will appreciate more so later when I enlighten you on some of the motions of the Earth. It is easy to see from this example that observed and perceived motion is not only dependent on the position of the observer, but also on the relative motion of the object and the observer. The observations of persons ‘A’, ‘B’ and ‘C’ are very real to them as they perceive the motion, but the apparent real or true motion might be different again for another observer, say person ‘D’.

Another person might ask what observed path the ball would follow as seen by person ‘C’ if person ‘A’ was positioned at either of the Earth’s poles? The answer to this question would again be a curve but dependent on which motions are taken into account and which can be detected by the observer. The Earth is moving in numerous ways at any one moment; motions such as axial, orbital, precessional et cetera. Remember, as a natural state, everything in the known Universe has motion and there is no such thing as a motionless object, it is an illusion. It is imperative for you to understand the truth that there is no absolute state of rest within the Universe; everything is in motion from the vibration of atoms to the swirling of galaxies and the expansion of the Universe. To state that something has an absolute state of rest is another way of saying it does not exist.” Here Karazhu paused, smiling at my apparent bewilderment, and then still smiling he continued. “Indeed the Earth itself moves in many directions simultaneously:

The axial rotation, the period of rotation being approximately 24 hours.

The Earth rotates from West to East at a speed of 1680 kilometres per hour (1044 miles per hour) at the equator.

Orbital rotation around the Sun with an average orbital velocity of 106,194 kmh, (66,000 mph) covering a distance of 950,000,000 kilometres, (590,000,000 miles) over a period of approximately of 365.25 days.

It takes the Earth twelve months to complete one orbit around the Sun.

The precession that causes the Earth’s axis to wobble like a top. This slow, top like motion, causes the Earth’s axis to sweep around in a cone, taking almost 26,000 years for each cycle.

The axis currently points towards Polaris (the North Star). In 13,000 years time it will point in the direction of Vega.

Changing in the shape of the Earth’s orbit from, less elliptical to more elliptical.

The period of change is about 93,000 years from more to less elliptical

The change in the inclination of the Earth’s axis. The inclination varies with a period of about 41,000 years from 22 degrees to 28 degrees.

Currently the Earth has an inclination of 23.5 degrees

The Sun and the Solar System sweep around the galactic centre travelling at 220 kilometres a second (137 miles per second).

The Solar System takes about 225 million years to complete one orbit of the Galaxy (1 Cosmic Year).

The Milky Way Galaxy itself is hurtling through space at a tremendous rate.

Galaxies move through space with speeds of up to hundreds of kilometres per second.

These simultaneous motions the Earth is experiencing are sufficient to illustrate the point. So hopefully you can now appreciate that when you throw a ball upwards into the air it is impossible for it to follow a true linear path, as everything is moving. It is extremely important for you to fully understand and accept this truth, everything is in a state of motion, and nothing is at rest. It may seem obvious but it is also important for you to understand the full meaning of the statement that for a body to have motion it must have space in which to move, indeed the body takes up space by displacing space. The body must also experience what you Humans refer to as time. To help illustrate the point I am attempting

to make it is necessary to look in detail at a simple example of a vehicle in motion. A car is moving at constant velocity (v) of 10 metres per second along a flat surface and will cover a distance of 1000 metres in 100 seconds. It is easy to see from this that the car will cover 500 metres in 50 seconds and 250 metres in 25 seconds, and so on. Therefore it becomes obvious that if we halve the time (divide by two), we halve the distance covered. The question then arises is how often can we keep dividing the time by two? Do we ever each zero? Thus we will examine the reality between two points, A and B separated by 1000 metres. (See figure 11).

Fig 11

If we examine the distance the car travels at different time intervals between A and B, then after 100 seconds the car will have travelled

1000 metres, after 1 second the car will have travelled 10 metres, and after 0.5 seconds the car will have travelled 5 metres. And so on, approaching but never reaching zero; the velocity being maintained at 10 metres/second. Thus by continually dividing the time by two (decreasing the time), the distance is continually halved (distance correspondingly decreases). Time and distance get closer and closer to zero, but it is important to note they never reach zero. The time can never equal zero, for if it did then the distance covered and the velocity would become zero. This cannot be so in reality as it means the car would be stationary at points where we say time is zero. It should be noted that the shortest period ever measured by your scientists was the decay for some elementary particles, which lasted for 10–24 (0.000000000000000000000001) second. So what does it all mean? To what extent can you break down the time intervals, how close can you approach the suggestion when time is almost zero and say ‘no more’ as beyond this point, it will mean the car becomes stationary, frozen in time? Will the critical moment be after 0.000000001 seconds, which is a nanosecond (109), or picosecond (10-12), or femtosecond (10-15) or attosecond (1018) et cetera? Or is it to be argued that it is infinitesimally small and you will never actually reach the critical point, you will just keep getting closer and closer to zero but never reaching it. Mathematically, you can state this would be the case as you can forever keep halving, or breaking figures down till eternity, although you will need a lot of paper (an eternal amount of paper) for all the figures after the decimal point. Can it be suggested that eventually you have to make the ‘jump’ from an infinitesimally small figure to zero?” “Hold on a minute!” I interrupted Karaz-hu, “You are losing me, as I do not fully understand what you are getting at? Now, I understand that if a car was travelling at a steady 60 kilometres per hour it will cover a distance of 60 kilometres in one hour, and I can also appreciate that if I travelled for half an hour at this constant speed I will have covered only half the distance, namely 30 kilometres - I

know this is correct for it is fairly easy to prove.” Karaz-hu quickly replied. “What you say is correct to a certain extent, although it appears you have not grasped the point I am trying to make to you. The equation where speed equals distance divided by the time is relatively straightforward and meaningful at speeds and distances you are accustomed to, and as you say, can easily be proven. The question I am trying to get across to you is simply, does the equation have meaning at all speeds? Look at it this way.” Karaz-hu beckoned at the wall and a simple diagram appeared which I have reproduced in figure 12.

Fig 12

Then he continued. “If a horizontal line is drawn to represent a motion spectrum from an infinitesimally low to infinitely high speed, and at the centre point a mark is made to represent speeds experienced during everyday existence, then towards the high end of the spectrum we can draw a vertical line to represent the speed of light. Now, as you know light travels at 300,000 kilometres per second (186,000 miles per second) and matter, that is, anything of mass you care to think about in your Universe cannot exceed this limit. Indeed as a body approaches the speed of light a number of strange things begin to happen such as mass increase, length reduction and slowing of time. Einstein showed that at velocities approaching the speed of light things have to be dealt with in a different manner. In other words, the simple equation where speed equals the distance (or space) divided by the time has a limit in reality. Mathematically, you can apply the necessary figures and attain any speed, but there are limits to the equation to have any meaning in your Universe. For example, if we stated that a space ship travelled a distance of 900,000 kilometres in 2 seconds then the use of the simple formula would state the velocity of the space ship would be 450,000 kilometres per second, which you know, as shown by Einstein, is impossible as nothing can exceed a velocity of 300,000 kilometres a second in your Universe. The point I am making is there is obviously a limit when using the simple linear equation. At extremely high speeds such as hundreds of thousands of kilometres per second, one has to turn to Einstein to approach the truth. But even with Einstein there is a ceiling regarding the maximum speed of any material object in your Universe and this is governed by the speed of light. Einstein showed that the faster an object travelled relative to an observer, the shorter it became. Indeed, as the velocity approaches the speed of light, the length of the object approaches zero. Thus when the velocity is equal to the speed of light, Einstein’s Special Theory says the length will be zero and as such the object will have disappeared. Additionally the Special Theory states that as the velocity of an object increases, so does its mass. When the velocity is equal to the

speed of light the mass will be infinite. Thus material objects in your Universe can never exceed or even travel at the speed of light as an infinite of mass would require an infinite amount of energy to attain the required velocity. One of the postulates of Einstein’s Special Theory of Relativity states that the velocity of light is always constant relative to an observer. Einstein believed this to be one of the basic laws of your Universe. Now considering the other end of the scale you need to question whether the same logic applies for very low speeds. Can the simple equation, of multiplying the velocity by time to find the distance, be applied to extremely low velocities, and if not why? Another way to look at the problem is to ask how small can small be and still having any meaning - is there a limit similar to that at the high-speed end of the motion spectrum? - is it at the Quantum Level? (See figure 12). According to the equation it can be infinitesimally small, always approaching zero but never actually getting there; without trying to sound facetious, if you have a couple of months or years to spare, insert some figures into the equation and with a suitable calculator, or better still, a powerful computer try and reach zero and you will soon appreciate the truth of the statement. It becomes purely a somewhat pointless arithmetic exercise and moves away from reality. In an attempt to explain to you the truth you need to examine how small a unit of objective time can be, and still have some meaning. You will have a feel for what an hour, a minute, a second and possibly some inclination of what a number of milliseconds are. Beyond this limit the Human brain cannot respond to, or sense smaller units of time. But you know mathematically you can keep subdividing the units down to nanoseconds, picoseconds, femtoseconds and attoseconds et cetera. Further, when measuring distances are there any limits, can you visualise anything smaller than the diameter of a molecule, atom, and electron or beyond? To give an explanation to these questions we need to look more closely at what you understand as time and its implications. You must realise and fully understand that when Humans measure time they are actually comparing different motions, such as the

movement of the hands of a clock to the motion of the Sun across the sky. You must appreciate that what you refer to as an hour, is no more than the duration of the large hand of a clock moving through 360 degrees around the face of a clock. Time, as perceived by Humans, is illusory. If you are waiting for a bus in the rain on a cold and damp winter’s day, then time will apparently seem to drag. If you are doing a dull and repetitive task time will seem to drag. On the other hand if you are at a party and thoroughly enjoying yourself, time will fly by. No doubt you can think of many examples whereby time seems either to flash by or to drag its heels. So in effect, time, as perceived by the Human brain, is variable in reality. As people grow older so perceived time appears to speed up. For a child time passes slowly: a birthday seems never to come. What is the reality, the steady unrelenting movement of the hands of a clock, or the variable nature of the passage of time as the Human brain perceives it? Time has no constant quantity in this context and is varying all the while and is dependent upon the input and activity of the Human brain - this phenomenon on Earth is known as subjective time, whereby time will pass more rapidly on some days, weeks or even some months than it does on other days, weeks et cetera. Objective time on the other hand is where each hour has the same length and every day contains twenty four of these hours. Philosophers on Earth have long debated the relation between subjective and objective time; even psychologists have puzzled over the same problem. I should point out at this juncture that subjective time is like imagination and although it may appear very real it is purely in the mind. It is the result of how the Human brain functions, and it should be clearly defined as such to obviate the confusion in understanding the true nature of time. Hopefully, and not to over complicate matters, you should also be aware of Einstein's theories that demonstrate that high-speed travel will keep you young. Given identical clocks, a fast moving clock will run slower than a slow moving clock. Indeed a clock attached to a high velocity rocket will run slower than a clock left behind on the

ground. If an astronaut should leave Earth in a highly technologically developed spaceship and travel far and fast enough, and then turn around and come home, he will find that everyone will have aged far greater than he had. The faster and longer he travels the greater will be the age difference when he returns. A little unsettling to find that your children and their children in turn have lived and died; while you would have only aged, say 30 years! At this point it is also useful to realise that strong gravity fields affect time. A clock in a strong gravity field will run much slower than a clock in a weak gravity field; thus a massive body such as the Earth, the Sun or a black hole will influence its time and space in its environment in a peculiar way.” Karaz-hu sat back on his couch as if to give me time to absorb and understand all of the information he had just imparted. Whether there was something in the coffee or biscuits we had earlier but I was feeling quite eager to press on. Especially since he was talking about time and I sensed he had something of further importance to reveal to me. I was not mistaken as after about ten minutes he continued. “Now allow me to return to the question of what is motion and what is its relevance to time and space in your Universe. Space as you understand it does not exist on its own, space needs matter; space exists between bodies. You must appreciate there are different types of space; depending on which universe you exist in. Space is not the vacuum you perceive it to be. If you can regard your Universe as a single unit of mass, then space does not exist outside of it, there is something else. Yours is not the only Virtual Reality Universe, there are many other universes that we have created. These universes exist in a ‘medium’ unknown to your science. I will employ an analogy in an attempt for your mind to comprehend the meaning of all this. Consider a balloon filled with the gas oxygen to represent your Universe, and then numerous other balloons filled with various other gasses to represent all the other universes. All these balloons float in a vast watery medium. The point I am trying to make is that if we regard the different gasses in the balloons as the space of these different universes then you can easily see that each balloon has a different type of space. Further, the medium of the balloons is

obviously different to the medium between the balloons. To reiterate, your space is a property of your Universe and outside of which, your space, as you understand it, does not exist. There are many universes outside the boundaries of your Universe. I cannot explain any further for you as there are no words in your language to convey any meaning, beside it will be all totally beyond your comprehension. You will just have to accept my limited explanation.” Karaz-hu obviously had taken stock of the sudden glazed look in my eyes for he suddenly stopped. Apart from his comment relating to language and comprehension I must admit I did not have a clue as to what he was on about regarding space and other universes. “Do not worry,” Karaz-hu quickly continued, “you will recall the information I am imparting to you, even though you may not understand it all; others will though. So just relax and listen, you will begin to partly understand. Returning to my explanation, space is space, it is not nothing! All the galaxies, stars and planets exist in space, without space they could not exist and they certainly could not exist in nothing. Although outside the boundaries of your Universe is another reality, which contains many other universes. All of these universes are Virtual Reality Universes and for the purpose of the Grand Game, some are expanding, some are contracting and others are static. I have shown you that objective time is directly related to motion, such as the movement of the hands of a clock. Indeed your current standard of time, Atomic Time (AT), is based on the radiation frequency of the element cesium at 9,192,631,770 cycles per second, with an accuracy of plus or minus 20 cycles per second. Thus your current time standard is based on the caesium atom. It is used to calibrate less accurate timepieces; these in turn keep time by monitoring the oscillations of quartz crystals, such as found in watches et cetera. The important point to note is that your basic standard of time currently, used for the time signals over the radio and to calibrate clocks and watches, is derived from the atom and not from any heavenly body such as the Sun, Moon or stars. Therefore I think you will agree with me that I have proven to you that objective time is

simply nothing more than the comparison of motions.” I nodded my head in agreement as I could plainly see from Karaz-hu’s explanations that objective time was simply a means of comparing the period or duration of one movement to another movement, although I was still confused about the whole concept of time! “If time was directly related to motion then how can time appear to speed up or slow down?” I asked Karaz-hu continuing. “In the same frame of reference the hands on a clock face move at a constant and relentless rate, but for me, time is subjective as depending on what I am experiencing or doing at that moment, time does not appear to move at a constant rate. If I am experiencing something extremely boring time does appear to slow down - if I were to be confronted with something traumatic the moment would appear to freeze in my mind - conversely, if I was doing something interesting or exciting, then time would appear to fly by.” Karaz-hu interjected. “You are correct, just because your brain perceives time speeding up or slowing down as opposed to the constant movement of the hands on a clock face do not be confused. Time, as you Humans know it, is still no more than a comparison of motions and I can see that it is necessary for me to elaborate further. To fully understand subjective time it will be necessary for me to explain, in simplistic terms, the fundamental workings of the Human brain. The brain is not a static mechanism and requires constant input to function properly via the five senses of vision, hearing, touch, taste and smell.” Karaz-hu suddenly stopped and looking hard at me said. “I can tell that you will find it hard to agree with the truth I am about to tell you. Therefore we will subject you to a small but harmless experiment so that you can decide for yourself.” Karaz-hu then beckoned me to rise from where I was sitting and ushered me to another part of the spacecraft which appeared to have a sunken bath set in the floor, filled with what appeared to be a clear fluid. “Do not be alarmed,” Karaz-hu assured me, “it is completely harmless and I would like you to enter the medium which you perceive as a fluid and then float on your back and relax.” I did as I was requested and did not, at the time, consider it necessary to take off any clothing and I sensed the Aliens had

something to do with my thinking. Thus I gingerly entered the fluid. I was totally surprised to find I did not experience any sensation of ‘feeling wet’? The liquid ran off me like mercury. Another surprise was what I perceived as a liquid neither felt neither hot nor cold; in fact I could not detect its presence on my body at all. “Relax, lie on your back.” I heard Karaz-hu coaxing. I did as he requested, gingerly lowering myself as I expected to virtually fall to the bottom of the bath. It was completely unreal as I could not detect any support coming from the liquid. Amazingly I found myself being suspended within the bath and could not feel any pressure or presence of the liquid that was supporting me. In fact I was feeling very relaxed and almost dream like. Karaz-hu looked at me and smiled a reassuring smile and said. “The reason for this experiment is to demonstrate to you how your brain will respond when input from your five senses is negated. You are now suspended in an environment whereby you cannot detect temperature or any pressure upon your external body. We will leave you suspended for a short while for your brain to adjust and then cut off all sound and light from you. Then we will purify the air you inhale and by subtle electromagnetic energy impulses to your brain, negate your sense of taste. Do not be afraid, it is harmless, you will be in an environment where you will not be able to see, hear, touch, smell or taste.” As he was still speaking I could see Karaz-hu withdrawing slowly to the background while simultaneously the light began to fade and a sense of total quietness began to flood over me. “Wake up, wake up,” I could feel Karaz-hu shaking me gently. “Well, what have you to say?” I found that I was no longer in the bath but back on the couch where Karaz-hu had been talking to me earlier. “I am not too sure,” I heard myself hesitatingly stutter. “Have I actually been asleep?” Karaz-hu had to explain what had happened to me, for as far as I was concerned the only thing I could remember was floating and relaxing in the bath. The last thing I knew was Karazhu’s voice fading into the background and then falling asleep, but not a restful sleep - a sleep filled with dreams, but with dreams containing all sorts of nonsense, a kaleidoscope of colours, flashes and non-reality of which I could not remember any specific details.

“You have not been asleep,” Karaz-hu interrupted my thoughts, “we simply denied your brain of any input and as you have observed you felt you were dreaming all sorts of nonsense as your brain went into ‘free fall’ so to speak. Given sufficient time under these conditions your mind would become completely scrambled and even controls such as to the heart, lungs and other organs would become corrupted eventually leading to death. It is important to recognise the subtle difference between natural sleep, or indeed, suspended animation and the condition, or more correctly the lack of conditions you have been exposed to.” “Hold on a second!” I rudely interrupted Karaz-hu. “You said the experience would be completely harmless and now you are telling me that if you kept me under those conditions for a little while longer it would have been fatal.” Karaz-hu cut me short. “No! That is not so. I was absolutely honest with you and we were in complete control and would not have allowed the termination of your life. Now allow me to move on.” I sat back speechless and nodded for him to continue. “The Human brain requires constant stimulation and without it would cease to function fully and correctly in a very short time. You will have to accept all of this as I wish to move on again and explain to you in very simple terms the activities within the brain. The Human brain is obviously not mechanical employing cogs and wheels et cetera. Nor is it a hard-wired electrical device similar to one of your computers with hardware and software. It can be more accurately described as a wet lump of organic matter ‘firing’ innumerable electro-chemical pulses; acting more than as a nerve centre with an incredible capacity for storing and manipulating information. The ‘Achilles heel’ of the brain is its necessity of requiring a continuous stimulating input to function fully and correctly. This, as I have already said, is not to be confused with the semi-rest state of the brain, when for example you are sleeping. The brain is a very complex network of electro-chemical pulses, cycles, rhythms and minute electrical and electromagnetic fields all

dancing, intermixing and functioning in a very complex and determined way; the brain like the rest of the body is made of cells. These brain cells, called neurons, are very specialised points for receiving and transmitting information. There are over one hundred billion neurons in the brain. Each of these neurons is connected up to thousands of others. Neurons come in several different types arranged in their own specialised region of the brain with a specific job to do. It is very important for you to recognise that it is because of the vast myriad of brain cells and their interconnection that realises the immense power of the brain. The various numbers of interconnections can be described as infinite thereby resulting in the incalculable variety of Human behaviour and personality. Now it is not my intention to delve into the deeper regions of how the Human brain functions suffice to explain the basic function of the neuron. The point I will be trying to convey is that it all basically comes down to motion in one form or another. Therefore we will consider the neuron and with reference to the sketch you see in front of you. (See figure 13). We can see that it consists of a rounded cell body with a number of fine fibres growing out into the brain’s surrounding tissue. Every neuron is different in its shape from every other neuron. To give you a feel for the size of the brain cell - it measures between one two-hundredth and one tenth of a millimetre across. The longest of the fibres is called the axon and is the neuron’s transmission cable with the other fibres called dendrites, which are the receiving fibres from other cells. I should add that the dendrites are not just receivers but can send messages as well, and I do not intend to elaborate any further on the complete function of the dendrites, no doubt your neuroscientist will be frustrated by this, but maybe another place and another time? Continuing, a brain cell is not much use on its own and it is by virtue of their interconnection and how they react with one another that information is processed. Therefore, bundles of axons (which can be likened to electrical cables) of the neurons, criss-cross throughout the brain to link up large networks of cells.

Fig 13

The neuron will fire off an electrical signal that will travel down the length of the axon until it reaches a junction (called a synapse) with another cell. At this junction there is a gap that will not allow the electrical signal to pass. There is a reason for this, as chemical neurotransmission is not just a means for an electrical signal to travel across the gap, it is discriminatory as well. The brain uses different neurotransmitters with some increasing activity and others slowing it down. At any one instant each cell has to calculate whether or not to fire, how rapidly, and of what magnitude, according to all the different chemical messages it receives.” Karaz-hu paused for a moment, and then continued. “I think I have explained enough of how the brain functions for me to make my point about time and motion, and hopefully you can comprehend my explanation, that the brain is a vast hubbub of electro-chemical activity. With chemical neurotransmission triggering molecules, to move across the gap between one cell and the next on receipt of an

electrical signal down the axon to the terminal. There are charged particles (ions) of many different elements. The important ions for neurotransmission are sodium, potassium (both positively charged) and chloride (negatively charged) - it is a vast powerhouse of electro-chemical activity. Therefore, and I am sorry to labour the point, but it is important. Hence I am taking pains to demonstrate that time is nothing more than a comparison of motion. That is, objective time such as the motion of the hands of a clock as compared to any other kind of motion or any movement you care to think about. Thus when you consider the passage of this objective time in relation to such things as time travel into the past it can have no meaning, as motion is motion and nothing else. Whether the hands on a clock move clockwise or anticlockwise they have no effect on the World about you. If you constructed a clock to run continuously in an anticlockwise direction the Sun would still rise in the east and set in the west. You would not grow any younger; flowers would still grow normally. It would have absolutely no effect at all. Analysing the notion of subjective time I will now endeavour to explain how the brain deals with these motions. The speed of electrical impulses within the brain, have a finite quantity about them. Therefore it will take a certain measurable duration for an electrical pulse to travel from the neuron down the axon to a junction (synapse). If you are looking for figures and a feel of this activity, a single neuron can ‘fire’ up to 500 times a second with the electrical pulse reaching speeds of up to 120 metres a second. Now you will really have to stretch your imagination to try and envisage the whole scenario of all this vast brain activity with innumerable electrical pulses ‘firing’ here and there with some of pulses being arrested, modified to higher or lower amplitude; not forgetting all the varying electrical and electromagnetic fields, intermixed and dependent with all the wet chemical activity of myriads of molecules carrying out their functions. I hope you can appreciate all the motion that is taking place in the brain - there is no absolute time mechanism in the brain to synchronise and compare all of this highly complex activity - brain function (motion) is

dependent on all sorts of stimuli, which are varying all the time. Thus with no internal absolute reference point to compare with, there is no such thing as objective time for the brain. All time in the brain is subjective and illusory and that is why if you are carrying out a boring task time will appear to drag as the brain is not ‘comfortable’ with this activity. In another sense it finds the task somewhat ‘painful’ and that is why it perceives the hands on a clock face to move slowly, and believe it or not, it is willing them on. On the other side of the coin, if a person is delighting in a particular task then the brain is more concentrated on the activity and the person will not notice the hands on the clock, perhaps, briefly looking now and then and wondering where the time has gone? Now I know it is difficult for you to comprehend, but when I use the word time, try in the light of what I have told you to think of motion and space instead - that time is purely a Human concept and everything you care to think about, even your own thoughts, are all motion of one kind or another, covering an immense spectrum from the excitability of electrons to the expansion of the Universe. Train your mind to think of motion and space when you think of time and eventually you will begin to see and have a true grasp to the meaning of what you Mortals refer to as time. There is no such thing and I take pains to repeat that time is just motion. It is as simple as that and Humans have complicated the truth with their illusions and delusions. Everything in your Universe has motion and is moving through space, either on a grand scale such as the galaxies or a small scale such as the vibration of atoms. Nothing is at rest and it is against all this background of movement and vibration that Humans have come up with their concept of time. If you want to test the truth of what I am saying then try and find one physicist or scientist on your planet that can name and prove one object or anything that is in an absolute state of rest! All motion is in a sense always forward and once something has moved from point A to point B there is no going back. You can obviously repeat the movement but it will be at a different point in space as everything is moving on.” I had to stop Karaz-hu as I was becoming more and more confused. “I do not understand what you

are trying to say about time, motion and space? What exactly due you mean when you say something can move from point A to point B and there is no going back and yet you can move again from point A to point B again? It does not make sense to me.” I knew Karaz-hu was not too happy at being stopped in full flow and he reflected this in his somewhat terse response. “You must concentrate on what I am explaining to you. I have told you that everything thing in your Universe has movement thus when an object moves in your own reference frame from point A to point B, such as from one side of the road to the other, it is also moving against the background of stars. Remember the Earth is moving on its axis at the same time as it also moves in orbit around the Sun. So if you were to retrace your steps indefinitely in the same path across the road, you would be moving through new space in relation to the Universe. Thus motion is always onward and never retraces the exact same path in your Universe. It is for this fundamental reason that travelling back into time is impossible. Now returning to the points I was making earlier in our discussion we have seen there is a ceiling to the maximum speed that can be achieved for objects in your Universe, (see figure 12). That speed is just below the velocity of light. Only light can travel at 300,000 kilometres per second (186,000 miles per second) and when an object approaches the speed of light its mass increases to infinity. This cannot be achieved since infinite energy would be required to attain this situation. Looking at the other end of the scale there is also a limit or barrier to the slowness of speed. In your everyday World things follow an analogue law, insomuch that everything is smooth and nature does not move in jumps as we have explained on our initial contact with you.” I nodded my head as if I remembered, whilst racking my brain in an attempt to recollect the detail. But before I had chance to think Karaz-hu was back ‘at full steam’ again. “If you also remember from our first contact with you when I told you at the quantum level everything behaves in a jerky fashion. In fact at the sub-particle level motion is not smooth, it is jumpy so that particles make a ‘quantum leap’, or jump across the extremely small space that separates them.

This is the limit to the ‘slowness’ of speed in your Universe, it is the duration of a quantum leap.” Karaz-hu sat back. “I can see our conditioning is wearing off and you have had enough, it is time for a break. I will have to explain what happens at extremely slow speeds to you on another occasion. There is so much I could tell you, but our time with you is limited and the moment is not right. Go and rest and we will continue later.” Those last words were music to my ears as I was glad for the break. I followed Karaz-hu to an area where he beckoned me to lie down on a couch and within seconds of putting my head down I was lost in a deep sleep. The next thing I became aware of was being gently shaken and Karaz-hu announcing it was time for him to continue. Whether or not it was something to do with the couch, but I felt completely rejuvenated, and to my own surprise I was eager for him to resume again. Although before continuing he offered me a drink, which I readily accepted and consumed rapidly. I could see by the slight smile on his face the point was not lost on him, as I was extremely thirsty. I had, when Karaz-hu was not pounding my head with information, tried to make out of the interior of the spacecraft. If I concentrated I had the impression of perceiving greater depths without moving from the spot. It was all very strange to me. If I walked away from my area of visual awareness, I would, it seems, enter another area of visual awareness. It was as if a screen was falling away, allowing me to see a bit more as I progressed forward. Sometimes a door would appear as if out of nowhere and if left to my own devices I would be completely and utterly lost with absolutely no sense of direction whatsoever. Karaz-hu interrupted my thoughts. “I hope you are now beginning to appreciate the true notion of time and motion. We will now look at a simple example to see how light dominates and effects your perception of the Universe in which you live. I can see by the look on your face that you are somewhat bemused, so let me explain. Light is king, light rules your Universe, nothing in your Universe exceeds the speed of light, light is life, your very existence, it is omnipotent. Not all Humans fully comprehend the degree in which their lives are

totally influenced and dependent upon light. A small thought experiment will easily demonstrate how different your World will be to live in if light were not the supreme velocity. Imagine person ‘C’ looking at two people whom we will call person ‘A’ and person ‘B’ and they are separated by a distance of 100 metres. Person ‘C’ is standing at right angles to person ‘A’ at a distance of 100 metres; the distance between person ‘B’ and person ‘C’ is approximately 140 metres. (See figure 14). Now imagine person ‘B’ has a silent super velocity gun that can fire bullets at 10,000 metres per second and light in our thought experiment only travels at only 10 metres per second. Person ‘B’ is a crack-shot with his gun and fires at person ‘A’ a fatal shot. If you think carefully about this situation person ‘C’ will actually see person ‘A’ collapse and die before he observes the gun being fired by person B. (For those who wish to see the mathematical proof please refer to Appendix Two). There is a difference of about four seconds between the events which means person ‘C’ will observe person ‘A’ fall fatally wounded, then four seconds later see person ‘B ‘fire the gun.

Fig 14

In this simple scenario ‘cause and effect’ as you know them have been reversed and I leave it to your imagination to envisage what it would be like to live in such a world. In your World common sense dictates the gun must be fired first before you see the consequence of such an action and not the other way around. Hopefully this simple thought experiment will drive home the significance of the speed of light in your Universe and how a change in the magnitude of its velocity can completely alter your reality.” At this point in his dialogue I had to interrupt Karaz-hu, not only to catch my breath, but also to fully comprehend what he was telling me. “Yes, I think I follow what you are saying. However I will need time to think it all through before I have a clear understanding of all its implications!” Karaz-hu quickly reacted to my interruption. “Do not concern yourself, you will when the time comes but I must move on.” What Karaz-hu meant by this I was not too sure and at the time I was not highly motivated to find out either. Thus giving into my somewhat cowardly instincts and being a captive audience I nodded for him to continue. Karaz-hu gazed at me in a resigned fashion and I fancied a sense of disappointment at, I could only guess, my not challenging him further. He then took a breath and continued. “Now let us consider the phenomenon you call gravity and I wish to sow a seed in your mind to its true nature and dispel the illusion created by gravity. I do not apologise for reiterating that everything in your Universe can be reduced to nothing more than motion, it is an important concept and truth for you to get into your mind. Once you can fully understand this truth a lot of illusions will be laid to rest. Therefore let us look at gravity and which, if asked for a definition you would say it is a force.”

I nodded my head in agreement as it was obvious, thinking that you need only to throw a ball into the air to prove the fact. Being somewhat facetious, I almost muttered out loud, that you only have to fall off a tall building to experience the full impact of the force of gravity. Karaz-hu’s face portrayed a meditative mood as I continued with my thoughts. What was he driving at I wondered? Gravity had to be a force; it was after all the force that kept us on the surface of the Earth and all the planets in orbit about the Sun. Karaz-hu suddenly interrupted my thoughts. “I think I had better continue and explain to you the truth. You are incorrect in thinking that gravity is a force for it is not. It is an illusion and it is easy to be deluded into thinking this way, as your everyday experience would seem to indicate this is so. The illusion is created due to its attractive nature. What I mean by this is that you are always moving (falling) towards the centre of gravity of any mass, so you perceive it as a force, but you are deluded as it is motion. Gravity is a motion in the sense that acceleration is a motion, and can be best explained by looking at Einstein’s Principle of Equivalence, which states that at a single point in space the effects of gravitation and accelerated motion are equivalent and cannot be distinguished from one another. Now the reason you cannot distinguish between acceleration and gravity is that they are fundamentally the same thing. As an example, astronauts orbiting the Earth have no sensation of gravity as they float about within their spacecraft. This is because they have tangential velocity parallel to the Earth’s surface as well as gravitational acceleration. It can be argued that the rocket has in a sense, a force exerted on it when the engines are firing to place the spacecraft in orbit. Once this has been achieved then the spacecraft is under the influence of the two motions of orbital velocity and gravitational acceleration. I use the words, sense of force, when referring to the rockets engines only for your understanding as indeed the workings of a rocket engine can be reduced down to no more than motion. Although I do not wish to digress here and explain in fuller detail, it is sufficient to sow the seed.” At this point I felt compelled to interrupt Karaz-hu, as I was getting lost again and also wondered what he meant by sowing a seed.

“Please be patient!” He abruptly aborted my interruption. “Your presence with us is restricted and thus your comprehension will be limited. Others will have further seeds imparted as well as knowledge and now I must move on with my explanation of gravity.” My thoughts were rapidly triggered by his reply. I accepted that a lot of information that Karaz-hu would be imparting to me I would not understand and they had chosen me, for whatever reason, as a messenger. I also wondered what others would be abducted for the purpose of these Beings. I then sensed Karaz-hu had just about tolerated my thought processes because without waiting for a vocal reaction from me he quickly continued. “When standing on the surface of the Earth you feel a force attracting you to the centre of the Earth. The reason your senses tell you that you are not moving and there is a force on your body is because the ground under your feet is acting as a barrier, and prevents any progress towards the centre of the Earth. If it were not for the ground you would move to the centre of the Earth. Because you are standing on the ground does not mean you are in fact stationary, far from it. Now I know you are thinking this is a bit silly, but bear with me and I will explain further. You are no doubt aware of the sensation you have in an elevator, if it is rising fast you can detect the pressure or force on your feet by the floor of the elevator. But if it is falling rapidly you will experience a lightness of feeling with perhaps an uncomfortable feeling in your stomach. These are due to the effects of acceleration and deceleration. (Figure 15 shows a person undergoing acceleration in a lift).

Fig 15

If we take this a step further and imagine you are in a box similar to an elevator high above the surface of the Earth; in fact the box is in space but still within the influence of the Earth’s gravitational field. If the base or floor of the box is facing toward the Earth and the box is stationary with respect to the Earth’s surface your senses will detect a force holding you to the base of the box. This you will assume is natural and due to gravity. Should this box suddenly plummet towards the Earth as fast as falling objects accelerate towards the Earth (at an acceleration of 9.8 metres per second per second), then you will suddenly find you have no weight. If you push against the floor you will find yourself floating about in the box like a feather in the wind. (See figure 16). If the box plummeted towards the Earth with a far higher acceleration, then you would find yourself pressed

toward the inner surface of the box furthest from the Earth; that is, the ceiling of the box. I hope from this explanation you can see that from inside the box the sensations due to gravity (due to the Earth’s mass in this case) or acceleration are the same.

Fig 16

Taking this explanation a little further imagine you are in a stationary spaceship, with no means to see outside, far out in inter-galactic space and far from any gravitational body. Since the spaceship is at rest and there is no gravitational body to influence your environment, you will be in a state of weightlessness since weight is what you call the force with which a large mass pulls on an object. Thus you will find yourself bobbing and floating about the spaceship. Now when the spaceship starts to accelerate in the forward direction relative to the distant stars, you will find yourself pushed back towards the rear

of the spaceship. You will, in a sense, have a force of gravity. Now when the spacecraft decelerates, you will find yourself thrust forward in the same way that people are in any conveyance, which is speeding up or slowing down on Earth. When the spaceship comes to rest again you find yourself bobbing and floating about again. Your body and brain will tell you (from your everyday experience of motion) that the spacecraft was motionless initially, then it accelerated forward, then it slowed down again, then it stopped. To continue with this theme let us imagine you and a number of fellow space passengers are now travelling along in a spaceship with a constant velocity relative to the distant stars. Suddenly a stray and massive celestial body narrowly misses the rear of your spaceship, but inside the spaceship nobody is aware of the near miss, as there are no windows to look out. Now in view of what I have explained so far, what do you think the passengers will make of this event, if anything?” I nearly choked at this response from Karaz-hu and just looked at him searching for words. There was no reaction from Karaz-hu. Eventually I managed to stutter. “I guess they would not behave in any untoward way since they cannot see out of their spaceship.” Karaz-hu now responded by looking slightly irritated and chided me to pay better attention and to think about what I was saying. “No, you have not understood; the passengers will feel they are being pulled back into their seats as the celestial body passes them by. The mass of the body has, in your terms, imparted a force on them all; this force you call weight. But since they were not aware of the presence of the celestial body and since the effect is the same as if the spaceship had accelerated, all the passengers will assume the spaceship had accelerated and carry on with whatever they were doing before the event. Thus the passengers have no way of determining whether they are being subjected to a pull from a passing mass or undergoing acceleration. Now it is easy for your mind to comprehend that a spaceship experiencing acceleration is in motion and you will say, ‘yes it is obvious’. But when the spacecraft is subject to the effect of a gravitational field the concept of actual

motion is not apparent to you and your mind will reject such a seemingly preposterous idea.” I was not going to loose the opportunity to interrupt Karaz-hu on this point and blurted out. “That’s right, I cannot see that gravity is motion and it seems obvious to me that it is nothing more than a force. I certainly know its effects when I fall over. Just because acceleration and gravity had the same effect on the occupants in your imaginary spaceship does not prove they are the same thing.” A smile moved across the face of Karaz-hu and he countered. “I appreciate your dilemma but please be patient and I will explain further for you. Imagine you are standing on top of a high building. Your senses will tell you that you are not falling as within your frame of reference you are standing still with respect to the building and the ground below. This is an illusion as you still have gravitational motion and this only becomes obvious to you when you foolishly step of the building and hurtle to the ground below. Again, should you survive the fall; your senses will tell you that you are at rest again on the surface of the Earth. This again is an illusion and you still have gravitational motion toward the centre of the Earth and it is the ground that impedes your progress to the centre of the Earth.” I was going to interrupt Karaz-hu at this point as it appeared all nonsense to me but he quickly perceived my intention and continued. “I can understand your confusion but then you accept the illusion regarding the addition of velocities without challenge. You would claim that if you were travelling on a train at 60 kilometres per hour with respect to the ground. Then on throwing a stone out of the window with a velocity of 10 kilometres per hour in the direction the train was travelling, you would claim the resultant velocity of the stone would be 70 kilometres per hour with respect to the ground, would you not. This is not fully correct as Einstein has shown and the error only becomes apparent at velocities near the speed of light; within you frame of reference on Earth you can add the velocities and have a meaningful result. This same logic applies to gravitational motion. Thus returning to our earlier example of passengers in a spaceship being pulled back into their seats when a large body passes them by; your senses interpret this as a force

pushing you back into your seat but it is not! It is purely acceleration as a result of the nearby mass of the celestial body. The subtle difference is because of this additional motion (the acceleration) that pushes you back into your seat; it is not a magical force due to the mass of the body. Therefore when I refer to gravitational forces to you, it is purely for your cognition, as your mind will only relate to an understanding of what you deem a force to be. So, what is a force? Your scientists will not be able to explain it, as they do not understand the nature of force themselves. They know of only the effects, which is either a push or a pull produced by a something they call a force. They also postulate that forces always occur in pairs such that when you sit on a chair the weight of your body presses down on the chair. At the same time an equal upward force from the chair balances this downward force. By the same token your physicists do not know what gravity actually is and can only claim that it some kind of pulling force inherent to all masses. Do you not see the irony of this? Now I must push on and I wish I had more time to dwell on the matter with you suffice to inform you that on other encounters between us and Mortals a more detailed explanation will be given.” Well what could I say or do as his whole explanation was beyond me and seemed a total nonsense. I was in no position to argue the point given my understanding of the subject matter and it seemed futile to push him any further. Therefore I deemed it prudent to let the matter go especially in view of the fact that he had volunteered that others would be contacted and have seeds implanted and that they would also be given knowledge. Also I had accepted the fact that the predominant part of my role would be that of a messenger. Karaz-hu again allowed a little time for my thought processes before continuing. “I will now elaborate on the mechanism of your ocean tides as a means to differentiate between tidal gravity and direct gravitational forces. From this you will hopefully begin to understand not only the true nature of gravity and its effects, but also the mechanism behind the ocean tides on Earth.” As was his style, Karaz-hu suddenly stopped and threw a question at me. “Tell me how you think the tides

are generated on your planet?” Surprisingly, this time I was ready for him and replied. “It is the pull of the Moon on the Earth that is responsible for the tides and I know that when the Moon and the Sun are in line with the Earth, we have the spring tides and I know that when the Moon is at right angles to the Earth and the Sun, we have the neap tides.” I gave Karaz-hu a triumphant look, as I was secretly pleased with my explanation and being able to expound it without any hesitation. “Are you saying that it is the direct pull of the Moon and Sun on the waters of the Earth that is responsible for the tides?” he queried. “Well of course!” I quickly replied and reiterated. “That is the very reason for the spring tides, when the Sun and Moon are in direct line with the Earth and it is the combined effect of their gravity. Also when the Moon is at right angles to the Earth and the Sun the gravitational effect is not so great so then we have the neap tides.” Karaz-hu put his hand up to stop me saying any more and soon turned my short-lived triumph into a bit of a disaster. “I am sorry but your account is in error as the tides are not the result of a direct pull from either the Moon or the Sun, but are the result of the Earth falling toward the Moon and to a lesser extent of the Earth and Moon system falling toward the Sun.” The look on my face triggered a pause in his dialogue and he massaged my ego by saying. “Do not feel deflated since many Mortals would have replied in the same manner. Only the more educated and enlightened of your species would be aware to the true nature of the tides. Now relax, look at the wall and I will enlighten you. However before doing so you should be aware that the study and understanding of ocean movements and the theory of tides is a very complex subject. The variation of the seashores, channels, estuaries, shelving of beaches, ocean currents and size of the ocean all play their part. For example there is a very marked difference in tides of the Mediterranean and that of Mont St Michel Bay, Northern France. Thus you must understand that the ‘ultimate’ and ‘actual’ behaviour of the tides lies not in the province of astronomy but in that of hydrography and physical geography. Nevertheless there is a fundamental mechanism behind all these complexities and it is that which we will explore.”

Suddenly an image of the Earth and the Moon appeared on what I assumed had been a hidden screen and set in what I perceived as a wall, thus he began his explanation.” (I have reproduced the image, see figure 17). “You can see from the image the ocean around the Earth bulges out on the side nearest to the Moon making a high tide. Whilst at the same time on the other side of the Earth away from the Moon the oceans bulge out making another high tide. At both points halfway between the high tides the Earth experiences low tides. Now it is important to note it is the difference in the way the Moon’s gravity exerts its pull on different parts of the Earth and not the influence of the direct gravity itself, which causes this stretching and squeezing of the oceans. Looking at the image the first question to ask is why do the oceans bulge out on the side of the Earth ‘furthest’ from the influence of the Moon’s gravity? The quick answer is that it is due to the effects of tidal gravity and not due to the direct pull of gravity. To understand how all this works it is necessary to examine not only the direct pull of gravity and tidal gravity in more detail, but also the effects of free fall and the true motions of the Earth and Moon relationship.

Fig 17

You must also appreciate that most people will say that as the Earth orbits about the Sun, the Moon orbits about the Earth. In effect they see the Earth as being stationary with regard to the Moon, with the Moon orbiting about the Earth. Whilst this can be said to be partly true, the correct explanation is that the Earth and Moon actually orbit each other.” Karaz-hu paused at this point due to the expression on my face. “Please be patient he counselled and listen to my explanation.” Without further ado he continued. “It will be easier for you to comprehend my explanation if we examine the motion of celestial bodies and as an example we will consider binary stars; that is stars that orbit one another. Binary stars orbit about their common centre of mass, which in astronomical terms is known as the barycentre. As most celestial bodies are symmetrical in that they are spheroid, the centre of mass is at the geometric centre of the body. Thus a freely rotating body will always rotate about an axis passing through its centre of mass. Now two or more bodies such as a multiple star system or a star and its accompanying planets, will have a common centre of mass known, as I mentioned before, as the barycentre. It is easy to see how all this works by looking at the image on the wall.” At this point the image of the Earth and tides changed to a diagram showing two celestial bodies illustrating the barycentre. (See figure 18).

Fig 18

Karaz-hu continued. “From the image we can see that if two stars of the same mass are gravitationally linked then they will orbit equally about their common centre of mass. If one of the stars is greater than the other, then the common centre of mass is shifted towards the more massive star. If one of the stars is sufficiently massive enough then the common centre of mass will reside within the larger star. Now this is exactly the situation with the Earth and the Moon. The Earth’s mass is far greater than the Moon; indeed it is 81 times as more massive. So the centre of mass for the Earth, Moon system lies within the Earth itself. Thus the Moon’s orbit is far more obvious and observable about the barycentre than that of the Earth. It is essential that you keep all this in mind whilst I explain how the gravity of the Sun and the Moon affect the Earth.” “I will do my best.” I interrupted. “Good!” Replied Karaz-hu and he quickly continued. “The Sun as you know is very much larger and more massive than the Moon but it is also very much further away than the Moon. As such the Sun’s gravity is strong enough to keep not only the Earth in orbit but all the other planets as well and stop them flying off into space. Although it is very important to realise fully the effect distance has on the force of gravity. When the Sun passes directly overhead during the day your weight does not alter to that of nighttime and this is because the Sun is very much further away from your body than the effect of the Earth’s gravity, which is just under your feet so to speak. Now if the ocean tides were as a consequence of the direct gravitational pull of the Moon, then it would be logical for you to think that the oceans would bulge mostly on the side of the Earth facing the Moon - with only a slight bulge on the opposite side of the Earth this being due to inertia of the oceans and the influence of the Sun.” The image on the wall had now changed to that as shown in figure 19. He continued. “But you know this is not so as the oceans bulge on both sides of the globe, (see figure 17). Now I need to digress slightly and explain how gravitational strength diminishes inversely as the square of the distance.”

I interrupted Karaz-hu at this juncture saying. “I think I am following you so far, but I am not clear to what you mean by the gravitational strength diminishing inversely as the square of the distance? So I would welcome your explanation and I am wondering how this ties in with your explanation of the tides?” Karaz-hu nodded and smiled knowingly. “Your question testifies that you are paying close attention which is very pleasing and I will be happy to oblige.”

Fig 19

As if on cue another image of the Earth appeared again on what I assumed was the hidden screen within the wall and he continued. “To understand and have a feel to how distance affects gravity we now need to exercise our imagination and carry out another thought experiment. Imagine we have managed to shrink the Earth down to a quarter of its original size. (See figure 20).

Radius out in space where the surface of the Earth was prior to being squeezed to a quarter of its original size.

Fig 20 It must be carefully noted that we still maintain the same mass, but of course it is contained in a much smaller space. Before shrinking the Earth we placed a lump of iron on a suitable weighing machine and found that it weighed 100 kilogrammes. We also weighed ourselves on the same scales and found our weight was 80 kilogrammes. Now after having shrunk the Earth to a quarter of its original size, it was noticeable that the lump of iron now weighed 1600 kilogrammes and our weight had shot up to 1280 kilogrammes - but what does all this signify?

The mean radius of the Earth is 6,371 kilometres (3,959 miles), so by shrinking it to a quarter of its original size we end up with a new radius of 1593 kilometres, with the difference being 4778 kilometres. We have the same mass but now it is squeezed into a far much smaller space. If we now take the lump of iron and the weighing scales to the point above the Earth where the surface used to be prior to its squeezing we will find our weight and that of the lump of iron have returned to their original value of 100 and 80 kilogrammes respectively. Now the important point to note is the magnitude of the difference between the weights. It is not a linear relationship, where for example, the weight alters 10 kilogrammes for every 20 kilometres; but differs significantly with distance, indeed, inversely proportional to the square of the distance between the mass of the Earth and the mass of the lump of iron and yourself. (See Appendix Six). I hope this thought experiment has clearly shown not only how the influence of gravity diminishes with distance, but more importantly, by how much. Also, hopefully, you can now fully appreciate the significance that although the Sun is many times more massive than the Moon it is much more distant from the Earth than the Moon, 149,573,881 kilometres (92,960,117 miles), compared to 384,400 kilometres (238,866 miles); and how this influences their respective gravitational forces. It should be noted that the Moon is nearly 400 times nearer the Earth than the Sun.” Karaz-hu looked at me and asked. “Do you now understand how distance has a profound influence on the effects of gravity?” Slowly and thoughtfully I said. “Yes, thank you, I think I can appreciate how the effects of gravity would quickly diminish in moving away from a body such as the Earth.” Karaz-hu looked relieved replying. “Good, that is pleasing to know, but now I must continue my explanation of your ocean tides and to understand this a bit further we need to look at the meaning of free fall.” “Oh! Good grief!” I thought to myself, “When is he going to explain about the tides, with all these digressions I am becoming very confused!” Karaz-hu quickly interrupted my thoughts. “Please be

patient, it is necessary for you to know these things if you are to fully understand my explanation of the tides.” Before I could reply he was in full throttle again. “Imagine you are standing on the top of a cliff and you throw a ball horizontally out in front of you. The ball will travel a short distance dependent on how hard you threw the ball before falling into the sea. If it were not for gravity the ball would continue to follow a straightline path away from you and disappear into space. Now independent of the speed of which the ball is thrown, after one second the ball due to the Earth’s gravity, will have fallen nearly five metres. It is important to grasp the fact that no matter how hard the ball is thrown (within the limits of Human strength) forward it will drop the same amount in the same time, although the ball will have travelled further in the horizontal direction. This is the basis of satellite motion - an Earth satellite is basically an object that continually falls around the Earth rather than into it - the velocity of the satellite must be great enough to ensure that its falling distance matches the curvature of the Earth. In other words the satellite is continually falling into the Earth and is in a state commonly known as ‘free fall’. The Earth’s surface drops a vertical distance of about 5 metres for every 8 kilometres tangent to the surface which means that if you were in a boat floating on a calm sea you would only be able to see the top of a 5 metre mast on a yacht 8 kilometres away. Thus if our ball could be thrown fast enough to travel a horizontal distance of 8 kilometres in one second then it would follow the curvature of the Earth. Unfortunately due to air resistance the ball would be burnt to a crisp, as the ball would be travelling at nearly 29,000 kilometres per hour (18,000 miles per hour) - this is why Earth satellites orbit so high, to escape the friction of the Earth’s atmosphere. Thus if we neglect the Earth’s atmosphere an object thrown with sufficient force in a horizontal direction will continue to fall around the Earth in a state of ‘free fall’ and will orbit indefinitely. It is important to realise that in free fall you do not experience the effects of gravity and that is why you see pictures of astronauts floating about in their spacecraft when in orbit about the Earth. The reason for this is that the acceleration of the spacecraft falling around the Earth exactly

cancels out the effects of the Earth’s gravity and the result is weightlessness.” At this point Karaz-hu asked whether I had followed and understood his explanation of free fall. “Yes! I can see how falling around the Earth can cancel out the effects of gravity and I now understand how astronauts float inside their space capsules,” I replied, “but I do not see how all this is related to the Earth’s ocean tides?” Karaz-hu interrupted. “Patience, I will now bring all these aspects together and explain the mechanism of the tides for you.” Karaz-hu then paused for a moment before he continued. “The Moon does not simply orbit around the Earth in space. These two celestial bodies actually rotate about their common centre of mass as I have explained to you earlier. It is very important for you to appreciate this fact as the Earth and the Moon are in free fall orbit around each other or to be more precise, around their common centre of mass. I will reiterate that it very important that you understand this before I continue?” Karaz-hu paused and I sensed it was my turn to either confirm or otherwise. Nodding my head I replied. “Yes, I am pretty certain that I have followed your explanation so far and now understand the true motions of the Earth and Moon relationship.” “That is excellent,” Karaz-hu beamed at me, “so I will continue. A person on the surface of the Earth cannot directly experience the pull of the Moon’s gravity any more than a person on the surface of the Moon can feel the direct pull of the Earth’s gravity. Another way of looking at this is to consider the Sun. You are aware of how massive the Sun is but you do not detect any change in its gravitational effect when it passes directly overhead at noon as opposed to its setting or at night, when its gravitational pull is effectively then underfoot. You should also recognise that if you were standing on the surface of Mercury, which is very much nearer the Sun than the Earth - the gravitational pull of the Sun would not affect your respective weight the gravitational mass of Mercury would prevail.” It was my turn to interrupt Karaz-hu for a change. “I am sorry but I do not see how this affects the Earth’s tides?” “Be patient, please!” Karaz-hu halted my interruption. “Please allow me to continue and you will soon be enlightened.” Without waiting for a response he

continued. “I have said that gravity is responsible for the tides and that is correct although it is not the direct effect of gravity that is responsible. I have explained that the Earth and the Moon are in free fall about their common centre of mass. This means the Earth’s oceans are also free fall, falling towards the Moon. Before the 17th Century, sailors although knowing there was a connection between the ocean tides and the Moon, could not offer a satisfactory explanation as to the cause of the tides. It was not until Isaac Newton showed that the ocean tides are caused by the differences in the gravitational pull between the Moon and the Earth on the opposite sides of the Earth. It is very important to recognise that it is a mistake to think that the Earth is at rest and the Moon accelerates as it orbits around the Earth. As I have stressed the Earth is falling around the Moon in free fall. It is the gravitational pull of the Earth that stops the Moon flying off tangentially into space. Indeed as we have already said the Earth is falling toward the Moon with a centripetal acceleration. Both the Earth and the Moon orbit about their common centre of gravity known as the barycentre. The Earth and the Moon both experience centripetal acceleration as they circle each other about the EarthMoon centre of gravity. Thus in understanding how differences in the gravitational pull between the Moon and the Earth behave on the opposite sides of the Earth imagine a large spherical ball of plasticine experiencing the same force of attraction on every part of the ball as it accelerates. Under these conditions the ball would retain its spherical shape as it accelerates as the same forces act on each part of the ball. But if different forces were to act on different parts of the ball then it would not retain its spherical shape and it would become distorted. Under centripetal acceleration the ball would become more oblate. Now this is exactly what happens to the ‘ball’ you call the Earth’. The Earth is falling toward the Moon with centripetal acceleration, which means the Earth experiences different gravitational forces. The centripetal acceleration is greater for the sides of the Earth and the Moon nearest each other than for the far sides, so both the Earth

and the Moon become slightly elongated, with the oceans experiencing the greatest elongation. It should be clearly recognised that this centripetal acceleration causes the oceans to be ‘squashed’ towards the surface of the Earth at points on the Earth’s surface at right angles to the Moon. This ‘squeezing’ of the oceans contributes to the bulge on either side of the Earth facing toward and away from the Moon. Thus the ocean tides are not as a consequence of direct gravitational forces, but due to the forces of tidal gravity.” My response was slow in coming as my mind was still grappling with his in-depth explanation. “I think I can understand what you have explained but I really need some time to think it all through again. Listening to you it sounds very plausible, but if I had to repeat the information to somebody else, I think I would unfortunately get into difficulty very quickly and confuse not only myself but the other person as well.” With some slight trepidation I waited for Karaz-hu’s response. “Do not worry, the detail will return to your conscious memory when the time is right.” “Good grief!” What on Earth does he mean when the time was right?” I quietly muttered to myself. “You will know when the time comes,” Karaz-hu interrupted my mutterings. “Now I must continue and before you leave us I wish to change the subject completely and impress upon you the individual uniqueness of a Human being. Each and every one of you is quite unique, even identical twins are far from being identical. Their physical appearances may seem similar but you will find on closer scrutiny there are differences. One twin may have a slightly larger face than the other twin for example. Emotionally and intellectually they will differ as well. One twin might always be smiling whilst the other is predominantly serious. The unique differences are infinite and although the basic blueprint for a Mortal calls for the provision of two legs, arms, eyes, ears, a nose et cetera it is the different dimensions of the arms and the legs, and the size and shape of the nose, the colour of the eyes et cetera that give everybody their own unique physical individuality; additionally environment, nutrition, schooling et cetera all play their part.

When you purchase a packet of lettuce seeds and sow them in the ground you will expect lettuces to grow, not cabbages or carrots. There is a basic blue print. What you do not know (even if the seeds are apparently identical) is how big and of what quality the lettuce will grow? The size and quality of the lettuce will depend upon a number of variables such as the goodness of the soil, its drainage, fertility and also the weather. Will the growing season be dry and warm or wet and cold, or a combination of these possibilities? What soil and air bound pest will the lettuce have to tolerate; will it be a good year for slugs? It is easy to see from this simple example that a lettuce will not grow exactly identical in shape and size. Every lettuce will be unique due to the numerous variables with which each will have to cope with during its life span. Now think of all the variables a Human being has to contend with during its physical and mental growth, and you will begin to appreciate how unique each person is. You may not fully comprehend the full meaning of the statement that Mortals have their own space in your Universe. A person may move from one corner of a room to another but they continue to displace their own space. On the face of this you may say it is obvious and of course I will take up space, if I did not, I would not be here. The significance of the statement is that it is your space and no other persons or objects. Nothing can take your space; if it did they would become you. Do not become confused on this point, when I say they would become you, I am making reference to all your atoms as each would need to be replaced exactly in your space. Everything is unique in this respect and occupies its own space. On the universal scale of things, this is significant, for there is not an infinite amount of space in your Universe and everything has its place.” Karaz-hu sat back and looked at me. “I consider you have had enough for this session and before your return to the surface of your planet perhaps you would care to look at the Earth and contemplate for a while…yes, we have been in Earth orbit for the duration of this session. I will leave you to ponder over the various things I have revealed to you and at the same time you may care to reflect on the

beauty of your planet and what your kind are doing to it, you will clearly see the signs. However before I leave you should be fully aware of one of the greatest delusions that Mankind suffers from. This is the notion that currently Mortals have the ability to bring about World peace and prosperity. I use the word currently as your kind does have the intellectual potential to achieve this aim. But unfortunately due to the nature of Human evolution and the lack of positive responses to our seeding of Mortal minds this goal will not, at present, be realised. Your kind has not achieved the full extent of the brain’s capability. Mankind’s existing brain function inhibits the prospect of any solution at the moment. Thus unless there is a radical change in the workings of the brain, you will find it very disturbing to know that it will not happen by current Human endeavours unless change takes place. The only other prospect capable of bringing about World prosperity and peace is by the intervention of an external and omnipotent power capable of enforcing and sustaining this goal. Analysis of the global situation and recorded World history identifies the bloody and tortuous path Mortals have trod. From this evidence you will appreciate that it is inconceivable for the Human race to possibly act in any other fashion. Indeed, in many of your cultures, your kind cannot even co-exist in harmony with one another. You have inconceivable differences and will not tolerate others who cannot understand your way of life. Consider your own culture and look at the numerous trivial disputes neighbours have with each other. It is very difficult to see them as adults, but only as arrogant, spoilt, self-centred children with over inflated egos. Mortals, in varying degrees, all suffer from these negative traits so what chance is there for World peace? If neighbours sharing the same racial attributes and local social conditioning cannot get on with one another what chance do people of different race, of different skin colouring, language, religion and local conditioning have to live in harmony? It does not take a genius to foresee that the day of reckoning is fast approaching for the Human race.

It may seem an obvious statement that Mortals are not perfect. But what may not be quite so obvious is that most people are easily deluded. It is because of this condition they are incapable of creating perfection. This is why the League of Nations and the United Nations have failed. All Human endeavours are ultimately doomed to failure. I repeat that unless there is a total culture change Mankind is headed for the abyss. The waters of the Earth have become polluted and water is the essence of life; you live on a water dependent planet, indeed all creatures and plants consist predominantly of water. The Earth is finite and although there are many self-cleaning mechanisms that operate within nature there is a limit! Look at your rivers and lakes, the seas and oceans. How pure are their waters? How many organisms have been rendered extinct? There are many more heading toward extinction - all as a result of the direct or indirect involvement of Mortals. It is a sorry record.” At this point in his dialogue I had to interrupt Karaz-hu asking. “I do not fully comprehend the implications of what you have been saying about the uniqueness of man, the space we take up in the Universe and the day of reckoning for Mankind?” Karaz-hu countered and brushing aside my question stated. “Your Universe is a Virtual Reality Universe as you have been told and I differentiate from our reality by using the term ‘your Universe’. Beyond your Universe, as you have also been told, there is an existence completely beyond your comprehension and it would be hopeless for me to try and elaborate.” I could not fully explain my reaction but I felt a mixture of frustration and foolishness for my interruption and tried to control a blush as I gestured for Karaz-hu to continue. I could see a wry smile creep across his face as he continued his dialogue, albeit in a slightly different vein. “It was not that long ago your astronomers considered the Milky Way Galaxy as the whole and complete Universe and then they discovered there were many more galaxies in the Cosmos. Not only that, but they discovered galaxies themselves tended to gather in groups in the way, although not quite the same, that stars gather

together in galaxies. Your own galaxy is a member of a small group of about 30 galaxies and is called the Local Group by your astronomers. There are much larger groups containing as many as a thousand or more galaxies. Further, your cosmologists have discovered that galactic groups tend to cluster together, and these in turn belong to Superclusters. It is beyond the Superclusters that the Universe you identify with eventually ends. But does all this really matter to you? For all practical purposes the answer is no! Anymore than knowing that although the Earth actually rotates about its axis, you have no sensation of movement. Indeed the Sun and Moon give the illusion that they move across the heavens whilst the Earth stands still. Many people may opine that it is academic as it does not affect their every day existence as to what really turns around what! The answer is you do not necessarily need to know of these things for your day-to-day existence anymore than the lowest species on your planet. The Human race as a priority should be channelling all of its thoughts and energies to your Earth sciences, improving the environment and the quality of life. It is no good arguing that a good understanding of the heavens could help to maintain life on your planet. For example, the knowledge of a globally life-threatening asteroid or comet is somewhat meaningless at your level of technology. Even if you were aware of a catastrophic impending collision there is very little your kind could do to prevent it. Indeed it would be better that you did not know of the impending disaster. But surpassing all these arguments we, to a degree, control activities within your Universe and should we wish to, have dominion over events. Now! Will you please follow me!” Inexplicably this sudden, abrupt end to his dialogue did not really surprise me and I obediently followed Karaz-hu to another part of the spacecraft. I cannot describe the areas of the spacecraft that we passed through! All I could perceive were various colours, lights and streaks - although I was sure I could discern a kind of meshed or grid like pattern to the floor? My peripheral vision indicated that I was walking through some kind of a tube or perhaps a better description would be a tunnelled

hallway? My brain was telling me the tunnelled walls were enveloped in various colours and I sensed the meshed pattern on the floor extended to the walls of the tunnelled hallway. I knew my brain was struggling to identify what it thought it was seeing. It quickly occurred to me the reason why Karaz-hu had taken so much trouble in explaining the functioning of the Human eye and brain, various illusions and the way in which Human’s perceive the World around them. My brain was obviously being confronted with images it had never experienced before and was at a complete loss in trying to make any sense of it all; although it was comforting in a way to realise what was happening in my brain. I guess that Karaz-hu knew that this would certainly help me to surpass any feeling of anxiety or panic in this strange and esoteric environment. Eventually we came to an area what I can only describe as resembling a room? When I looked around my vision hinted at some kind of wall that was not too far away and appeared to completely surround us? I was still attempting to make some sense out of the surroundings when Karaz-hu beckoned me to sit down on the floor. I did as he requested and amazingly as my gaze fell directly on the floor it suddenly became transparent and unbelievably I could see the Earth below me. This, as you can imagine, took my breath away! It was not so much as the floor becoming suddenly transparent, but because of the beauty of the Earth below me. I could clearly make out through the clouds the shape of West Africa, the Atlantic Ocean and the east coast of South America - the colours were truly amazing and left me speechless. At this point Karaz-hu interrupted my thoughts and slowly said. “I will now leave you to contemplate the surface of your planet and to mull over the many things I have told you. In 36 orbits of your planet you will be returned to the surface.” With that Karaz-hu disappeared to another part of the spacecraft leaving me alone to gaze out on the beautiful Earth below and to ponder on his many revelations. I had to admit my head was in a whirl and I really did not know what to think

about, except the beauty of the Earth below that kept me wondering about the future of Mankind. How long I sat looking at the Earth accompanied by my thoughts I really could not say, whether it was a couple of minutes or an hour - I just did not know - all I can remember is that suddenly and inexplicably I felt very drowsy and found I was soon surrendering to the comforting cloak of sleep. The next thing that I was aware of was sitting up in bed sweating profusely, breathing heavily with my brain racing like an express train! I knew I would not have any peace of mind and would experience a continuing tortuous compulsion until I had committed this latest episode to paper.

TIME TRAVEL

And Hezekiah said unto Isaiah, What shall be the sign that the Lord will heal me, and that I shall go up into the house of the Lord the third day? And Isaiah said, This sign shalt thou have of the Lord, that the Lord will do the thing that he hath spoken; shall the shadow go forward ten degrees, or go back ten degrees? And Hezekiah answered, it is a light thing for the shadow to go down ten degrees: nay, but let the shadow return backward ten degrees. And Isaiah the prophet cried unto the Lord: and he brought the shadow ten degrees backward, by which it had gone down in the dial of Ahaz. 11 Kings 20:8 - 11

Again and frustratingly I have no recollection of how I was transported aboard the Alien spacecraft, my only memory (dream) of this latest episode began as follows: What prompted me to ask about time travel in particular was motivated by two lines of thought! One was to simply satisfy the curiosity that had been fired in my previous encounter with the Aliens; Karaz-hu had said that time travel into the past was impossible. Yet he acknowledged that travel into the future was possible; thus I was more than keen on his enlightenment. The other was due to the fact that I reasoned that if I could return and explain the mysteries of time travel, then people would sit up and listen. More importantly my claim of being abducted by Aliens would have far more credibility and would be more readily accepted - or so I reasoned at the time! Perhaps the Aliens had influenced my thinking?

“Time is motion or motion is time!” declared Karaz-hu. “You asked about time travel but first you have to appreciate exactly what you mean by time. It is justifiable to use the word ‘time’ as long as you are very clear as to what you understand by it. Mankind does not have a clear understanding of space and time and that is where the problem lies. I have already given you an insight into the many illusions suffered by Mortals. Authors such as H.G.Wells had it totally wrong in suggesting a person could actually travel back to the past, then travel into the future and then back into time again. This was because his understanding of time was erroneous. Do not misunderstand my meaning, as it is possible to experience time travel. But before I can explain further it will be necessary to elucidate on the true nature of time.” Karaz-hu paused as if to give me breathing space so I could understand clearly what he was trying to say to me. Carefully looking at me he continued. “I can accept that you are just as misguided as most of the others on your planet. You will just have to be patient. It is necessary for me to educate you on the true nature of space and time before I can explain the possible methods of time travel. I make no apology in labouring this point, as it is absolutely necessary! You must understand it!” I could feel myself nodding my head in agreement as I made myself comfortable on one of the couches that had been arranged around the room. Again I use the term room for the want of something better as although there did not seem to be any solid walls enclosing the room, there appeared to be walls, if that makes any sense. You could look toward what your brain was telling you appeared to be a wall, and yet you could look beyond; that’s if you really focused your mind. Most of the time all I could see was what I thought to be a wall. The occupants of the space vehicle appeared to portray a slight amusement at my bewilderment. This in turn often left me with an uncomfortable feeling of embarrassment. Karaz-hu sat opposite me on another couch and appeared completely at ease. I noticed the illumination to the room had increased slightly and the temperature had dropped. Could this be Karaz-hu’s way of ensuring an alert listener? I sensed this was not

going to be a short session. He began, “I was going to start by saying that I feel I do not have explain to you what a year is. However on reflection I think it will be necessary and it is a good place to start. On your planet the Gregorian calendar is fundamentally based on the duration the Earth takes to make one full orbit of your star, the Sun. The completion of one orbit of your planet around the Sun is called a year. Now you have to recognise the word year means just that and only that. It is the period that the finite mass in space, which you call the Earth, takes to make one orbit of your Sun. In other words you are measuring motion and it is fundamental to the understanding of what you regard as time for you to realise that you cannot have motion without space and you cannot have matter without space, indeed, matter itself takes up space. You have to fully understand that everything in your Universe you know has motion from the vibration of atoms to the swirling of galaxies. Without motion nothing exists in your known Universe. Mankind lives in a perceived three-dimensional Universe with objects having length, width and depth. For an object to have reality it obviously must consist of matter and exist in space. All matter consists of atoms, remembering that atoms and their constituent particles vibrate. An object can therefore, without taking any other factors into consideration, be defined as having inherent motion and will therefore exist in both time and space. You live in a perceived three-dimensional Universe with objects having length, width and depth. (See figure 21). These dimensions are quantifiable and can be measured such as a cube having sides of 20 centimetres, a house standing 10 metres tall, or a stretch of road 20 kilometres long. You Earthlings speak about objects existing in space-time; meaning that you really live in a four dimensional Universe consisting of time and the other three physical dimensions that you see around you in your normal lives. Therefore you all live in a space-time continuum; each object, be it a living entity, a planet, a star or galaxy exists in a ‘space-time continuum’. But what is this fourth dimension called time?

Remember all motion is relative, you are always comparing one set of motions to another set of motions, for example, when you look at a clock face you are comparing the movements of the hands to other motions. The duration it takes for the large hand to move through the 360 degrees on a clock face you call an hour. The hour, it can be argued, is derived ultimately from the time it takes the Earth to revolve once around the Sun. The hour is subdivided down into 60 divisions you call minutes; the minute is further subdivided down into 60 divisions that you call seconds. (See simplistic summary, Table 41). When you look at a clock at the end of a day and state the Sun will set in an hour what you are actually doing is comparing the movement of the main spring as it unwinds which imparts movement to all the associated cogs, escapement et cetera, and finally the movement of the hands to that of the apparent motion (duration) of the setting Sun. Table 4-1

1 ORBIT OF THE SUN

1 YEAR

12 MONTHS 1 MONTH 4 WEEKS 1 WEEK 7 DAYS 1 DAY 24 HOURS 1 HOUR 60 MINUTES 1 MINUTE 60 SECONDS There is no such thing as absolute time and no meaning to the question - will the Universe cease to exist in time? Your concept of time applies to events and things within your known Universe. You must appreciate that time is an integral part of the known Universe as indeed is space and matter - beyond your known Universe there is no space or matter, as you understand them. Indeed there is no time! Thus there is also no meaning to the question - what was happening before the Universe was created?” At this point I was wondering when Karaz-hu was going to stop to take breath, but such was his apparent enthusiasm, it would be like trying to stop a charging bull! “Do you understand what I am saying to you?” Karaz-hu enquired as he interrupted my thoughts. “Yes, I think so.’’ I hesitantly replied. Feeling somewhat mortified and ineffectual as I sensed he had read my mind, I hesitantly asked him to continue.

Karaz-hu gazed steadily at me with eyes that seemed to search my soul, and then in a very soft and controlled manner said. “You must concentrate and be patient with me as it is very important for you to fully understand the information I will be explaining to you if you are going to fully appreciate how time travel can be achieved.” Taking a deep breath I nodded my agreement and with that Karaz-hu continued. “On Earth before clocks were invented Humans measured their concept of time by either the cycles of the Sun or the Moon. This was necessary because of the seasons, which were, of course, very important to the very existence of early Man. Earth seasons vary throughout the year with the more temperate areas in both northern and southern hemispheres experiencing spring, summer, autumn and winter. In the equatorial and tropical zones, the seasons being divided usually into those periods which are rainy or dry; at the poles there are only two seasons and they are either winter or summer. It was soon recognised that both time of the day and the seasons could be observed by use of a shadow stick, also known as the gnomon. By watching the shadow thrown by the gnomon they could see it change direction and grow gradually shorter from Sunrise to noon, and then still changing direction, gradually lengthening towards Sunset. They also observed that at the solstices there was a marked difference in the maximum length of shadow cast. At the summer solstice, when the Sun was at it highest point in the sky, the shadow cast was at its shortest. Whilst at the winter solstice, when the Sun was at its lowest point in the sky, the shadow cast was at its longest. In the northern hemisphere the direction of the shadow at noon points north; having identified where north lies, the other points of the compass may be easily determined. In the southern hemisphere the direction of the shadow obviously points south, and again by applying the same principle once having identified where south is the other cardinal points may be plotted. It was a short step from the gnomon to the first primitive Sundial. You must fully appreciate that clocks and especially watches are a relatively recent innovation. A general knowledge of timekeeping for ordinary people hardly goes back two hundred years as their way of

life had little or no need of it. Country folk, as a rule, worked from ‘Sun up’ to ‘Sun down’. The Romans as far back as 500 B.C. only had Sunrise and Sunset announced by a public crier, and it was not till 159 B.C. that the hours of daylight were identified for the Roman Public. The word clock is derived from clocca, which is Latin for a bell and your history shows that the very earliest mechanical clocks were weight driven and did not have hands, but struck a bell every hour. Indeed the custom of dividing the day into twenty-four hours did not materialise until the 17th century. The Saxons, for example, divided the day into ‘tides’, hence the terms ‘morningtide’, ‘noontide’, and ‘eventide’ - a Sundial marked in tides is still to be found at the tiny St Gregory’s Minster at Kirkdale in Yorkshire, England. Turning our attention to your present day calendar do you fully recognise exactly what it means and how it was derived?” At this point Karaz-hu broke of his narration and was I glad! My head had started to spin as I tried to absorb and remember all the information Karaz-hu was relating to me. No doubt he understood the limitations of my education and he obviously perceived that his presence triggered a certain amount of consternation within me as he thoughtfully offered me liquid refreshment. I did not decline and received it gratefully, not even questioning what it may consist of, or giving any thought to its taste. Perhaps it was just as well for I downed the contents of the receptacle fairly quickly noting that it tasted no more sinister than a cooled pineapple juice. I was just about to ask Karaz-hu, who was also enjoying liquid refreshment and which I assumed to be the same as mine, what it was that I had just drunk when he quickly offered. “Yes! it was pineapple juice from your very own planet, and a very pleasant drink and tasting experience!” I just sat there with my mouth wide open! He had read my thoughts again and I felt slightly foolish. What had I expected, the juice extracted from some awful Alien bug? A thin smile appeared across Karaz-hu’s lips before he asked if he could continue. By this time my head had stopped spinning and I was feeling settled again, so I nodded in agreement.

“I do not expect you to remember every detail at this moment,” Karaz-hu continued. “Your brain will absorb and retain all the information and it will come to you when the time is right. Now it is important for you to recognise that no matter how complicated a calendar may appear, at the end of the day it is nothing more than a measurement, or more specifically a measurement of motion.” Karaz-hu hesitated for a moment and to my astonishment said. “Please excuse the pun.” Hesitating again before he finally added, grinning. “Yes, at the end of the day, it is no more than a measurement of motion.” “Good grief!” I thought to myself, “Do Aliens have a sense of humour or was it done purely for my benefit?” My train of thought was quickly interrupted as Karaz-hu with a smile on his face but determination in his voice intervened. “Please do not allow your mind to wander for I must continue. The calendar you use today is, as you should be aware, known as the Gregorian calendar. It was introduced in Europe in 1582 by Pope Gregory X111 but was not adopted by England and its colonies till 1752. Prior to this your New Years Day was observed on March 25th and not the 1st of January. The Gregorian calendar consists of 365.2422 days and is relatively accurate having an error of 26 seconds per year. It was, and still is an improvement on a number of previous Roman calendars the first being implemented by King Romulus the founder of Rome round about 738 B.C. This calendar consisted of 10 months with a year of 304 days; the first month was called Martius after Mars, the God of war and having 31 days. The next month was Aprilis from the Latin aperire; meaning ‘to open’ inferring the opening of flowers, buds et cetera and consisted of 30 days. The following month was called Maius from Maia, the Goddess of growth consisting of 31 days. The fourth month was Junius, from the Latin juvenis meaning youth and had 30 days. Numbers were attributed to the remaining months of the year as follows, Quintilis meaning the fifth month and consisting of 31 days, Sextilis (sixth) having 30 days, Septembris (seventh), 31 days, Octobris (eighth), 30 days, Novembris (ninth), 31 days and Decembris (tenth), 29 days.

Replacing the calendar of Romulus was the Numa calendar after King Numa Pompilius (713 B.C.) which was based on Lunar cycles and introduced two new months, namely Januarius, after Janus, guardian of the heavens and protector of gateways, symbolising the beginning - this month consisted of 29 days and was placed at the beginning of the year. The other new month was Februarius, meaning repentance, a period when sacrifices were to be made to the Gods for offences committed during the year - this month became the last month of the year (after December) and consisted of 28 days. Again this calendar started the year at the vernal equinox but only had 355 days, which meant that 10 days were lost every year - making the vernal equinox appear earlier year after year. To overcome this dilemma an extra month called Mercedonius was introduced into the calendar every other year. The Council of Decemvirs, under Appius Claudius (450 B.C.), appointed the keeping of the calendar to the Pontifical College, at the same time altering the placement of February and placing it between January and March thereby making the year end with December. The Julian calendar (47 B.C.) was instigated by Julius Caesar who instructed the Alexandrian astronomer Sosigenes to carry out the task. Caesar also changed the name of the month Quintilis to Julius after himself. The calendar was now based on a year of 365.25 days, with February having an extra day every four years. Thus the months became, Januarius, Martius, Maius, Julius, Septembris and Novembris each with 31 days each; Aprilis, Junius, Sextilis, Octobris and Decembris each with 30 days. Februarius had 29 days in common years, and 30 days in leap years. In 8 B.C. Augustus Caesar changing the name of the month Sextilis to Augustus in his own honour again reformed the calendar. This included adding an additional day to give 31 days, this day being taken away from Februarius. The next change took place during A.D. 532 when Dionysius Exiguus, the Abbott of Rome named the 25th March as the date of the conception of Christ with the 25th December being determined as the birth date of Christ. Hence the start of the year was ordered to commence on 25th March.

Dionysius is also said to have established the Christian era from the presumed date of the birth of Christ. Thus began the custom of counting historical records as Before Christ (B.C); and Anno Domini (A.D); the year of our Lord. The calendar of Dionysius remained so until 1582, when Pope Gregory X111 being authorised by the Council of Trent, and after consultation with numerous astronomers made various changes giving the year 365.2422 days. This is the calendar which is currently in vogue. More specifically it was Christopher Clavius and a number of his colleagues who drew up the Gregorian calendar; keeping in mind that fundamentally calendars are based on the movement of the Sun and the Moon. The basic difficulty of using these two celestial bodies is that the year does not consist of a whole number of Lunar months or a whole number of days. As you know the Moon during the course of a month shows different phases ranging from new Moon to new Moon, although you may not be fully aware that a full Lunar cycle takes place every 29.5 days, thus a full seasonal year has 365.25 days. Hence the period of a Lunar month and a seasonal year do not have a readily utilitarian relationship - it can be seen that 365.25 divided by 29.5 offers an awkward calculation i.e. 365.25/29.5 = 12.381355 clearly demonstrating that a Solar calendar and a Lunar calendar do not lend themselves to one another; as such are not very compatible from a practical point of view. Now the word Easter is derived from the name Eostre a Saxon Goddess who was celebrated at the spring equinox. As you are aware, in the Christian religion, Easter is the annual festival commemorating the ‘Resurrection’. It is observed on a day related to the Passover Full Moon and is calculated differently in Eastern and Western Christian Churches. Therefore Easter is based on a Lunar calendar and is defined in Western churches as the first Sunday after the full Moon on or after the spring (vernal) equinox. Thus to determine the date of Easter it is necessary to know:

The date of the vernal equinox, that is, March 21. Dates on the Solar calendar of the phases of the Moon; they vary from year to year. Dates on which the days of the week fall. Since the date of the vernal equinox is known (21st March), it is only necessary, given the above information, to determine on which day of the week the Full Moon occurs after this date. Now, without going into great detail, it was Christopher Clavius and his colleagues who drew up the Gregorian calendar working out a set of rules employing the use of the Dominical Letter and the Epact assigned to each year, to identify the date for Easter. It is evident from this brief history the formulation of time keeping has followed a bumpy and tortuous path on your planet. Nevertheless I hope you can see that no matter how simple or complex a calendar can be it is no more than a simple measurement of relative motion. Thus in this case it is no more than the comparison of the movement of celestial bodies in their orbits and across your planet’s skies to that of the movement of a clock’s hand, or the movement of sand in an hourglass. All these motions being translated into a written form you call a calendar. I need now to digress slightly as you must be prepared to accept that, although Mortals are very capable of many extraordinary things encompassing both the arts and the sciences, ‘seeds of knowledge’ have been implanted by us, your Gods, into the minds of Mortals at various times throughout their history. Indeed, actual contact has also taken place in the past with many of your planet’s inhabitants as in your case. In ages past, Human contacts have regarded some of these experiences as visitations with angelic messengers. Unfortunately, due to numerous reasons that I do not intend to go into, Mankind has not always been receptive to the message; I am sure that on reflection you can work the reasons out for yourself. Additionally, and again for many reasons, when the message has

been recognised and accepted the information has been muddled and distorted by the recipient. As such the truth has not always triumphed. You must remember Man has been given a free spirit and therefore must ultimately make his own decisions; we on our part can only try to impart knowledge. It is important to realise that Mankind’s intellectual capability or capacity does not always offer the most fertile ground; Man apart from many other things has to overcome his arrogance. Ultimately, whether an individual accepts the message and what good they make of it is entirely up to them. We are trying to elevate Humans to a higher plane of existence in conjunction with their natural evolution, but there will come a time when events will dictate that we make ourselves known throughout your planet. I know you may find this statement somewhat confusing when you try to reconcile it with your new knowledge of your existence. But trust and believe in me when I say it is crucial to the Game and the Master Plan. No doubt you can work out for yourself the many causes for intervention when you examine the works of Mortals. Greed, selfishness and the lust for power are prime contenders for ignorance can be forgiven and corrected. Look around at your planet and ask yourself how many species have become extinct by the hand of Homo sapiens? How many wars or social unrest are there at any one instant? Is there no limit to the atrocities carried out under the banner of terrorism? Why do not the richer nations look after the poorer nations? How much is spent on warlike material in any one year? How polluted are the waters of the Earth? How healthy is your atmosphere and what of the ozone layer and the Polar Regions need I go on? Yes, there will come a time when it will be necessary for us to intercede more directly into the affairs of Mankind. Humans in their physical form are not that important, indeed they are lucky to live for three score years and ten. It is the soul of Mortals that has meaning. If Humans should live but for a day or a thousand years it would be of no consequence and yet they are still custodians of the planet Earth; a heavy responsibility.

Seeds of knowledge found fertility in the mind of Galileo and although Isaac Newton built on the knowledge of Galileo and others, Newton too had numerous seeds sown in his mind by us, your Gods. But even Newton managed to distort and misunderstand some of the truth. Newton persisted in the belief of absolute time. There are moments when the identical seed is planted in a number of different minds knowing that possibly just a few, if any, will germinate? Further, even given such germination it is not always a ‘healthy plant’ that will grow. Do not overestimate or misunderstand what I am saying, Man is capable and has, without outside help, discovered and invented many things. For example, Ole Christenson a Danish astronomer (1676) discovered that light travelled at a very high but finite speed. Although not hitting the nail on the head for accuracy, his value for the speed of light was 224,000 Kilometres per second (140,000 miles per second). Compared to your modern value of 300,000 Kilometres per second (186,000 miles per second), it was still a fine achievement for the period in which he lived. Apart from his own thoughts, Johannes Kepler (1571 - 1630), building on the knowledge and records of Tycho Brahe (1546 – 1601) was further motivated by a ‘seed of knowledge’ to determine the orbit of Mars and hence the other planets of the Solar System. In achieving this it was claimed that Kepler had finally worked out the actual description of the Solar System. Indeed, numerous seeds were further sown with Kepler, who although an excellent recipient was, due to his ill health, inhibited from seeing the whole truth. This was demonstrated when Kepler published a book in 1609 called ASTRONOMIA NOVA which was later said to be ‘surprisingly’ advanced in many ways for the 17th century. Prior to Kepler, scientific principles were drawn from philosophical judgement, not from observation of what the Universe was actually like. Indeed, Aristotle deemed all heavenly bodies to be perfect because he felt they should be; they were heavenly bodies after all! Kepler’s greatest achievement was the demonstration of mathematical analysis in the solving of scientific questions. It must be said that Kepler’s mathematical approach was his alone and not

seeded and influenced by us. As a result this led to Kepler’s three Laws of Planetary Motion being empirical, describing the phenomenon without explaining why it occurs. Kepler derived them from Tycho Brahe’s extensive observations and not from any fundamental assumption or theory.” Karaz-hu stopped and looked at me approvingly and I felt a welcome sense of relief. It was a good time to stop as my head was again beginning to buzz and I was very thankful for the liquid refreshment that had suddenly appeared. “You have proven an attentive listener my friend, please drink up and we shall both rest for a while.” Karaz-hu waited till I had finished my drink then indicated that I should fully recline on the couch. The next thing I was aware of was Karaz-hu shaking me gently and saying he must continue. Although I somehow sensed that I had been in a deep sleep I was amazed to find I was so wonderfully alert and not at all bleary. Karaz-hu was obviously aware of my rejuvenation as he was soon into his stride again saying. “Disregarding other motions to avoid confusion, the Sun is rushing toward the star Vega at a rate of 68.8,000 Kilometres per hour (43,000 miles per hour) and as a consequence of the Sun’s gravitational lock is dragging all the planets along with it. Just as an aside, you should also know that due to the precession of the Earth that Vega will become the pole star for the northern hemisphere in approximately 13,000 years time. But then again I am digressing and returning to the true motion of the planets; if you can imagine yourself in space viewing the Solar System from above the orbiting plane of the planets, you will see that the planets do not follow an absolute elliptical path but that of a spiral - spiralling around the Sun as it travels toward Vega. You must recognise that for nearly 2000 years the ideas of Aristotle dominated the attempts to understand motion. Aristotle considered rest to be the natural state of the Universe whereas, in fact, the opposite is true. Motion along with matter and space is part of the nature of things. Without motion nothing exists, without matter nothing exists and without space nothing exists. As we shall see, time is a result of these things. It was deemed by us, the Gods, that scientific advancement on Earth had stuck in a rut and as a result a

seed was sown in the mind of Galileo to start ‘the ball rolling again’, as you say on Earth. Galileo initially produced a treatise ‘ON MOTION’ in which he discussed falling bodies and projectiles. This response necessitated an additional ‘corrective seeding’ as some of his ideas were misguided and clouded the initial ‘vision of knowledge’. The second seeding led to a profound change in his thinking which in turn led to a later book titled ‘DIALOGUES CONCERNING THE NEW SCIENCES’. It is said that Aristotle’s notions impeded the progress of physics for nearly 2000 years until the time of Galileo. This is so; although the truth is better served by realising the Gods passed an edict stating ‘interference in the works of Man relating to the understanding of universal laws shall be prohibited for a period of 5000 years’. When it was known that little progress had taken place during 2000 years it was decided after a considerable reassessment to ‘kick start’ events by ‘seeding’ the mind of Galileo. Due to the resistance of such bodies as the church it was deemed necessary that other minds should also be seeded as I mentioned earlier. I have dwelt mainly on motion and how some motions are an illusion such as the movement of the Sun across the sky. Now we will examine the Human concept of time and see why the passage of subjective time is illusory to you. How many times have you experienced a slowing down of time when you have been required to complete a boring task? Remember how time ‘drags’ when you are waiting for someone or something to happen! Conversely when you are involved in something exciting or interesting time appears to fly, despite the ticking of the clock and the swing of the pendulum that continues relentlessly on its constant journey. It was not till the seeding of Einstein and his Theory of Relativity that an understanding as to the true nature of space and time came about. As your astronomers and scientists probe deeper and deeper into the Cosmos the predictions offered by Einstein will be proven over and over again. Before further enhancing your understanding of space and time it will be enlightening for you if I describe an elementary misunderstanding

Man has regarding the reality of time travel. Time travel, as understood by most of Mankind, is erroneously conceived. The concept whereby it is envisaged that it would be possible to build a machine that could propel its occupant forward or backwards purely in time is misguided. It simply demonstrates that the supporters of such a notion have very little understanding of time and space, or motion. If you have grasped the things that I have been explaining to you in our earlier contacts, then you should readily see that it is impossible to state that one can travel forward and then backwards in time to the same position without taking space into consideration.” I interrupted. “Sorry Karaz-hu, I am not completely with you on this, could you possibly expand on what you are saying.” Karaz-hu nodded and continued, “I understand your confusion as it takes a while to alter a conditioned mind. I will explain further by way of a simple example. Imagine the scenario where you have actually built a time machine that can travel forward and backwards in time. You are occupying the machine in a flat somewhere, in say, North London. You decide you will give the machine a simple test by travelling six months back into the past - not too far back into the past just in case things do not go as expected. Thus you set the DIRECTION dial for PAST and the TIME dial for SIX MONTHS; you hold your breath and push the start button! Whoosh, if the machine functions as imagined, then you would find yourself in the same flat, but six months earlier - or would you?” Karaz-hu suddenly stopped and stood there smiling before asking. “Well do you have any comment?” I quickly blurted, “Yes!” As if I had something intelligent to say but had to counter with, “I am not too sure what you are getting at?” Karaz-hu appeared to have anticipated my reaction. “The Achilles heel of the scenario I have just explained to you is that there is no mention of space! If you travelled back six months in ‘time only’ you would not find yourself in the same flat in North London but floating in space where the Earth was six months earlier - on the other side of its orbit.” At this juncture Karazhu drew a sketch for me and I have reproduced it in figure 22.

He continued. “The Earth is not stationary in space, but is moving around its orbital path. Apart from journeying around the Sun at a velocity of 29.79 kilometres per second, the Earth is also moving at great speed with the whole Solar System as it moves in a spiral arm around the centre of the galaxy. Additionally, the Milky Way Galaxy is also rushing through space. So even if it were possible to travel back in time as envisioned, you would not only have to travel back through time, but travel to the exact position of the Earth in the Universe at that time in the past. To travel forward in time would also necessitate the accurate prediction of the Earth at a specific point in the Universe at a specific time in the future. To be exact you would need to compute all the various motions of the Earth and not just the three mentioned. More enlightened minds talk of space and time machines, but even this concept is misguided.

Fig 22 However, given all the required information it is possible to identify a point in space where the Earth was, for example, 2000 years ago and also possible to predict where the Earth will be in 2000 years time. Obviously, in travelling to the point where the Earth has been or is going to be, you will not find the Earth there, as it is here. It cannot be in more than one place in any one moment of time in your Universe. More importantly, you have to recognise that if it were possible to travel back to the past, it presupposes the past is still happening? If it were not so, then there would not be anything to travel back to. Additionally, to be able to travel into the future also dictates that the future is happening now, and if this were true, then it means that everything in life is already preordained and your life and events are already mapped out and have happened. This in itself poses a conundrum for time travellers. Thus if everything is already mapped out and you travelled to the future, it could be argued that something or some force would be needed to prohibit you interfering or altering anything at any moment in the future. Otherwise you would be interfering with the ongoing future blueprint; upsetting all the events that had been preordained and previously mapped out. You must also recognise that if the past and future are happening now, then what does present time mean? If everything is happening all at once then, in a way, there is really no future or past, just the present time? If this were so what would it truly mean? How would you define the present time? It is not static but obviously very dynamic, or is it an illusion? Clearly it is all nonsense and some of your theoretical physicists talk of multi-universes and other such theories to get around the problem. Looking for additional seemingly esoteric theories to justify the weaknesses of an original theory is not very

scientific. Once you start getting into that realm of reasoning then everything and anything is possible; which is patently not so. Examining the concept of actually travelling backwards into time more closely you will quickly realise that it is not at all logical and poses many paradoxes. For example, suppose you travelled back into the past and killed your grandfather when he was only a child; as a result of this slaying your father would not have been born and obviously neither would you. This cannot be so, as it violates the natural laws of your Universe. Supporters for this type of time travel will struggle to maintain it is still possible by inventing all types of theories such as parallel universes, multiple life paths and all sorts of nonsense. It is not very scientific to invent theories to support or justify an already shaky theory, as I have already stated. Now imagine a futuristically advanced technological society where your concept of time travel and its practical use is as commonplace as the automobile is today. With all these people travelling forwards and backwards in time and interfering intentionally and unintentionally with the past then history would be changing from one minute to the next. Disciples of Nazism could return to the past and ensure a German victory in the Second World War. Depending on your persuasion the outcome of the English, French, and the American civil war or Russian revolution could be altered. What impact would there have been on the Roman Empire if a time traveller denied Julius Caesar his birth or modified past events to ensure that Harold won the Battle of Hastings? The USA is currently the richest and most powerful nation on your planet and it would quickly occur to a number of political minds to travel back into time and alter the outcome of the American War of Independence so as to realise a different version of history. Further, it would soon become very obvious that any country possessing a time machine would have the potential to return to the past and alter the political face of the Earth to satisfy their own selfish agenda. I hope you can see from my explanation that the past and future would become utterly chaotic and impossible; the more you examine the situation the more it becomes illogical and

unattainable. The supporters of this concept of time travel also tend to give very little or no consideration to the Human immune system, and all the bacteria and viruses which are part of your existence. Mankind, ever since he set foot on the planet, has been upsetting the ecological balance, indeed all life forms have a part to play; look back at your history and see how the numerous plagues on your planet have been triggered. Bacteria and viruses, like yourselves, evolve and adapt genetically seizing any opportunity they can to multiply and adapt. The atmosphere and environment of say, 3000 BC, is subtly different and not conducive to the twentieth century. The simple transference of bacteria and viruses from your century to the past or future could have devastating effects and decimate whole populations. Consider, for example, the pandemic influenza outbreak after the First World War commonly known as ‘Spanish Flu’. It accounted for an estimated 20 million deaths worldwide including 200,000 deaths in your own country. Further when the early European explorers first encountered the early Native Americans, and the natives of the Pacific Islands, whole tribes were wiped out due to unwanted and unseen imports. On the American continent, syphilis and smallpox, imported by the Europeans, decimated untold numbers of Native Americans. Thus, a time traveller would not be a welcome visitor to Ancient Greece or early the Chinese dynasties. Remember also, the transference of germs is not, by any means, one way traffic and confined only to travelling back to the past, what untold problems would you return with? Quarantine would be a must. Unscrupulous Humans could use this concept of time travel as a germ warfare weapon. You can imagine the scenario where a vicious dictator could return political prisoners to the midst of a Bubonic plague outbreak or any other highly contagious disease. Having had them suitably infected he would then return these unfortunate wretches to any country and time to devastate their actual or perceived enemies. The use of contaminated Human bodies to try and destroy the enemy is nothing new in the history of your planet. When the

Crimean port of Kaffa was being assaulted by Muslim forces in 1346, plague appeared among the besiegers. It occurred to the Muslims at the time that if they catapulted the bodies of the plague victims over the walls into the besieged city the ensconced habitants would also soon succumb to the disease. The device used for catapulting the bodies was known as the ‘trebuchet’, a giant siege catapult, which was very efficient in breaking down the defences of fortified castles. It was not long before plague did break out within the city forcing a number of the defendants to escape in ships. This in turn naturally caused the plague to spread to other parts demonstrating also that the use of germ warfare has to be carefully controlled to stop it getting out of hand. Have you also considered the prospect in returning to an earlier age and just by walking about and treading on the grass and insects that otherwise would not have been exposed to your presence, could have significant effects, and dire consequences for the future. So you see, the concept of travelling into the past as you envisage the probability, is not, even if it were possible, that simple. Time travellers would be required to spend a considerable duration in quarantine at both ends, on each of their travels to the past and future. An interesting paradox would be when a person travelled into the past within their own life time and as a consequence would meet themselves.” I interrupted at this point blurting out. ‘Hold on Karaz-hu that cannot be possible. Surely there cannot be two of you, how can you meet yourself?’ Karaz-hu gazed at me for a moment then replied. “You must concentrate on what I am explaining to you. Now if it were possible to travel into the past and see all the objects and people that existed, then why should you be missing, as you were once part of that reality? All the other objects and people are still there, so again, why should you be missing?” Karaz-hu’s reasoning suddenly hit home and I had to concede to his logic and beckoned for him to continue, which he promptly did. “You cannot argue it is because you have moved on into the future as I will counter with - so have all the other people and objects! Now dwell on the possibility of killing oneself, that is, the person who

resembles you in the past. You will not be slaying your present self (the time traveller) but yourself in the past. It could be described as an eloquent form of suicide; that would give the lawyers some fun. Now consider this. A person with a large inflated ego could contemplate subjugating the whole World by populating it with ‘himself’. Imagine him travelling back in time to yesterday (day one) and meeting with himself. He then invites his ‘past self’ to join him in his time machine and travel back to the present time - there are now ‘two of him’ in the present time. He now travels two days back into time and repeats the exercise so there are now ‘three of him’ in the present time - he now repeats this a thousand times by going back four days, then five days and so on until his current day ‘selves’ are in excess of one thousand. To save a lot of time - as they are all getting rather excited and a little impatient to inherit the Earth – they decide to acquire their own time machines and travel back simultaneously – thereby accelerating their growth in numbers. In doing so, it would be important to ensure that the time travellers returning simultaneously to the past do not coincide at a single moment in the past - for if they did, they would have to toss a coin in deciding which of them (time travellers) would bring their ‘past self’ back! By this progression it is not long before there are millions of them thus subjugation of the Earth is becoming a reality and ego is satisfied. No doubt you can work out that this scenario by itself poses a lot of questions relating to travelling back into the past. When you travel back to say, day one, and bring your ‘past self’ back to the present, what exactly happens to your ‘past self’ - does your ‘past self’ suddenly disappear the moment ‘it’ steps into your time machine - or does another ‘you’ replicate itself to ensure continuity (the time-line) into the future? We have obviously had to assume the time-line had not been broken with your ‘past self’ being transported back to the present time along with your ‘present body’ still staying in existence. It can be reasoned that if you go back in time and bring yourself back to the present, then there will not be anyone (you) to travel to the

present to be your ‘present self’ and you would therefore suddenly cease to exist! Consider this, suppose you returned ten years into the past and brought yourself back to the present day. This of course is assuming your past self is willing to travel with you to his perceived future? It could be argued that the time-line has been broken at this point, ten years in your past. The questions then are - will you suddenly cease to exist - or will there be a ten year gap in your past history - if you persisted in your time travelling and bringing your ‘past self’ back to your present time, would you keep popping up, in and out of time? Now progressing the point I was making earlier to you regarding space and time machines, and the point I explained to you about finding yourself floating in space if you travelled just purely back in time. We need to address the question and ignoring space for the moment, what does it mean in relation to ‘time units’ when travelling back into the past? Is there a limit to the actual unit - is it a nanosecond or femtosecond? What is the ‘least time’ I can travel back into the past - where exactly will the present stop and the past begin, so to speak? Indeed, when breaking time down into its smallest units, it is at the quantum level that the flow of time becomes ragged. At the subparticle level movement between any two particles is by a ‘quantum leap’ as I have explained to you earlier in our encounters. Thus time, or more correctly motion is not of an analogue nature, but can be said to be of a digital nature in the form of quantum jumps at its lowest level. Another question you should be asking yourself is how fast can a time machine travel? Will they have a finite speed or will it be instantaneous? If the speed is finite then you have to ask how long will it take me to travel twenty years into the past, or possibly more meaningful, how long will it take me to travel a thousand years into the past? You will, I trust, certainly still want to be alive when you have reached your journeys end? Time travelling cannot be instantaneous, as that would imply exceeding the velocity of light. You must recognise that apart from yourself the time machine is made of matter, that is, mass. Now you know the time machine,

including yourself, would attain infinite mass as they approached the speed of light, so instantaneous time travelling is out. The more thought you give the subject of time travelling into the past as perceived by Mortals, the more unattainable it becomes. Time is purely a Human concept and in reality there is no such thing as it is all motion. There is no past, present or future, as you understand them. Indeed, the present is forever moving onward and in this sense all motions are forever moving on. It is very important to recognise there is only NOW; albeit that NOW is constantly changing. It is a mistake to think that the past and future are another ‘land’ so to speak; there is only this moment and nothing outside of it. This moment in time continually changes and that is basically it! Time is simply NOW. Consider you are back on Earth and sitting in a chair holding a pencil in your hand. The pencil is only stationary in relation to you; it is far from stationary in relation to the background of stars. As you know and to quote just a few examples, the Earth is rotating on its axis as it orbits the Sun. Whilst the Sun and its planets are moving through space around the centre of the Milky Way Galaxy. I labour these points to impress upon you how the pencil is forever moving through space. Indeed space itself is forever moving onward as it expands, you can never go back, purely in time, to a single point in space after a finite duration has passed, for this single point will have moved on. If you plotted all the coordinates to identify the exact place where the pencil was in space say two days ago, you could certainly travel to that place but unfortunately the point in space will have moved on.” This was just too much for me, my head was really buzzing and I had to stop Karaz-hu. “I am sorry but you have just completely baffled me! What exactly do you mean by saying you can travel to a place in space if you know all the coordinates but that point in space will have moved on when you get there? It sounds all nonsense to me?” Karaz-hu quickly put up his hand and interrupted. “I can appreciate your confusion as you regard space as a complete vacuum, which it is not. Not only that, but you have equated place with point, which adds further to your confusion. Now if you consider space as a type of

foam made of exceedingly small points, can you not see that as the foam expands so will the space between these tiny points, thereby causing the points to move away from one another? This is fundamentally the expansion of your Universe. I must impress upon you that space is not a vacuum, it is seething with particles that appear then disappear.” Now this time I interrupted Karaz-hu gasping. “I think I can see what you are getting at in the context of time but I am lost and have to take your word about space not being a vacuum with all these particles that are appearing then disappearing.” Whilst thinking to myself that if I was totally honest, I did not really follow his explanation regarding time travel either. “Please do not concern yourself!” Karaz-hu countered quickly, “I would now like to examine the paradoxes and obstacles relating to travelling into the future. Thus I will relate a small fable for you. Consider the scenario where a young citizen of a highly technological age ventures into the showroom of his local time machine centre and approaching a sales representative blithely enquires. “Look! I am on a tight budget and I do not need a super, all dancing and singing time machine that can travel forward and backwards in time and space. I just require a basic model for travelling only two weeks into the future, then back again and I do not require a guarantee as it can fall to pieces after that!” The sales representative giving the young man a quizzical look replies. “You are not going to believe this, but we have a second hand model that will fit your very requirement. Now if you are going to forfeit any guarantee we can let you have it at a knock down price, Sir.” The young man, hardly believing his luck, replied. “You are on, I’ll take it!” Our sales man, not being too quick witted could not resist the urge and asks. “Tell me, why is it you only want to travel just two weeks into the future, then back again, not want a guarantee, and yet not worried if the machine never worked again?” “It’s quite simple,” replied the young man, “I just need ample time to obtain the winning numbers of the National Lotteries of a few countries, the results of a number of horse and dog races, then I will be back to not only buy your most expensive time machine, but the showroom as well!”

Having the ability to travel into the future and then return to the past would at once render all such things as lotteries and gambling redundant unless a lot of people were very intent on losing a fortune. Think of the traumatic and psychological effect it would have on people to know when and how they were going to die? Think of the activities people would get up to in attempting to prolong their lives. Needless to say, but Humans have a finite life span. It could be argued that no matter what, they would go to extreme lengths to prolong their lives; but the day would come when their efforts would be useless. To illustrate this aspect a little further consider a relatively young male of twenty years of age who has travelled to the future and discovered he will die from a fatal illness on reaching the age of sixty. Thus the young person may react by thinking that on reaching the age of fifty years he could travel back in time to when he was forty; then keep repeating the cycle so as to never pass the fifty year point in his life. It is easy for the young person to be deluded into thinking he could live a continuous forty to fifty year life cycle thereby living for an eternity and hence achieve immortality? This would not be so, as under these conditions his body would age at its normal rate. Remember he is just travelling back and for in time and travelling back in time will not make him any younger. When a young man of twenty years of age travels back in time for ten years, he is still twenty when arriving at that earlier age. Indeed e further consider a relatively young male of twenty years of age who has travelled to the future and if he travelled a hundred or a thousand years into the past the young man would still be twenty years of age; his body would also still be aging at its normal rate thereby denying him any chance of immortality. To continue with our nonsense; the criminal fraternity would have a field day, or would crime be prevented and eliminated by police time travellers? It would be neither, as there would be a wildly fluctuating situation between law enforcement officers and criminals, depending upon who reached the scene of the crime first as you can see from the table before you.” A table suddenly appeared on the cabin wall, (see Table 4-2). Karaz-hu paused for a moment so I could read the

information, before continuing. “The table only depicts the activities up to day 6 but it is easily seen that there would be continuous and relentless activity created by all this criminal and police time travel, which could continue till all the participants became rather dizzy to say the least. In illustrating this ‘felons versus the police’ scenario it should also be noted that time intervals of a ‘day’ were chosen. Now you should be able to recognise that the intervening periods could be in hours. Such that it could be just one hour after (or before) the gang had stolen the crown jewels the police travelled back in to time to apprehend the criminals.”

Table 4-2

ACTUAL (PRESENT) PASSAGE OF TIME

ACTIVITY Day 1

Criminal Gang steal the Crown Jewels Day 2 Police travel back in time to Day 1 and apprehend the jewel thieves. Day 3 Criminal gang escape from police and travel back in time to Day 0 and steal crown jewels. Day 4 Police travel back in time to Day 0 and apprehend the jewel thieves. Day 5 Criminal Gang again escape from police and travel back in time to Day 0 minus 1(Day –1) and steal the Crown jewels. Day 6 Police travel back in time to Day –1 and apprehend the jewel thieves

At this juncture I raised my hand indicating that I had enough and told Karaz-hu I needed more time to absorb everything he was telling me. “Not so!” Karaz-hu was quick to reply, “You must trust me, everything I tell you will be remembered at the appropriate moment. Now we must press on, as your time with us is limited. Now mark my words well and I will now explain to you how we are able to examine the past in your Universe and how it will be possible

for Mortals to travel into the future. Hopefully you are now beginning to have a better understanding of the natural laws of your Universe and fully appreciate how they inhibit actual travel back into the past; I have taken pains to outline some of the reasons why! We have also explored some of the numerous paradoxes, conundrums and problems that would be incumbent if it were at all possible. Although it is impossible to travel bodily back into the past, it is still possible to view the past. Again I will take pains to remind you that everything you are conscious of has happened in the past. When you are looking at an object the light reflected from the object takes a finite time to reach your eyes. This information then has to be converted and fed to the brain for processing and this again takes time, albeit minutely small. When you feel the rays of the Sun on your body they are already approximately 8 minutes old. Astronomers on Earth looking at Neptune through their telescopes are seeing the planet as it was about 4.5 hours ago as Neptune is approximately 4.5 light-hours from the Earth. The light from your next nearest star, Proxima Centauri, takes 4.4 years to reach the Earth and is thus said to be 4.4 light-years distant. Looking at more distant celestial objects such as galaxies and quasars you are seeing them as they were millions and billions of years ago. Therefore you must clearly understand that wherever you care to gaze you are looking at the past. The more distant the object you are observing the further you are looking into the past; the time being dictated by the relationship between the distance and the speed of light. We will now carry out a thought experiment to help you understand the principle by which the past ages of a planet such as the Earth could be viewed. Imagine you have constructed a highly advanced space vehicle, which is not subject to the natural laws of your Universe and can travel at any velocity, indeed it can accelerate instantaneously without any undue alteration or stress to itself or its occupants such as mass increase, length decrease or time dilation. Therefore in this thought experiment the craft and its occupants are obviously not subject to the laws of relativity. Also, imagine the spacecraft has limitless fuel and incredible life support systems, which enable the

spacecraft to withstand extremely low and high temperatures, incredibly strong radiation and gravity fields, et cetera. Thus it would be possible to blast off from Earth and in an instant be in orbit very close to the Sun where the light from the Sun now reaches the occupants of the spacecraft almost instantly and the reflected light from the Earth now takes 8 minutes to reach the spaceship; a reversal of the Sun to Earth relationship. In this situation the occupants of our superior spaceship will be viewing the Earth as it was 8 minutes ago. The spacecraft now blasts off to the vicinity of the planet Neptune and parks in orbit around Neptune. (See figure 23).

Observers on Earth view Neptune as it was 4.5 hours ago and observers on Neptune view Earth as it was 4.5 hours ago. A hypothetical Super Spacecraft capable of velocities far greater than the speed of light would in effect, create the same time frame between departure and arrival.

Fig 23

The spaceship is provided with a conventional telescope but with a communication system to match the ship’s superior technology and can transmit and receive messages instantly. So a message from Earth could inform the occupants of the ship of a cataclysmic volcanic explosion which has just taken place and if they turn their telescope towards the Earth, they will be able to observe the drama in approximately 4.5 hours time. The spaceship now accelerates away and is instantly parked in an orbit around Proxima Centauri. The space travellers, now in orbit around Proxima Centauri, inform the Earth that it will be 4.4 years before they will be able to view the volcanic events with their telescope. Hopefully you are beginning to appreciate that the space vehicle and its occupants are in effect, both space and time travellers. In their present orbit around Proxima Centauri they are viewing the Earth 4.4 years in the past and that is their present time and reality – thus should they wish to see what the Earth will be like in the future from their position in space, that is, to see how the Earth will look like in 4.4 years time, they simply point their craft in the direction of the Earth and in an instant they are in orbit around the Earth and have in one respect, travelled to the future as regards their time frame in orbit around Proxima Centauri. Leaving Earth orbit again the craft travels instantaneously to a position near a cluster nebula in Ursa Major. When they turn their telescope toward the Earth they are observing the planet as it was 1,000,000,000 years ago as the distance from the Earth to the nebula cluster is 1,000,000,000 light-years. Now if the conventional telescope became ‘magically’ and ‘suddenly’ of the same technological standard as the spacecraft, thereby having unlimited resolving power; the spacecraft observers would then be able to see the surface of the Earth as it was 1,000,000,000 years ago. They would also being able to resolve images down to the

smallest detail - obviously this is assuming the reflected light from the surface of the Earth has not been diminished in any way. Hopefully you will have recognised that although the observers can see the surface of the planet as it was 1,000,000,000 years ago, they cannot return to that time on Earth. The planet will have moved on in space and time and they would be simply viewing its reflected light. In this particular scenario, and remember we are ignoring the effects of relativity, the spaceship and its occupants can only return to the time, or later, when they left their planet and are restricted to this. Thus within the restrictions of this thought experiment it can be argued that we have a hypothetical space vehicle for viewing the past. The spacecraft, starting from the Earth, and following the path of the reflected light beam from the surface of the Earth, can travel to any point and view the planet as it was at that point in time. Hopefully you will be able to appreciate that the occupants of the spacecraft could travel in space along the light beam, stop their craft and see how life was, for example, during the thirteenth century or view the Babylonians or Assyrians. Hypothetically, the spacecraft could travel immense distances along the light beam and witness the creation of the Earth, assuming there is no corruption of the light information.” Karaz-hu paused and looking at me asked. “I hope you have comprehended all that I have explained to you?” Interrupting quickly I said there was no way I could remember and repeat all the detail, except I did feel that I understood what he was trying to tell me about time travel and being able to see the past; but not being able to actually travel back in time. “Do not worry you will recall all when the time is right!” Karaz-hu replied, “Now tell me, in very simple terms, what you comprehend.” Hesitantly I replied. “My understanding of what you have told me so far is that it was not possible to travel back into time because there was no past as such, it was all motion and everything had moved on.” Not too sure of my ground I nervously continued and said. “It was possible to view the past though by examining the light reflected or emitted from various celestial bodies. We are seeing the past

when we look at the stars; but not only the stars, everything we see is in the past as it takes time for light to travel from the object viewed to reach our eyes, and also time for our brain to process the information. The great restriction to viewing the Earth of bygone ages is the obstacle of the speed of light; we cannot race along the Earth’s reflected light beam fast enough, overtaking the light, to see the Earth as it was millions or even hundreds or tens of years ago.” “Excellent!” Karaz-hu interrupted, “You have correctly understood and when the occasion is right you will remember the detail.” I must admit to a flush of relief flowing through me and I did feel quite pleased and amazed at myself for not only understanding the basic concept he had taken pains to explain to me, but also for being able to put it over in what I thought was a very concise way. My thoughts of self congratulation were brought to an abrupt halt as Karaz-hu continued. “On our first encounter I explained to you that light is king in your Universe and as such its velocity cannot be exceeded. This makes the prospect of building a super spacecraft capable of exceeding or even matching the speed of light unattainable. To us, it is not a problem, for we are not of your Universe. Time and space as you understand them have no meaning outside of your Universe from whence we come. We can easily circumvent the problem of the ‘light limit’ by entering your Universe at any point, at any time; we are Gods and are capable of all things. Should we wish to function at a lower level and enter your Universe at a chosen point, we can intercept for example, not only the light that has been reflected from the Earth, but examine the information at any point along its reflected beam; then we would be able to determine in detail that particular period of history of the Earth. If we deemed it justifiable, we could allow you to name any period in the past history of your planet that you had an interest in and wished to know more about. Obviously you could not come with us because of your Human limitations. Thus we could leave your Universe and re-enter at the appropriate space and time co-ordinate. Having arrived at the correct position we would identify the part of the planet you expressed an interest in and with the equivalent of your video

technology record the events for displaying to you on our return. Additionally, by means of our advanced technology we can examine the reflected light rays to show detail down to the microscopic level. No doubt you will appreciate that the method I have just described enabling viewing of past periods would be exceedingly tiresome and inefficient to execute every time one wished to view some period of your planet’s past. Thus you should be conscious of the fact that your planet’s evolution has been well documented by us. The information has been stored, for want of a better description so that you may understand, in vast data banks for retrieval at any time by a technology similar to your computer science. So should it be desirable to show you any event from your planet’s past history we would simply access the correct data file and display the images for you. I stress that I use the terms ‘data files’ and ‘technology similar to your computer science’ as a means of communication and for your understanding, as our science and technology is far beyond your comprehension. As a consequence of the dominance of the velocity of light in your Universe the viewing of past eras of such celestial objects as the Earth is very limited to your science. Your scientists may view and detect distant galaxies that are millions of years old, but that, unfortunately, will be the extent of their endeavours. They will never be able to travel along the light beams and view the various past ages of galaxies or indeed the Earth; but as you now appreciate we suffer no such restrictions. Moving on I will explain the feasibility of travelling into the future within your Universe. But before doing so I must ask if you can recollect any of the details when I briefly touched on time dilation during your last encounter with us?” The question suddenly jolted me out of my trance like state, as although I seemed to be absorbing the information Karaz-hu was relating to me I now felt totally mesmerised by his presence and unaware of any other activity that was going on all around me. “Do you mean Einstein’s theories?” I managed to say, feeling a little foolish as I had read one or two books on the subject and had given

up as it was all completely beyond me. “Yes of course!” Karaz-hu replied. Karaz-hu seemed impatient at first with my reply and then appeared resigned to my obvious lack of knowledge. “Never mind we will continue, please relax and I will explain. Those who are familiar with the works of Einstein will be aware that if two observers are moving at a constant velocity relative to each other, it appears to each that the other’s time processes are slowed down. This is the time-dilation effect predicted by Einstein’s Special Theory of Relativity. Just as an aside, on your planet the official and international standard of time is based on the caesium atomic clock, which you will now appreciate, is far more accurate a timekeeper than the apparent motions of celestial bodies such as the Sun, Moon, Earth or stars. Atomic clocks offer accuracy to a millionth of a second a day, with special research clocks that use hydrogen instead of caesium offering even greater precision; Einstein also predicted that clocks would be affected by gravity but for the moment we will just concern ourselves with motion. Now let us return to our theme and our notion of a super spaceship. Imagine it takes off from the Earth at extremely high speed and in any direction, and then at a point in space it turns around and comes back to the Earth again. The occupants of the spacecraft will notice, on landing, that there is a difference in time between themselves and the people they left behind on Earth. The occupants of the spaceship will have noticed that time has passed more slowly for them than the people on the Earth. After a number of trips the space travellers will quickly realise that the faster and further they travel the greater will be the time difference. Indeed, they will soon be aware that it is possible for a father to leave his young son behind and if the parent has travelled fast and far enough, then on his return he would find his son now to be an old man with a long white beard. In fact, given the necessary speed and distance, he could return to greet his son’s son! Thus the occupants of the spacecraft have, as far as the people on the Earth are concerned, travelled into the future. Alas! There is a price to pay for such a journey, as it will be impossible to return to the time on Earth at the start of the journey.

Once you have travelled to the future there is no return to the past. One aspect on time travel I would like to draw your attention to is the controversial ‘twin paradox’, which has resulted in more perplexity and controversy than most ideas in relativity. Now imagine there are twins, one of whom takes a trip in his spaceship to a distant star and back whilst his brother remains on Earth. Let us assume the star is 40 light-years from the Earth and the one twin in his spaceship is travelling at 259 Kilometres a second (161,000 miles a second). At this speed it will take approximately 46.5 years to reach the star. Applying the time-dilation formula the time will result in approximately 23.25 years passing for the twin in the spaceship. So the clock on the spaceship is going only half as fast as the twin’s clock back on Earth. Thus the twin back on Earth will age twice as fast as his brother aboard the spaceship. Now if you think about this scenario there appears to be a contradiction! As all motion is relative it can be argued that it is justifiable to claim the spaceship is stationary and it is the Earth that moves away with a speed of 259 Kilometres a second (161,000 miles a second), and then returns, whilst the spaceship is stationary. Under this situation it is the twin on the Earth that remains young whilst his brother on the spaceship ages, such that when they meet again the twin on the spaceship is older by a factor of two. Thus we have a parody. When the spaceship twin moves off into space and returns he finds that he is younger than his Earth twin. But when we assume it is the Earth, which moved off into space and returned; then it is the Earth twin who returns physically younger than the spaceship twin. Thus which view is correct? The truth is that the both views are not interchangeable as we have assumed, so there is no parody at all. This is because the two situations are not symmetrical and therefore not reversible mathematically. The reason for this is that the spaceship undergoes acceleration and deceleration during the trip whilst the Earth does not. It should be noted the spaceship could not avoid the deceleration and acceleration necessary at the distant star to reverse its velocity by turning in a large semi-circle. In order to turn in a circular arc a sideways force must be imparted, which results in an

acceleration at right angles to the direction of motion. Thus, the use of some type of acceleration to reverse direction and velocity is always necessary. This, according to Einstein’s Special Theory, leads to the inescapable conclusion that less total time for the round trip will elapse for the twin on the spaceship, regardless of how he measures time than for his brother left behind on Earth. The total amount of time retardation predicted by the Special Theory for the twin on the spaceship will depend, on the velocity of the spaceship relative to the Earth assumed constant, and the total distance of the journey. Theoretically, if the Earth were to actually make the trip by undergoing the necessary accelerations and decelerations while the spaceship remained at rest, then it would be the Earth twin who would be the younger, physically, when the twins were united. It should be obvious that the truth is the time on the moving spaceship flows slower is because it is the spaceship that moves through space and not the Earth. It is unrealistic to envisage the spaceship being stationary whilst the Earth moves away. You have to understand the spatial nature of your Universe. To consider the Earth moving and not the spaceship is nonsense, as to maintain the special relationship the Earth has with the Moon, it would mean the Earth and the Moon would have to move away from the spaceship together. Not only that, the Earth in relation to the Sun and the Planets would have to move together as well. In order for the Solar System to maintain its special relationship to the rest of the Milky Way Galaxy, would mean the whole galaxy would have to move as well. For the Milky Way Galaxy to maintain its special relationship with your Local Cluster of galaxies would mean the whole of the Local Cluster would have to move as well. So it is obvious the whole Universe would have to move, which is clearly nonsense. The truth is that time dilation only applies to objects that are ‘actually moving’. To make this a little clearer imagine you are on a moving train which runs extremely smooth and quietly so that you have no inclination of motion except for the passing objects which can be seen out of the window. Then should you pass a train that is stationary you will find that after a short while it will be very difficult to

say which train is moving. It would be easy to convince yourself that your train is in fact stationary and it is the other train that is moving. But the truth of the matter is that it is ‘your train’ that is ‘moving’ and not the other, no matter what your eyes, senses and brain are telling you; seeing, is not always believing!” “Hold on!” I had to interject, “My mind is in a whirl, and you have completely lost me. Can you give me a moment please, I am becoming very confused. Can you explain again?” I was playing for time so I could gather my thoughts together and hopefully understand the essence of what he was trying to tell me. There was a brief silence before Karaz-hu replied. “Do not be too vexed as you will remember and understand when the time is right. Nevertheless I will satisfy your request with another thought experiment to help you understand. Imagine for the sake of explanation that you are able to stand on and ride a beam of light. This was the question posed by Einstein who asked. “What would the World look like if I rode a beam of light?” (See figure 24). Now you start to ride the light rays close up to the clock when the time shows 3.00 PM. After one second you look back and to your amazement the hands on the clock face have not moved and still show 3.00 PM! Then after ten minutes you look back and behold, the clock still shows 3.00 PM! Then after one hour you look back again, and to your further amazement the clock face still shows 3.00 PM! What has happened you wonder has the clock stopped? It is only after you have given the matter a great deal of thought the truth begins to dawn! The beam of light carrying the ‘one second’ past 3.00 PM information is behind you and will never catch up with you, so you will never see it. Thus you suddenly realise the clock has not stopped but you are looking at the information contained in the light rays which you are keeping up with. These light rays contain the image of the clock showing 3.00 PM, and since you are travelling at the speed of light nothing, including light, can catch up to you. To see the clock face showing 3.30 PM the light reflected from the clock face would have to exceed 300,000 Kilometres per second

(186,000 miles per second) which you know is impossible as light has a constant velocity. Hopefully from this thought experiment you can now appreciate some of the truths I am attempting to explain to you.”

Fig 24

At this point I interrupted Karaz-hu. “Thank you Karaz-hu I think I can now see what you are getting at, although I must admit it is all very confusing and I will need time to fully comprehend it all.” Karaz-hu countered by saying. “Do not over concern yourself, if you do not

fully understand, others will. In the due course of time you will experience the compunction to write about your experiences; indeed, you will find your memory will allow you to recall all of the details even if you are not clear about what you are committing to paper. So be patient and listen to all I have to say to you.” I was not too sure at the time, what he actually meant, but nevertheless nodded my head in agreement. “Good!” Karaz-hu replied, “I will continue. Returning to your original question whether time travel is possible or not I hope you are beginning to understand how we, your Gods, can accomplish what you call time travel. We are not restricted to your concept of time, motion and space. We can enter your Universe at any point we desire. This means we can intercept light rays at any place or point in your Universe and examine the information carried in minute detail. Having made that observation there are situations where the light beam may have been degraded or scattered by various particles such as gas clouds, or distorted by an intense gravity field. This is where even we have difficulties in extracting the information and therefore in your Universe examination of the past by this method is not without its difficulties. You should now be convinced that the answer to your question of whether or not it is possible for Mortals to actually travel back into time is a very definite No! With regard to travelling into the future you should now see that it is feasible, as Einstein has shown. The nearer you travel to the velocity of light the further you may travel into the future. I have shown you that if you travel far and fast enough it is possible for you to return and meet your Grandchildren as time for you will have slowed down. Again, as I have explained to you, there is a price to pay for such journeys as it will be impossible for you to return to your own time and as such it will be a one-way trip. How far you travel into the future is dependent upon the speed and distance travelled away from the Earth. But remember and I stress again, there is a penalty to pay for this form of time travelling such that there would be no returning to the period of time when you started. Regarding travelling back into time the answer is, as I have already told you, impossible; such an enterprise is unattainable within your

Universe. Again I remind you and stress that you cannot enter the past as it has gone and it is only the information contained in the light rays that remain. Mankind cannot travel into the past for the many reasons I have explained to you. Even if time happened to be a ‘tangible structure’ as deemed by many of your kind, the numerous paradoxes and anomalies would inhibit time travel to the past. No doubt you can work out many more paradoxes and anomalies for yourself that will negate the prospect of actually travelling back into time; it is just not feasible in your Universe. But having said that, time is not the ‘tangible structure’ as envisioned by many Humans, that concept is an illusion. The truth is that time is purely movement as I have explained to you, or to put it more accurately, a comparison of motions. You will no doubt appreciate that Humans are restricted in your Universe by the velocity of light and it is impossible therefore for you to overtake a beam of light and then examine its information. Having made that statement there are ways you may circumvent a direct velocity attempt on bettering the speed of light, but I do not intend to discuss these means with you now, suffice to say that a number of your scientists are beginning to comprehend such methods. Again, I stress that you will not be able to ‘enter’ the past as it does not exist; you can only examine the information contained in the respective light beam. This is all I intend to explain to you about time travel within your Universe. Outside your Universe, time has no meaning, and any attempts at an explanation will be completely beyond your comprehension, as would an attempted explanation of quantum theory to a caveman. Finally having explained and stressed that time is essentially no more than a comparison of motion you should also appreciate that for a body to have motion it requires space in which to move. This may seem obvious to you but do you really understand what space is?” Karaz-hu paused to observe my reaction and my body language must have betrayed my confusion as he quickly continued. “By this I

do not mean the emptiness of say a room in which you may move furniture about, but the nature of the void between the planets, the stars in the galaxy and the vast distances between the galaxies and galactic clusters.” Karaz-hu stopped again to await a response. As I was not too sure as to what he was getting at I started mumbling. “It was obvious that to move any object on Earth you needed an empty space into which you can move the object.” Thinking I was being clever I added. “I appreciate the object will displace the air or any other substance in moving into that particular place. Also if the object was in space it would not be displacing anything as space is a vacuum.” At this juncture Karaz-hu stopped me abruptly saying. “What you say is true to a point, although the message I have been trying to convey is that space, even intergalactic space is a bit more than nothing. In your own Milky Way Galaxy there is approximately on average one atom of gas in each cubic centimetre of space. The point I am trying to make is that space is a dynamic entity; it is like foam as I explained to you earlier. But beyond space and your Universe is our reality. To reiterate, your Universe is expanding and by that I do not mean that you or the Earth, Moon or any other celestial object are actually growing in size - but space itself is expanding - thus all objects in your Universe which are unbound to each other by gravity, or any other forces, move away from each other as space expands. Your Universe, as has been explained to you, is a Virtual Reality Universe - it is a vast sphere of space and matter existing alongside but distant to all the other universes we have created - circumjacent and beyond all this creation is your true reality, the reality of the Gods!” Dique-zul suddenly appeared and looking at Karaz-hu said it was time for me to be returned. He then quickly approached me with an outstretched arm and before I could react in any way, placed two fingers on my forehead. Suddenly I found myself drifting from consciousness. As with the previous abductions I had no memory of leaving the Alien spacecraft and returning to Earth. The same pattern repeated itself and again I found myself sitting up in bed, soaked in

perspiration, breathing heavily and trying to make some sense of it all. But the compulsion to commit to paper my experiences was soon to be upon me; with the relevant memories returning in sequence which enabled me to record this latest encounter.

LUNAR EXCURSION

Now the seven angels who had the seven trumpets made ready to blow them. The first angel blew his trumpet, and there followed hail and fire, mixed with blood, which fell on the earth; and a third of the earth was burnt up, and a third of the trees were burnt up, and all green grass was burnt up. The second angel blew his trumpet, and something like a great mountain, burning with fire, was thrown into the sea; and a third of the sea became blood, a third of the living creatures in the sea died, and a third of the ships were destroyed. The third angel blew his trumpet, and a great star fell from heaven, blazing like a torch, and it fell on a third of the rivers and on the fountains of water. The name of the star is Wormwood. A third of the waters became wormwood, and many men died of the water, because it was made bitter. The fourth angel blew his trumpet, and a third of the sun was struck, and a third of the moon, and a third of the stars, so that a third of their light was darkened; a third of the day was kept from shining, and likewise a third of the night. Then I looked, and I heard an eagle crying with a loud voice, as it flew in midheaven, “Woe, woe, woe to those who dwell on the earth, at the blasts of the other trumpets which the three angels are about to blow!”

Revelation, 8:6 -13.

In keeping with my previous experiences and again not surprisingly, my first awareness of this abduction suddenly found me on board the Alien spacecraft. I was somewhat transfixed at the scene that was unfolding before me; I was viewing, unbelievably, our very fast approach to the Lunar surface. I should, at this point in my narrative wish to bring to your attention that since the second abduction by the Aliens, I have relentlessly

tried to recount the transposition from my bed to their spacecraft, but without any real success. On numerous occasions I have retired to the tranquillity of my bedroom, lay down on the bed and tried to force my mind in remembering how they actually transported me to their craft. The most I have been able to achieve is of rapid and vague flashes of dream like situations; a feeling of floating, of passing through solid objects and being transported up and along a beam of pale blue to greyish light. All these sensations I have dismissed as pure fantasy probably as a consequence of and thereby acting as a kind of safety valve to an over stressed brain? Thus returning to this latest episode and as I mentioned earlier, my first recollection was of travelling on the Alien spacecraft that was fast approaching the Lunar surface. I was on this occasion feeling in a strange mood, not at all alarmed or concerned about my fellow travellers. In fact I was very relaxed and felt somewhat light headed. To my surprise I was also humming a tune to myself - not at all in character to an abducted Human on board an Alien spacecraft that was nearing the Moon, I mused to myself. Thus I wondered that perhaps before my ‘consciousness’ aboard the spacecraft, the Aliens had subjected me with one of their mind waves or whatever it is they are able to do to interact with the workings of the Human brain? It seemed they always had the ability to influence my thinking! My thoughts quickly gave way to the awesome image before me. It was truly amazing and I was not too sure whether I was looking out of a window, viewing a large video screen or in fact looking directly through the side of the spacecraft? But whichever, below and before me was a fantastic scene of the Lunar surface rushing up towards us. The impression I had of the view was of quiet desolation and of a ghostly serenity. The overall impression of the surface colouring appeared to be a light to whitish grey in colour; that is, apart from the dark shadows thrown out by the numerous craters and mountain peaks. Here I was fast approaching another celestial body. An environment which was completely different and alien to the World I had just left. Now and again I had the impression of brown or maybe orange, or even a dark green in parts of the landscape, but as we flew over the

surface the most dominant impression was of white, light grey, very dark grey to that of the inky black of the various shadows being cast by the Lunar landscape. At one point I could have sworn I saw a flash of light. Perhaps I had fantasised the brown, orange and green colour traces; had I imagined the flash of light? I was absolutely fascinated at the sight before me and tried hard not to avert my gaze just in case I might miss something. “We are going to land in that large crater.” Alzan-atla suddenly said interrupting my thoughts. From my viewpoint the crater appeared to have very steep sides with quite a ragged edge running around it. I tried to imagine what it would be like when we landed. These thoughts were quickly overtaken again by an increasing sense of awe and I must admit excitement; I realised that I would, unbelievably, soon be on the surface of the Moon. Heck! I was surely in a much more privileged position than the Apollo Astronauts as I was on board an Alien spacecraft and landing on the Moon accompanied by Beings from a very different existence; I cannot tell you how mind boggling these thoughts were - although in awe of these Aliens it was still not registering that I could be in the presence of the creators of our species, indeed of our very Universe! Were these Beings manipulating my mind so that I would not be totally overcome by my situation, was I in a state of denial? I just did not know and just accepted the situation comforting myself by knowing there was little I could do about it anyway. I turned to Alzan-atla and asked if it would be possible to collect some Moon rocks or even dust to take back to Earth for the obvious reason of evidence. The reply came quickly. “Sorry, I doubt it very much although I will discuss it with Dique-zul and Karaz-hu.” Alzan-atla gave the impression that argument or pleading would be futile. “You will have to be content with the coming excursion and relate it to the best of your ability; bearing in mind astronauts who have landed on the Moon will readily identify to the credibility of your tale, such as the subtle observations you will be able to recall that only a visit to the Moon can offer.”

When I turned around to view the scene again I was amazed to find that we had landed as there had been absolutely no sensation of touching down on the Lunar surface. Looking out at the spectacular scene I was stunned at what lay before me. I had expected to see the huge jagged cliffs of the walls of the crater we had landed in, but to my great surprise none were to be seen. There were lots of small rocks and minor craters within close view and what I considered fairly rounded hills in the distance, but no signs of any crater walls? I asked Alzan-atla if we had actually landed in the crater he mentioned, explaining that I could not see any crater walls. “Can you not even guess why this should be?” Alzan-atla quickly replied. “No!” I gasped, feeling somewhat chastised and bemused. “It is simply because the Moon is a lot smaller than the Earth and therefore the horizon is nearer, thus the crater walls are out of sight as they are below the horizon.” Whether it was because I was feeling embarrassed and my thinking was somewhat inhibited, but it was a while before the penny dropped. “Yes of course,” I eventually replied. “I should have realised that!” I cannot remember the exact words but added something on the lines that the sense of occasion had clouded my thinking. I could see Alzan-atla was not taken in by this and slightly shaking his head he disappeared to another part of the spacecraft. I was left alone to my thoughts and looking at the view outside suddenly became aware that I too, would also be an alien myself, in the strange world outside. How long I sat there with my mind free wheeling about the Moon and how close the horizon was I am not sure. But it suddenly dawned on me that I still felt the same weight? Everything I had read and seen about the astronauts walking on the Moon suggested that I should feel a lot lighter. I found that when I jumped up and down, I reached the same miserable height I would achieve back on Earth. Were we really on the Moon I wondered? But then it occurred to me that I had felt the same weight in space and also when we were descending to the Lunar surface; I eventually decided it must be that the spacecraft is obviously producing its own gravitational field. Abruptly, I was

brought back to the ‘land of the living’ so to speak by the presence of Karaz-hu. “Well you must have a thousand and one questions you want to ask me” he gently prodded. “Good grief!” I gasped; he had caught me on the hop again. Yes there were a multitude of questions I wanted to ask him, but nothing readily came to mind and I felt absolutely ridiculous. Then foolishly and without any real thought I stuttered. “This would make a marvellous base for aliens if they intended to attack and conquer the Earth, would it not? The look on Karaz-hu’s face said it all. Karaz-hu answered quietly and somewhat facetiously. “You Mortals have such arrogance and ignorance. Why would an advanced lifeform want to invade and conquer your planet? To an advanced and intelligent species there would be no sense or logic to it, you need only to think it through. You must understand and believe that there are billions of habitable planets throughout your Universe and although you perceive your planet as a special place it has little significance when measured against the cosmological scale of things. Humans see themselves as the pinnacle of all creation and the masters of their planet. This is indeed a grand delusion; they are no more masters of the planet than the fish in the sea. Even with the knowledge, as determined by Earth’s modern astronomers, that there are approximately 70 sextillion (7 x 1022) stars in your Universe does not diminish the arrogance of Mankind. Homo sapiens delude themselves into thinking they are superior because they deem themselves not only as the highest intellectual life-form to inhabit your planet, but because of having developed a technological society. Now although technology can be deemed a significant intellectual step it has little meaning or real purpose if it cannot be put to good use. What is the purpose in high technology, when as a by-product you not only pollute the environment for your own kind but that of other species as well! Explain to me, if at all possible, the sense in developing weapons of mass destruction by which you have the ability to annihilate one another, or indeed most life-forms

on the planet? What really is the point, if you are going to self destruct?” At this point my blood ran cold. “What do you mean by selfdestruct?” I interrupted Karaz-hu. “Yes that is correct,” he said cutting me short. “Humans have ears of cloth and eyes full of dust. They have selective memories and can never be told too many times of their short comings. Look at Earth history as never before has there been a time when the complete planet been threatened by such combined forces as global warming, exploding Human population, huge extinctions of plant and animal species, deforestation, soil erosion, land and sea pollution, over fishing with the obvious and subsequent decline of fish stocks, ozone layer depletion, not to mention man’s cruelty, the lust for wealth, power and his continuing warring. Therefore it will be edifying for you and others of your kind to explore your question more deeply.” I just nodded with a sense of resignation for Karaz-hu to continue. “Do you not have the imagination or common sense to realise that should an advanced alien race wish to conquer your planet there are numerous options open to them. Although you should recognise that your very words betray you by asking such a question. Therefore, in dealing with your question I will indulge you with a few imaginary scenarios that will hopefully illustrate the banality of your thinking; Humans at their current level of maturity should easily identify with this. Now imagine a scenario whereby a relatively advanced technological alien culture has achieved inter-stellar space travel. Having done so, they have not only depleted their home planet of vital resources but polluted their environment as well. These aliens are aggressive by nature, and having only just avoided wiping themselves out with global warfare, they are beginning to colonise the more equitable planets within their own planetary system. With the recent development of their inter-stellar spaceships they are now casting their lustful eyes to other planetary systems with the aim of conquest and acquisition for their own selfish ends. They have little or no interest in other life forms bar their own as they wish to perpetrate their own species. Their forward scouting and

assessment spaceships have encountered your Solar System. Observation has shown that the Earth, except for the present life forms, is suitable for their own development. As a result of their orbital probes which have been monitoring the Earth, the aliens appreciate that if they land and attack, although having superior alien weaponry, Humans will still respond and fight back. This could result with some fatalities on their side notwithstanding the millions of Human fatalities with innumerable rotting carcases to dispose of; disease would be ripe. Thus the aliens would quickly decide that a direct attack would be an arduous and inefficient method in obtaining their ultimate goal. Therefore the invaders wishing to eradicate all the works of the inhabitants and eliminate practically all threatening life would obviously make full use of their advanced alien technology. One such method would be to disturb numerous comets from what your astronomers call the Oort Cloud. Just to remind you, or in case you are unaware of it, this is a vast shell of some thousand billion comets that lies approximately halfway between your Sun and your nearest extra-solar star. The aliens are fully aware that if they only disturbed just one small comet so its trajectory will eventually cause a collision with the Earth your current technology could possibly detect its approach. Humans might be able to, given the circumstances and collective motivation, take the necessary steps to deflect this comet from its collision course with the Earth. Realising this possible response from the Earth, the aliens would disturb numerous suitably sized comets to strike simultaneously at different parts of the globe, devastating cities and towns, causing earthquakes, volcanic activity and creating gigantic tidal waves. With so many comets colliding with different parts of the Earth, your species will find they are totally overwhelmed and it will be impossible to avert extinction; they would not even know the ‘hand’ that brought about their destruction. With the global onslaught of so many comets the dominant species of your planet would be wiped out almost instantaneously. The devastation would be complete with most life eradicated as in the

mass extinction of 250 million years ago. The aliens would then, after all Earthly life has been annihilated, employ planetary engineering to accelerate the conditions for a suitable environment for their own species. Your astronomers will appreciate that should the aliens wish to speed up the ‘comet destroying operation’ they could turn their attention to the Kuiper Belt which is a band of icy bodies lying much closer to the Earth. The Kuiper Belt lies beyond the orbit of Pluto at a distance of between 35 and 1000 astronomical units from your Sun. (See Appendix Seven for definition of astronomical unit). Another possible invasion scenario could be if the aliens decided not to destroy any buildings or constructions. Their intention would purely be to eliminate any threatening and unwanted life forms; the aliens could simply ‘seed’ the Earth’s atmosphere with various deadly viruses that would attack Human and other carefully selected life forms. The ‘Achilles Heel’ of this method, as you will probably guess, would be the enormous predicament created by the millions of dead bodies and carcasses. Even with their advanced technology the aliens would have a sizeable problem on their hands. If the aliens were content to leave the Earth alone for a suitable number of years, nature would take care of the problem, although this process would leave its mark on the efforts of your civilisation, as most buildings and other constructions would obviously deteriorate with the passage of time.” At this point Karaz-hu paused as no doubt he was fully aware of my oncoming mental fatigue. “We will take a rest and have some refreshment, he welcoming invited. This was reminiscent of my other abductions and I knew the drink would revive me and allow concentration for a longer period. “Pity,” I muttered to myself, “they did not have something like this back on Earth.” Having had a considerable rest period and consumed our drinks Karaz-hu continued, knowing that I was now feeling totally refreshed and alert again. “You must fully appreciate that it is only Human self-delusion that envisage alien spacecraft entering the Earth’s atmosphere to take part in deadly combat with your brave defenders. You must realise

the cinematic scenes of aerial combat and the bombing of cities by aliens, are the product of the Human mind. It makes for good, exciting entertainment as perceived by Hollywood and its audiences, but it is far from the truth. To many malevolent alien life forms Humans would have little or no standing and would be regarded with no more respect than many of your kind have for your dolphins and whales. Aliens with evil intent would not expose themselves to any possible danger, physical or biological. They would certainly not satisfy your vanities by making their presence known before eliminating your kind; it simply would serve no real purpose. Finally, I will now indulge you with a final scenario that encompasses aliens and the Asteroid belt. Again you will no doubt find this unsettling and possibly very frightening knowing that it is a credible reality; Humanity would be absolutely powerless to prevent it happening. Now should it be deemed necessary to ‘cleanse’ and then re-inhabit the Earth with their own kind, a ruthless but technically advanced alien culture would have the ability to employ the technique I am about to explain to you. This method would employ material from the Asteroid belt which, as you should know, is situated predominantly between the orbits of Mars and Jupiter. Although I must remind you and stress that any advanced and sophisticated culture would not entertain destroying life on any planet, unless it was becoming a threat or possible danger to other life forms in their region of time and space. Should an alien culture wish to inhabit another planet there are many possibilities in achieving this aim within their own star system or on planets orbiting around nearby stars. You must bear in mind that advanced cultures would contain their population growth to that of a compatible and quality life style fitting their environment; good resource management of their home planet would additionally minimise the requirement to inhabit other celestial bodies. So you see there is very little reason or logic for an advanced culture to inhabit or eliminate life on another planet except under the extreme conditions I have previously mentioned. Thus before I enlighten you to the technology of ‘Planetary Cleansing’ it will be necessary for me to refresh your memory on

how solar eclipses occur. This will enable you to understand and more readily appreciate the deadly potential and fundamental mechanics of Planetary Cleansing technology. On your planet a solar eclipse occurs when the Moon moves between the Sun and the Earth. The Moon casts two shadows onto the Earth known as the umbra, the area of total eclipse and the penumbra, the area of partial eclipse. It is in the area of the umbra that you observe the Sun being totally blotted out and everything being subjected to darkness. Now imagine the situation if, by some means, the motion of the Moon in relation to the Earth could be halted at the time of a total eclipse. This act would have the effect of creating a continuous eclipse for that part of the Earth’s surface. Now disregarding the effects to the tides so I may simplify my point, it would be catastrophic for life within the total shadow area. I want you to concentrate your mind on the implications of the solar energy being cut permanently from that unfortunate part of the Earth. All life that was dependent on photosynthesis would die with all the terrible consequences for all life forms that are dependent upon plants and grasses and I leave it to your imagination of the outcome of such a devastating event. Keeping this scenario in mind I am taking pains to remind you again that if an advanced alien culture wished to terminate life on Earth they would not even consider, let alone take the trouble to make themselves known to you, why should they, since they are going to wipe out all life on Earth? You will appreciate there would be absolutely no point in such an action. It is only Human arrogance and self-importance, which triggers such thoughts. Now, hopefully, that I have your mind focused in the right direction I will enlighten you to the capability and terror of Planetary Cleansing and you must keep in mind, that this is only one of many methods in which life could be terminated on your planet. Therefore having decided to use this method, the aliens would simply travel to the Asteroid belt and select a suitable large asteroid for their base material. Having done this they would attach a ‘Device’ to the surface of the asteroid.

In keeping with our Armageddon scenario we will call the device that will be attached to the surface of the asteroid the ‘Doomsday Device’. This device consists of a very sophisticated computer, mineral converter, discoid membrane production unit and energy cells. There is also a suitable drive and navigation system for moving the asteroid through space. You will appreciate that in describing this machine to you I am using terms you will understand. For example, when I say ‘sophisticated computer’ it is not a computer, as you will understand it, such as having a processor chip, a motherboard, random access memory, and hard disk et cetera. The computer I am attempting to describe is an Electro-chemical, neurone-organic, computational, crystallised thinking and decision making concept having the potential of at least eighty thousand of your most powerful personal computers. It would be correct to describe it as an intelligent life form albeit programmed and conditioned to strict parameters. I will not go any further in attempting to describe the various parts of the Doomsday Device as the science and technology will be way beyond you. I can see from the blank look on your face that my description of the ‘sophisticated computer’ has left you numb. Do not be depressed, for I can assure you that your most brilliant engineers and physicists would react the same, as the science and technology involved is even beyond their understanding and imagination. Try and imagine the difficulty of explaining a guided nuclear missile to a great mind such as Isaac Newton, as for all his brilliance and intellectual capacity it would be impossible to do so in a practical time limit. Where and how would you begin to explain the workings of the nuclear weapon, the computerised control and guidance system, the propulsion unit and the materials used to construct the weapon et cetera? Exactly where would you begin to impart this knowledge? Would you start with a lecture on electricity and electronics, perhaps the propulsion unit or the computer and guidance system? No doubt you would leave the nuclear weapon theory to last? Yes, I am being facetious, but this is purely to drive the message home to you of the

great barrier there is between cultures that do not share the same technology. Therefore, the terms I use will be sufficient alone for me to describe, and for you to understand the concept of Planetary Cleansing. Thus having deployed the Doomsday Device on the asteroid, the computer, navigation and drive system will be programmed to steer the asteroid from its orbit to that of one suitable between the Earth and the Sun. An orbit between Venus and Earth would be chosen. The selected orbit would be such that the shadow from the artificially generated disc of the Doomsday Device would completely cover the surface of the Earth.” See Appendix Three for planetary orbital information. At this juncture I was compelled to stop Karaz-hu as he was beginning to lose me. “I am sorry to interrupt you but I am becoming confused. I think I can follow you to the point when you put the Doomsday Device on an asteroid. I think I am still with you when the asteroid is steered to an orbit between the Earth and Venus, but then you are beginning to lose me.” Without waiting for a reply from Karaz-hu I continued. “I am not sure what you mean when you talk about an artificially generated disc and its shadow engulfing the Earth?” This time Karaz-hu interrupted me and replied. “Yes, I am sorry I have out-paced your thought process, please allow me to explain.” Karaz-hu then hesitated as awaiting an approval, so I nodded my head for him to continue. “The whole point of the enterprise is to artificially create a solar eclipse, although an eclipse with a fatal difference. In this particular case, the purpose will be to create a shadow that will completely cover the whole of the Sun facing surface of the Earth, thus cutting off all solar radiation. Now as I explained earlier the consequences of such an act would be disastrous for all life forms on your planet within this shadow. To bring about such an event would mean constructing a huge disc which would be placed at a suitable position between the Earth and the Sun. The size of the disc would be determined by its distance

from the Earth; but you should recognise the minimum diameter of the disc will be many times that of the Earth.” I gesticulated that I now understood what he was getting at and then enquired how would such a large construction be achieved? Karaz-hu quickly replied. “The asteroid would be placed in orbit and controlled by the Doomsday Device so as to keep itself at a suitable point between the Sun and the Earth. Having achieved correct orbital placement the mineral converter of the device would be activated, braking down and taking material from the Asteroid; at the same time diminishing the Asteroid. The discoid membrane production unit would, from the material supplied from the mineral converter, start to produce a thin, membrane, taking the shape of a disc of exceptional strength. The energy required to displace the Asteroid from its ‘home orbit’ would come from fuel cells of enormous capacity, built within the Doomsday Device unit. Also the initial growth of the discoid membrane would be dependent on this power. Once the discoid membrane had reached a diameter of about a hundred miles, the unit computer would signal the fuel cells to shut down, as the side of the hundred mile discoid membrane facing the Sun would now be absorbing solar energy. The whole side of the membrane facing the Sun is made up of a complex array of very sophisticated solar cells, which grow in number, as the membrane gets larger. All of the energy gathered by these solar cells is suitably converted and used by the Doomsday Device, restoring fully the capacity of the fuel cells, keeping orbital stability, and sustaining the growth of the membrane. Within the thickness of the membrane and being reproduced at an incredible rate are many miniature discoid membrane production units. These units are fed by hundreds of thousands of small channels, which feed material from the mineral converter.

The Doomsday Device would be placed in an orbit between the Earth and Venus. The size of the Doomsday disc and distance from the Earth would be calculated so as to cast a shadow over the whole of the Earth’s surface.

The membrane would double its area at set intervals and grow over a predetermined time to a disc many hundreds of thousands of miles across sufficient to satisfy its purpose. The ultimate area of the disc would be dependent on its orbital placement, that is, the further the disc is placed from the Earth the greater its diameter will have to be for a predetermined shadow size. You should recognise that during a solar eclipse only a portion of the Earth’s surface is in complete darkness, and it is that part of the Earth which is in the umbra of the Moon’s shadow. As I mentioned earlier, a solar eclipse occurs when the Moon comes between the Sun and the Earth. Although the Sun is 400 times bigger in diameter than the Moon, it is also nearly 400 times farther away from the Earth than is the Moon, thus the apparent size of the Sun and Moon are such that there is practically a complete overlap of the Sun’s surface. Should any celestial object damage the discoid membrane, it would have the ability to repair itself in an extremely short time. The extent of the damage repair would of course be limited to the source material supplied by the Asteroid. Thus if it was judged liable to such a level of critical damage, accidental or intentional, a sufficiently

large Asteroid or number of Asteroids would be employed and placed at the appropriate orbital point. The orbital placement and disc diameter would be determined such that the umbra shadow cast by the disc would more than fully envelope the surface of the Earth facing the Sun. This simple act will obviously plunge the whole globe into darkness and as a result there would be continuous night across all the oceans and continents of the Earth. The only possible relief from the effect would be when the Moon was outside the umbra shadow and not in the shadow of the Earth. Although a ‘disc grown’ in orbit nearer the Earth could possibly be determined to encompass the full orbital motion of the Moon as well. I will let your imagination reign to the extensive impact this event would have to life on Earth as the lack of all light and heat would be catastrophic. The Earth’s climate is dependent upon the heat from the Sun and the act of cutting off solar energy would soon cause a cooling down to the temperature of inter-stellar space of -2700 Centigrade. All photosynthesis would end with the ultimate demise of all plant life; not that photosynthesis would have any meaning as the plunging temperatures would ensure death of most living things. The lack of solar energy would ensure the surface of the Earth and all the oceans, seas and lakes would completely freeze over. It would only be due to the ocean floor ‘hot spot’s such as thermal vents that fluid water would remain under the ice. The global climatic conditions resulting from this event would be to render most life extinct in a surprisingly short time. Over the surface of the Earth volcanism would still prevail at the edge of the tectonic plates and the only vestiges of life that could survive would be limited to the restricted areas around thermal vents on the ocean floor and that within hot springs and possibly within the craters and on the slopes of volcanoes, semi-active or otherwise. In the beginning, Earth astronomers and scientists would soon detect this disc growing in space, but what in the very limited time left to them on Earth, would they make of it?

Even if they did deduce it was of intelligent design there would be very little they could do about it, and theories would abound as to what it all meant? Your species would go to its grave without solving its greatest enigma; this would be the horror of the Doomsday Device and Planetary Cleansing. The disc would be left in its orbital placement for what may be defined as a cleansing period. When this time interval had elapsed the Doomsday Device would reverse all its functions, shrinking the membrane and all of its associated parts to the size and constituents of the original Asteroid. Having completed this task the reconstituted asteroid would be moved through space to its original location in the Asteroid belt. The Doomsday Device would then emit a retrieval signal and would eventually be recovered leaving not the slightest trace of any alien intervention into the demise of life on Earth. With Sunlight returning to the Earth warming the atmosphere, frozen oceans and land, the primitive life that had survived in the close proximity to the tectonic hot spots around the globe would start evolving and spread slowly out across the nearly warmed landscape. To accelerate the conditions compatible to the aliens, a massive programme would be implemented to make the planet habitable. Artificial means would be employed to accelerate the thawing of the ice sheets coupled with the seeding and planting of grasses, flowers trees and shrubs suitable to the changing climatic conditions. Various life forms would be gradually introduced to the atmosphere, seas and land, again suitable to the changing climatic conditions. This planetary engineering would cover an appreciable time scale in your terms, but to an advanced alien culture it would have no conceivable significance and is a difficult concept for you to accept. Let me at this point stress again that this is purely a hypothetical scenario for your appreciation. It is necessary for me to reiterate, the only time when possible intervention or contact would be contemplated by an advanced and enlightened alien culture, would be to save a species from itself or other planetary threatening situation; then only if the species would have merit in the saving. Indeed the reason I am taking the trouble to explain all this to you is because your kind has merit as an integral part of the Master Plan.

The increasing dangers facing your World and most life forms upon it are predominantly due to the nature and works of Homo sapiens. So do not take any consolation in the fact that I have intimated we will intervene in the pending destruction of life on your planet; it is because your progress to a higher plain of existence has been very disappointing and therefore it will be necessary.” Karaz-hu paused and gazed quizzically at me. As I was again overwhelmed in what he was telling me, I could not think of anything to say at that moment and returned his questioning gaze with a blank look! The quizzical look disappeared from Karaz-hu’s face on meeting my expression and he just continued with his dialogue. My only thoughts were that their memory stimulating techniques would ensure my absorption and retention now, with release of the information at the appropriate time back on Earth, which prompted him to continue. “One horror to threaten life on your planet is much nearer home and could be the sudden displacement of the Earth’s crust? This geophysical manifestation would have dire repercussions if land masses moved suddenly from temperate areas to those of a far colder nature.” This last remark really made me sit up but before I could interrupt Karaz-hu, he quickly continued. “I can appreciate that it is not reassuring knowledge for you to realise that the lithosphere, the solid crust of the Earth can move in this manner. The lithosphere can indeed moved very suddenly over the upper part of the Earth’s mantle, which your geologists term the asthenosphere. You should be aware that the lithosphere has indeed moved during the relatively recent past history of your planet. You must appreciate that in some places the Earth’s crust is less than 30 miles thick whereby the layer underlying the crust can be envisaged as a lubricating layer. The lithosphere is made up of about half a dozen or so large plates and a number of smaller plates. These plates are continuously in very slow motion both with respect to one another and to the Earth’s axis of rotation. Virtually all seismic, volcanic and tectonic activity is localised around the plate margins and is associated with differential motion between adjacent plates.

The largest plates are called the Eurasian, Indian, Pacific, American and African plates. The slow movement of these plates is known as the theory of Plate Tectonics and this theory was established in the 1960s to explain the phenomena of sea floor spreading, continental drift and the formation of the major physical features of the Earth’s surface. At the margins of the plates where they collide or move apart, major landforms such as mountains, volcanoes, ocean trenches and ocean ridges are created. Spreading rates at the ridge crests vary from 1 cm per year per ridge flank in the vicinity of Iceland to 9 cm per year in the equatorial Pacific Ocean. Thus the land masses are moving very, very slowly over millions of years. Looking at the surface of your planet it is easy to see that the eastern side of South America follows very nicely the contours of the western side of Africa, whereby millions of years ago these land masses were joined together. Indeed your geologists claim that millions of years ago, all the continents once existed as one single land mass known as Pangaea. This single land mass split into two land masses approximately 200 million years ago. These land masses were known as Laurasia (the northern land mass) and Gondwanaland (the southern land mass). As aeons passed these land masses in turn split and moved apart so as to become the land areas that now cover the face of your planet as you see it today. But remember, from our earlier contact and discussions with you, it is important that you keep in mind what was earlier revealed to you; we are your Gods and we created the Earth 280 million years ago. There is plenty of evidence strewn about the surface of your planet to testify to the catastrophic events that have taken part in your past history. If we take the northern hemisphere, as an example, then there are plenty of sites that will bear witness to past cataclysmic events. In the detritus of Alaska there is to be found the remains of a jumble of animals. The bones and flesh of camels, horses, assess, mammoth, deer, sabre-toothed tigers, rhinoceros, lions, bison, bears and wolves are all mingled and mashed together. Where on your planet do you find such a diversity of animals living in close proximity to one another today?”

I was just about to answer Karaz-hu when he quickly continued. “You do not! Some catastrophic agency was obviously responsible for such a slaughter and the gathering together of so many species. This unusual conglomeration of animal carcasses is not confined to Alaska as numerous sites can be found throughout Northern Siberia. Where again the torn, contorted, mashed and twisted carcasses of antelope, bison, rhinoceros, horses, lions, hyena, giant deer, bison, sabre-tooth tiger et cetera are frozen together. Indeed there are frozen mammoth graveyards, which are mined for their ivory. The bodies of mammoths have been recovered with grass still in their mouths, which give evidence to an instant death. The disaster which overtook all these animals was sudden and devastating. Unfortunately I do not have the time to dwell deeper on these matters but more details will be revealed in future contacts with Mortals. However, I would like to add, that comets and asteroids have also been the harbingers of death for many plant and animal extinctions over millions of years on your planet. You are probably aware that it was one of these celestial bodies that triggered the mass extinction of not only the dinosaurs 65 millions years ago but of many other species including marine creatures such as ammonites. It should be noted that the dinosaurs were already in decline at this time. Thus the advent of a large asteroid that crashed into the Earth creating the 180 kilometre wide Chicxulub crater on the Yucatan Peninsular, Mexico, coupled with large scale volcanism and other unusual global events signed their final death warrant. These creatures perished over a period of a few million years, which is short in geological terms. You should also recognise that comets have been responsible for many plagues amongst your species; Mankind never learns from history. In the past when a comet appeared in the sky the ancients regarded it as a portent of evil that foretold the coming of pestilence, plagues and death. The ancients were privy to the knowledge of long lost civilisations that were well educated in all the sciences. These lost civilisations were well aware that a comets nucleus was composed of dust and ice, which your present day astronomers refer to as a ‘dirty snowball’ of ice with a dusty crust. They were also

aware that the nucleus carried bacteria and viruses such that if the Earth, during its orbital motion, should pass through the tail of a comet then the Earth’s atmosphere would be seeded with these bacteria and viruses. This would result in the occasional outbreak of horrendous plagues. You have learnt from our earlier contact with you that Homo sapiens have been created in our image; the image of us, your Gods. You have not evolved as shown by your science. You exist in a Virtual Reality Universe. I hear you ask, then why did you not make us perfect and it would have solved all problems. The answer is not simple or in any way comprehensible to the current development of your species. You are part of a Master Plan of which you will have no understanding. But like a seed planted in the ground, you need time to grow to maturity. Some seeds prosper whilst others do not. But in the growing, all seeds require nurturing to enable them to develop and grow to the maximum of their potential. This is why throughout Human history we have, unknown to your species, seeded minds and where necessary actually intervened in World affairs; although I should stress that we do not interfere with Human decision making; you have the gift of free will and as such decide your own future for good or evil. Nevertheless we govern the laws of nature to our own end as determined in the Master Plan, the basic logic of which is beyond Human comprehension. For example, we have manipulated the weather and as a result influenced the outcome of a significant number of events thereby ‘guiding’ the course of history. If you care to think through what I have just told you there are many examples that will come to mind such as the Spanish Armada, the Crimean War, the attempted invasion of Japan by the Mongols et cetera. Study World history and the light will shine on numerous seemingly miraculous and enigmatic events. The one example I will indulge you with is the Battle of Hastings in 1066 as it was instrumental in forging the World of the 21st Century. It is because of the Norman Conquest that Britain eventually ruled an empire upon which the Sun never set. More significantly and

consequentially it should be recognised that as a result of the AngloSaxons being defeated at the Battle of Hastings that English (American) is predominantly the language of the World’s current and only super power; whilst recognising that it is the dominant language of countries such as Canada, Australia and New Zealand. For reasons extremely complex and obtuse for you to understand it was necessary for the Anglo-Saxons and England to fall under the heel of William of Normandy. But the troops of Duke William’s army comprising Norman, Bretons, French and Flemish were no match for Harold’s army which consisted of Huscarls, Thegns and Fyrdmen. The Huscarls or House-carls were professional troops that were well-trained and paid for their services. Indeed, such was their fearsome reputation, skill and loyalty they were the elite body guard to King Harold Godwineson. The main weapon of the Huscarls was the battle-axe and was used in hand-to-hand fighting or it could be hurled at the enemy. The battle-axe was more than capable of cutting off a limb or a head in one single blow and during combat the axe was usually wielded with both hands; this left the warrior somewhat unprotected as he could not carry a shield to protect himself against the enemy! The other weapon used by the Huscarls was a long double-edged sword with a shallow groove running along the blade on both sides to make it lighter. The Huscarls wore a pointed helmet with a nose guard and the shape of the helmet helped to deflect blows from sword attacks. Other armour worn by the Huscarls was a short mail-coat called a Byrnie and the sleeves of which were left short to enable freedom of movement in battle; at the time the Huscarls could rightly claim to be the best warriors in Europe. When the Huscarls were armed with a shield and battle-axe they could join together and use their shields as a shield wall. The shield wall did not just stand still! To use their battle-axes the Huscarls would move apart slightly giving them space to swing their axes at the enemy; parts of the shield wall would move forward together to attack the foe. Regarding the Norman invasion of England, we the Gods, recognised that if Duke William had landed when he intended during

the summer of 1066 the Anglo-Saxon forces would have annihilated the Norman army so we intervened by creating weather conditions that kept the Normans in France. The meteorological situation we had created also served to diminish Harold’s forces inasmuch he was forced to disband his land and sea forces during September of 1066. During the late autumn of 1066 King Harald Hardraada of Norway summoned a large army and crossed the North Sea in 300 ships. It was fortuitous that the very same northerly winds that kept Duke Williams forces confined to port assisted the Norwegians (Vikings) as they sailed south. The Norwegian fleet was eventually joined by another small fleet headed by Harold’s rebellious brother Tosti. The combined fleets then sailed further south and then up the Rivers Humber and Ouse. Harald’s army sailed up the River Humber; just outside York they met resistance in the form of Earl Edwin, his brother Morcar and their forces. Although the Norwegians prevailed it was not without a long and bloody battle causing heavy casualties on both sides; both Earl Edwin and Morcar managed to escape but not before many English troops were slain or drowned in the nearby marshes. Having taken York the victorious Norwegian army moved south and camped at a place called Stamford Bridge. Meanwhile King Harold had already heard of the Norwegians pending invasion and had hurried north with his Huscarls collecting further forces (the Fryd) from the shires as he rushed northwards. Harold’s forces covered nearly two hundred miles in four days and took the Vikings by surprise at their encampment near Stamford Bridge on 25th September 1066. Apart from the surprise appearance of King Harold and his forces Hardraada had no stomach for engaging with Harold and his legendary bodyguard, the fearsome Huscarls. Thus Tosti was sent to negotiate but when no agreement could be reached Harold and his forces attacked killing Tosti, Hardraada and almost all of the Vikings in a bloody massacre. It was King Harold’s greatest victory and one of the most decisive battles of the middle ages which finally ended the Viking age.

Whilst Harold celebrated his defeat of Hardraada in Yorkshire, Duke William’s fleet was confined at St Valery by the same northerly winds that brought King Harald of Norway to England. Indeed, Duke William resorted to desperate prayers to stem these winds; then, as if by a miracle, the wind veered around to the south on 27th September 1066 which prompted William to set sail immediately and he crossed the English Channel overnight with his army and landed at Pevensey on 28th September 1066.” At this point Karaz-hu stopped his narration and looking directly at me said. “No doubt you will have accepted that the meteorological conditions were as a result of our intent and I am curious if you have any comment?” Well! What could I say? I was utterly dumfounded by his unbelievable and outrageous claims. “Never mind, I must move on,” Karaz-hu quickly countered and thus he continued. “On being informed of Duke William’s landing at Pevensey Harold marched his troops south as fast as possible, stopping at London for reinforcements, before setting up his position on 13th October 1066 along the Senlac Ridge, half a mile in front of Caldbec Hill, north of Hastings. The Battle of Hastings, 14th October 1066 raged all day with the English almost pulling off another stunning victory. But it was not to be, the effects of a long forced march 190 miles northwards, a hard fought battle against a Viking army and then another forced march of 190 miles again southwards, had taken their toll. Nevertheless it is very important to recognise the valour and fighting spirit of the AngloSaxons. The Normans would have lost the battle had we not again intervened by seeding the Saxon infantry with seeds of over confidence; this resulted in the Saxon infantry behaving in a reckless manner. Initially the Norman arrows were deflected harmlessly by Saxon shields and the first Norman cavalry charge was shattered by Saxon axes and spears. But overcome by confidence the Saxon infantry foolishly pursued the retreating cavalry and were cut down mercilessly by Norman reserves. The battle continued relentlessly all

day with the Saxons holding their own against repeated cavalry charges by the Normans. Recognising the heavy casualties his cavalry was sustaining and also what had happened earlier in the day, William, just before evening, feigned a general withdrawal with the result that again many Saxons broke rank to pursue the cavalry. Thus the Norman knights wheeled around and slaughtered the Saxon infantry in open ground; Harold and his trusty Huscarls remained intact and a formidable force on the ridge. At this point, William ordered his archers to shoot their arrows into the flanks and into the air above the Saxons and not at their shields, as they had previously done. This had the desired effect. King Harold was brought down and the Saxon forces panicked and retreated into the gathering dusk except for the Royal Huscarls who fought to the death around the body of their dead King and his personal banner, ‘The Fighting Man’. Your historians will claim that the Battle of Hastings was a very close-run thing and that Harold lost due to the fortunes of war. Indeed many historians are puzzled why Harold did not take advantage offered by the collapse of the Norman left wing and the rumours of William’s death during the battle. But as you are now aware, we, your Gods, can sow seeds into the Human mind possibly altering a mindset with the probable consequence of changing the course of an event or events. As you have been informed earlier, Humans have ultimately the privilege of free will and as such do make the final choice; thus it was with Harold, William and the Saxon infantry. But the scene was set, so to speak, by our control of the weather in diminishing and weakening the Anglo-Saxon forces.” Karaz-hu gave me a long hard look culminating in a hand gesture that implied he had said his piece. “We must now prepare you for an excursion outside. Having lectured you for long enough, we will now allow you the privilege of actually walking on the surface of the Moon. An experience, as you well know, is currently limited to only a select few of your kind.” Well what could I say? I was feeling tired and my head was still buzzing from this latest lecture; although most of it had gone over my head. After a very short while though, I was pleasantly surprised to

experience a calmness settle over me. I lost the feeling of fatigue. Karaz-hu was obviously aware of this fact as he gestured me toward what I perceived as a wall in the spacecraft. As I neared the wall I suddenly found myself in another environment. Moving about the craft is a most peculiar experience such that when you are in a specific room and move off in any direction normal visual feedback becomes somewhat meaningless. A good example of this phenomenon is when you approach what you perceive as a wall of a room you suddenly find yourself in a different environment. I use the word environment because that exactly appears to be the case. Whilst being taken to the part of the spacecraft where I was to be prepared for my Lunar excursion, we passed through areas that I can only describe as control rooms, restaurants, laboratories and, unbelievably, gardens with fountains and streams running through them. Therefore I obviously had no sense of direction or the slightest inclination of where in the spacecraft I was in relation to the other areas. Thus you will find it as no surprise that I always remained in the area wherever one of the Beings guided me. The Aliens had no problem in moving about their craft, or at least gave that impression. Finally we reached what appeared to be something of a changing room. When, as usual, Karaz-hu interrupted my thoughts. “Please put this on.” Whereupon he handed me what seemed to be a onepiece latex suit. “This, in your terms, is fundamentally a spacesuit and it will protect you from the hostile conditions outside and maintain your correct body temperature.” I must admit the suit fitted me like a glove and I felt very warm and comfortable inside it. The next thing Karaz-hu handed me were a pair of light, but thick soled boots stating. “These are to help you overcome the effects of the Moon’s low gravity.” I was taken aback as I had expected the boots to be very heavy as an aid in combating weak gravity. “Not so!” Karaz-hu replied in answer to my thoughts. “The boots are technologically capable of simulating Earth’s gravity on the Lunar surface; that is something that will confound your scientists back on Earth, will it not?” Karaz-hu chuckled. But before I could reply I was handed believe it or not, a goldfish style helmet

with a small pack attached to it. Karaz-hu in noticing my expression interjected. “Do not be so surprised, it will afford you an excellent view. It will also respond to the level of light instantly and if necessary darken over should you be foolish enough or accidentally look directly at the Sun, it will protect your eyes and maintain normal vision.” Next I was handed a small pack that fitted to the back of my spacesuit whilst interlocking with the small pack attached to my space helmet. Karaz-hu then ran an ‘examining’ eye over me saying. “You are now prepared for your Lunar excursion. The pack attached to the helmet and interlocking with your backpack will supply your required atmosphere for the duration that you will be out on the surface. The packs also facilitate communication between us as individuals and also with the spacecraft.” I was amazed that two small packs could do all these things and I was very impressed with my ‘spacesuit’, I felt very lightly dressed with absolutely no restraint to my movements. I had suddenly started to feel apprehensive and concerned at how I would cope out on the Moon’s surface? “Now there is nothing for you to be worried about, just behave normally,” Karaz-hu tried to assure me. I did not have to wait long as an aperture suddenly appeared in the side of the spacecraft and there before my gaze was the Lunar surface. Karaz-hu sensing my thoughts, reassured me again and taking me by the arm he led me onto the Moon’s surface. I had only taken one step away from the spaceship when I froze. Fear had suddenly swept over me as it really hit home that I was actually on the Moon’s surface. “Do not be alarmed.” I heard a familiar and reassuring voice comforting me. Turning around my gaze met Alzan-atla who was also on the Lunar surface with us. They both then took me by my arms and led me further away from the spacecraft. With both their reassurances and guidance it was not long before I was walking unattended and beginning to enjoy my experience. Although my boots were light I quickly discovered as Karaz-hu had intimated that I could almost walk in the same fashion as I could back on Earth. I did not have to adopt a gait as I had seen in the

films of the astronauts walking on the Moon during the Apollo missions; I did, though, detect lightness in my arms and the upper part of my body that slightly affected my upper bodily movements. Among the many things that impressed was the deep blackness of the Lunar sky, that is, the portion of the Lunar sky away from the glare of the Sun. The stars shone brilliantly, but the space between the stars was a deep inky blackness. As I moved about the surface I kicked up a sizeable amount of dust, which seemed to have a texture similar to that of cement dust; a lot of which stuck to the lower parts of my space suit. The hills in the distance looked surprisingly quite rounded and again I was surprised not to be able to see any of the walls of the crater in which we had landed, even though I was mentally (and reminded by Karaz-hu) aware the Lunar horizon is a lot closer to one than the horizon on Earth due to the difference in size of these celestial bodies. It was not long, as we moved about the surface, before we came across a large boulder. As we approached it I noticed a number of small rocks strewn about the ground. One particular rock that caught my attention was about the size of a tennis ball. I was thinking that it would be marvellous if I could only take this particular rock back to Earth with me, as it would certainly silence any doubt to my adventures here on the Moon. “Pick it up!” Karaz-hu suddenly interrupted my thoughts. “You may take it with you and it will give your doubters something to think about when you return to Earth, will it not?” I was taken aback by this response as till now I had the definite impression that the Aliens would allow me to return to Earth with no more than the knowledge they were imparting to me. In fact, Alzanatla had confirmed these thoughts earlier although I reminded myself that he did say he would discuss the issue. Karaz-hu interrupted my thoughts again repeating. “Pick it up, for when you return to Earth you will have a souvenir of your walk on the Moon.” This time I did not need any further encouragement and excitedly plucked the rock from the Moon’s surface. “Can I actually return to Earth with this rock?” I virtually pleaded with Karaz-hu. “Yes! of course, I have just told you so, now how much more convincing do

you need?” He chided me. “I did not think you were going to allow me to return to Earth with anything substantial to testify to my encounters with you. Indeed, Alzan-atla had more or less confirmed this when we were landing on the Moon,” I replied in an attempt of self-justification. “Anything substantial!” Karaz-hu retorted, “Do you not think the information we have been imparting to you is substantial enough?” Suddenly I felt somewhat ungrateful and a little bit confused. “I am sorry but I did not mean it to sound like that! It is just that I am more comfortable with having something tangible that I can show people as evidence of my encounters with you. I find it hard to accept that I will remember all of the things you have been telling me about.” Karaz-hu stared at me hard when Alzan-atla interrupted saying, “Never mind it is of no real consequence, you have your rock to return to Earth with.” He then indicated that we should move on across the Lunar surface and then back to the spacecraft. How far we had wandered away from the spacecraft was difficult to tell, but knowing that I had my little piece of the Moon I was more than content to return. Before I knew it our little excursion was over and I was back inside the spacecraft. Having taken off my spacesuit Alzan-atla volunteered to look after my Lunar souvenir. I had not noticed that Karaz-hu had disappeared and Alzan–atla beckoned me to follow him. We entered a rather resplendent environment that echoed my mental image of what a palace should offer in the terms of luxury and finery. Alzan-atla took me to a couch and indicated for me to relax on it. Having done so Alzan-atla assured me he would take care of my Moon rock; then making his excuses, he disappeared to another part of the spaceship. Suddenly I became aware of Karaz-hu’s presence and he was also reclining on a couch a short distance away. “That was odd?” I thought to myself, as I had not noticed Karaz-hu when Alzan-atla and I entered the room. But before I could conjure up some answers my thoughts were interrupted by Karaz-hu.

“Before we return you to Earth I wish to discuss dreams and Angels with you.” Karaz-hu said in a very matter of fact way. Before I could respond he enquired. “Did you realise that Mozart claimed a lot of his inspiration came to him in dreams and the design of the sewing machine came to its inventor in a dream?” Shaking my head I replied. “No, I really cannot say I did.” Continuing Karaz-hu added. “Many, many people have been contacted by us, your Gods, in dreams and some have acted on the revelations offered to them whilst others have not. Not all dreams have been understood by the recipients and as such have required a seer, holy man or some such person to interpret their meaning. Nebuchadnezzar the King of ancient Babylon had such a dream that he could not understand. He had a dream in which he saw a brilliant image that had a head of fine gold and a breast and arms of silver. The belly and thighs were made of brass; the legs of iron and the feet were part of iron and part of clay. Nebuchadnezzar then witnessed a stone that struck the feet of the image, breaking them as they were made of iron and clay. As a consequence the rest of the image was destroyed and broken into fine pieces and were cast like chaff upon the wind. The stone that struck the image became a great mountain and filled the whole Earth. It took the prophet, Daniel to explain the dream to Nebuchadnezar. As a person from a Christian country you should also be fully aware of Joseph’s interpretation of the seven healthy ears of corn and seven fat cows and that of the seven sickly ears of corn and cows the Pharaoh of Egypt had dreamt about.” Before I could even nod my head in agreement, Karaz-hu was off again at ‘full steam’. “Many of your recent World leaders have been influenced and guided by their dreams. Throughout Human history various cultures have embraced dreams with some believing the dream world is as real as the waking World. Now, with your knowledge of how the Universe functions and exists you should embrace your dreams. You should realise now that your dream worlds are as real as your conscious World. How many times have you encountered the expression, ‘It was so real…but I guess I must have been dreaming’, or words to that effect when people have an unexplained

experience?” “Lots and lots of times,” I quickly replied using this as a lever to interrupt him. “I do not understand where we are heading with this? You are quoting examples from different stages in history and you communicate with people in their sleep, so what? From everything you have told me about life and the Universe, this does not come entirely as a surprise.” I really could not believe I had just said all that as it sounded somewhat impudent and my thoughts were quickly confirmed by the look on Karaz-hu’s face. “Do not be alarmed it is simply a side-affect and a normal reaction of your time with us; please be at ease with yourself.” He then put his hand on my brow and I suddenly found myself slowly relaxing. “Good, that is good, just calm yourself.” Karaz-hu comforted. Thus he then continued. “Over the centuries we have not only communicated and appeared to Humans in their dreams but also during their conscious moments. We have appeared in many forms, which Humans have interpreted as Heavenly Messengers or Angels. Now I have told you we do not interfere with Human affairs and whilst this is generally true there have been occasions where it has been deemed necessary. As an example the Angel of Mons was witnessed by many British and German troops during the First World War. Another example was the slaughter of a large number of Assyrians warriors! It was necessary to diminish the forces of Sennacherib the King of Assyria, whereby an ‘Angel of the Lord’ struck down 185,000 Assyrians. You may call this angel Mal’akh and no doubt you will perceive some Angels as ominous spirits! The many reasons for these intrusions are complex and as your time with us is limited we do not have time for a fuller explanation; suffice to identify them as manifestations of our presence.” At this point Alzan-atla suddenly appeared in the room with drinks for both of us. I must admit I welcomed the break but was surprised in seeing him whilst noticing that my drink was of a different colour to that of Karaz-hu. Alzan-atla must have read my mind as he quickly offered. “Do not be concerned, your drink has a sedative in it and you will enjoy and experience a short sleep; the purpose of which is to not only enforce

the knowledge Karaz-hu has been imparting to you, but also to prepare you for an Angelic experience.” That last remark really did it for me and I could feel my pulse beginning to race. What did he mean by an Angelic experience? This time Alzan-atla put his hand on my brow, telling me to relax and indicating for me to drink. I had only taken a few sips when I felt myself drifting into darkness and the comfort of sleep, with Alzan-atla’s voice fading slowly into the background. I was awoken abruptly with Karaz-hu shaking my shoulders and saying. “We have just landed on Earth and you must come with me!” He then led me quickly to what appeared to be a small room. I was still trying to fully wake up when suddenly an aperture appeared in the side of the spacecraft revealing the hostility of the weather outside. It was obvious a terrible sand storm was raging outside, although miraculously, the effects of which were being kept at bay by what seemed to be an invisible force field apparently within the aperture and protecting the interior of the craft. Karaz-hu beckoned towards the exit and I could not help noticing a slight smile as if amused by the incredulous look on my face. "We are not going outside!" I exclaimed, "It must be hell out there?" As I again turned to look at the raging sand a voice replied. "Yes, you are correct, it is an unwelcome environment,” and then a different voiced added. “But it is necessary." Karaz-hu had suddenly and mysteriously disappeared only to be replaced by the presence of Dique-zul and Alzan-atla. "Come let us go,” added Alzan-atla. “Wait a minute I protested I have only just woken up and…” I did not have time to finish my sentence before I was unceremoniously ushered from the warm womb of the spacecraft into the hellish nightmare outside. I cursed inwardly as the sand stung every part of exposed flesh and clenched my fists as the wind robbed me of breath. Dique-zul and Alzan-atla were pushing me forward in what direction I did not know as my head was bent downward protecting my eyes and assisting my breathing. I turned around briefly in an attempt to ask Dique-zul where Karaz-hu had gone; why were they doing this and where were we heading? But the wind stole my conversation and I could only just

make out their shapes in the swirling sand as they gesticulated for me to keep going forward. An hour or two must have elapsed when I felt a hand on my shoulder and turning around my eyes met an expressionless look from Alzanatla. "We will rest here awhile and gather our strength." His voice was just about intelligible before being swept away by the wind. We all huddled down in the sand with our backs to the wind. Not a word was spoken for quite a while then Dique-zul lifted his head and asked me if I had any idea where I might be? "Not a clue I replied, but it feels like nothing on Earth.” Both Dique-zul and Alzan-atla started chuckling. "Like nothing on Earth you say." chortled Dique-zul as he lost his balance due to the wind and fell sideways onto the sand. "Oh! No!" I replied nervously, suddenly assuming their perceived mockery meant I had jokingly guessed correctly? "Have patience, all will be revealed to you in the due course of time. Now we had better move on." Alzan-atla's voice returned to a serious level and after assisting Dique-zul to his feet they both ushered me back into the lead again. Unbelievably the wind seemed to be gathering more strength with the swirling sand intensifying its cruel hatred for my exposed flesh. I now had great difficulty when I occasionally turned my head in spotting either Dique-zul or Alzan-atla. They would be just hardly visible indicating for me to press on and in the next moment would vanish from view. Muttering to myself I pushed blindly onwards to whatever lay ahead of me. Suddenly I sensed I was all alone, Dique-zul and Alzan-atla had completely disappeared, I was surrounded by a wall of wind driven sand which seemed determined to erase all flesh from my bones and by now my lips had become agonisingly dry. There was unwelcome sand and grit in my mouth and my nostrils; in fact the sand was searching out all my body orifices. It was not long before a strong salty taste enveloped my mouth triggering me to think, rightly or wrongly that I was possibly near the coast? What is the point of all this I wondered and where the devil had I wandered? The wind was now taking its toll of me, so I decided to stumble on in the direction of least resistance, that is, with the wind predominantly

behind me. I assumed this is what they determined I would do when left to my own devices. But where and why had they gone, where was I heading, what was the purpose of it all and why had these apparently benign Beings suddenly become more malevolent? How many hours had passed I do not know but now my muscles were aching, my eyes felt heavily encrusted with sand and salt, my lips were cracked and stinging agonisingly from the salt. I began to wonder if I had been abandoned to the elements. A further indeterminable period found me kneeling exhausted in the sand, throat parched, my body wracked in pain and with an unbelievable urge to quench my thirst. A tear trickled down my cheek as I felt so alone, aching and exhausted. Why have they done this I anguished as self-pity began taking its turn? I tried to get to my feet but the strength was not there! I keeled over in the sand and lay there. My mind seemed to wander and then strangely a warm glow appeared to envelope me and I drifted into a welcome sleep. It was then that the voice came, a soft and reassuring voice, a voice that said. “Let me tell you about Heaven’s Breath... Heaven’s breath kissed a child’s soft cheek, lifting golden tendrils of hair as it breezed across the lush parkland. Up and on it went, buffeting light fluffy clouds, whispering through treetops and causing clothing to dance upon the washing lines, as the invisible force went on its exploratory journey. Both night and day it travelled, never stopping for a moment. Never pausing to take in the panorama; mindlessly changing direction again and again. Eventually it came to a desert where it was able to race across smooth dusty sands and skip freely over the huge dunes it found there. Through the small villages and encampments it went, lifting and overturning anything that was not secured, causing men to rush about trying to catch their scattered possessions. With an ominous threat the sky darkened as the wind gathered strength and speed. It now either buried what it was not able to lift, or stripped it bare of sand leaving the foundations of walls and buildings unprotected against the whim of nature. Surging with power, the wind destroyed the simple tents and shacks that served as homes, pushing and tearing at them until they collapsed or were blown away.

As evening turned to night the storm came to its worst, displaying blind fury as it raged its way eastwards, leaving behind the overturned shacks and newly formed sand dunes as a memorial to its violent passage. Later as the air settled, people ventured out from their homes. For now they would build makeshift shelters for those who had been made homeless and forget the storm until the morning when they would curse it as they collected up their belongings and checked their livestock…” The voice appeared to change to the sound of the wind and again I drifted into a deep sleep. How much time passed I had no way of knowing but I suddenly awoke to a strange presence. Although the wind was still howling about me and I could sense the sand being whipped up, it seemed to have no ill affect upon me. Then I was very aware of another life form. As my eyes became more adjusted from my sleep an image began to form in front of me. My heart missed a beat as radiating before me was a vision of a kindly faced man dressed in a long white robe. Unbelievably, stretching out of the robe appeared to be wings and he seemed to be hovering just above the ground. The whole vision appeared very bright to the extent that the light was hurting my eyes. “Oh! Good grief!” I gasped, “Have I gone mad?” “Do not be afraid and be of good cheer,” the vision said, “I mean you no harm; I am your Guardian Angel and I have come to rescue and save you from your predicament.” The apparition then slowly floated toward me and I found myself being raised from the ground. No thoughts entered my brain as I was transfixed and without any fear. The Angel then had me in his arms and then I lost all consciousness. The next thing I became aware of was lying on a couch in the spacecraft. My head was throbbing and my tongue was stuck to the roof of my mouth, all of my body ached and was sore from my exposure; indeed the exposed parts of my skin had split into minor wounds that stung from the salt. I could not feel my lips. Through my blurred vision I could just make out Dique-zul looking down at me. "We are sorry to have put you through this ordeal," he said with obvious compassion in his voice, "but your very nature, as a Mortal,

necessitates lessons need to be learned the hard way if they are to have any real impact. The pain will reinforce the memories of your ordeal and give you some perspective to the enormity of your experience. Before proceeding any further it will be necessary now to relieve you of your discomfort so that you may fully concentrate your mind on the following sorry tale Karaz-hu will reveal to you.” On that note Dique-zul effortlessly guided the couch with me, its sorry occupant, into another section of the spacecraft. "This is what you might call our hospital sector," volunteered Dique-zul. "It is here I will alleviate you of your suffering,” he continued, as he effortlessly pushed the couch into an area encompassed by a pulsating yet just perceivable light, or whatever it was I felt flow over and through my body. It was unbelievable how quickly the pain and suffering left my body. My wounds were healing before my very eyes and I could feel my lips again. At this point Dique-zul put his hand on my forehead and before I knew it I lost consciousness. “Have you heard of the Aral Sea?” I heard a recognisable voice ask? Suddenly I was awake again and aware of Karaz-hu standing by the couch I was laying upon. "Not really." I replied puzzled. "Well, I assume you are familiar with the Caspian Sea?" he persisted. "Yes! it's to the east of the Black Sea", I replied somewhat triumphantly. Karaz-hu did not conceal his obvious relief that I was not totally ignorant of my planet's geography. "Well to the east again of the Caspian Sea," he continued, "there stretches an expanse of water known as the Sea of Islands, your maps will show it as the Aral Sea or Aralskoye Mare. Just over thirty years ago it was a land locked fresh water lake covering 63000 square kilometres, which for comparison sake is about the size of Ireland. You are of course familiar with Ireland?" He queried, I could not hide my embarrassment as I answered his question in the affirmative for I truly felt in a master and ignorant pupil situation. "Two rivers, the Syr Daryr and the Amu Daryr feed the lake," continued Karaz-hu, “and melting snow from the high mountains of Central Asia annually delivered some 55 billion tons of water depending, of course, on the yearly precipitation. This was balanced

by an annual evaporation of the same magnitude so as to maintain the level of the lake. The lake supported a diversity of fish giving sustenance and industry to the local inhabitants living around the shores. The area of the surface water also had a beneficial effect on the surrounding climate. As it was the fourth largest fresh water lake on your planet's surface it was easily discernable from space." Karaz-hu paused and looked me straight in the eye as if to see whether or not I had absorbed and understood what he had been revealing to me. Appearing satisfied he continued. "Not so now! Gross mismanagement and ignorance, if not greed, has turned the area into one of utter desolation...” The next thing I was aware of was sitting up in bed sweating profusely. “Good grief!” I cried out in the stillness of my bedroom, “That was so real.” I could vividly remember my walk on the Moon to the lecture by Karaz-hu telling me about the Aral Sea. Did I really walk on the Moon? Was I really lost in the wilderness and did I suffer such pain and anguish during my wandering in the desert? Where did the voice come from that whispered Heaven’s Breath to me and I wondered if I was actually rescued by an Angelic entity? All these thoughts were racing through my mind when I was suddenly aware of grit in the bed and throwing off the blankets discovered sand between my toes and on the bed sheets! This made my blood run cold as the truth then quickly began to dawn; this finding confirmed that I had been abducted again. Suddenly I felt very thirsty and thus made my way downstairs to the kitchen and put the kettle on for a cup of tea. As I was waiting for the kettle to boil my mind again tried to make sense of my latest ordeal. What was the purpose of my walk on the Moon? Why did they put me through such pain and torment in the desert? Why did it all end so suddenly when Karaz-hu was telling me about the Aral Sea? All these thoughts were competing for priority when suddenly I remembered the Moon rock! Forgetting my thirst I literally flew up the stairs and back to my bedroom to see if the rock was there? Well you can imagine the astonishment and amazement when my gaze landed on a rock on the bedroom dressing table. I thought my heart would stop beating being overcome with wonder and excitement as I

slowly approached the table. Yes, there it was a chunk of rock about the size of a tennis ball. “Good grief!” I stuttered to myself, “It was truly incredible!” My head was suddenly in a fog with so many thoughts. “What should I do now?” I muttered out loud! “Who should I take the rock to - will they take me seriously and believe me - will they take the trouble to analyse the rock, or will they take me for a crank?” My initial excitement was fast evaporating as it all began to sink in. One minute I was telling myself that I would become famous - I would be the first person on the planet to prove they have been abducted by Aliens, been taken to the Moon and had brought back a chunk Moon rock to prove the fact. The next minute my confidence was shattered by my own negative thoughts – and I was now talking to myself! What if the experts having examined the rock were unable to prove it came from the Moon - would I become a laughing stock? Again, I wondered where I should take the rock. Would it be to the media, a museum, a geologist or even the local police station! I just did not know. I was beginning to wonder if the Aliens had foreseen my dilemma and conundrum and that is why they eventually allowed me to bring a sample of Moon rock away with me. But again that really did not seem logical as why would they allow me to have possession of a Lunar rock knowing this likely outcome? My thoughts were not making much sense! I could not believe myself, here I was with what I perceived a solid piece of evidence, coupled with the knowledge the Aliens had imparted to me and yet my mind was in turmoil as to what to do. Then as my thoughts were fencing with themselves, a wave of the now familiar urge to commit my adventures to paper began to flood over me. It was not long before the urges became extremely strong and pulsed at small intervals of time through my body. My thoughts regarding the Moon rock were quickly diminishing and the immediate priority that was now dominating my brain was the task of recording my latest experiences. Thus leaving the Moon rock on the dressing table I made my way downstairs and returned to the kitchen and made myself that cup of tea I so badly needed. I was on my third cup

of tea when a tremendous urge to commit my night’s adventures to paper really hit home. It was well past midnight before I had committed all there was to relate on paper and it was only then that my thoughts fully, and without competition, returned to the Moon rock upstairs. I decided to bring the rock downstairs and examine it more closely on the kitchen table. I must have sat there for what seemed hours just staring at the rock. Curiously I began thinking that basically that’s all it was, just a lump of rock! Then reality kicked in again as it was not just any old lump of rock; it was a piece of rock that I had picked up off the surface of the Moon. Surely it was more precious than gold, or would it be fool’s gold I wondered? My thoughts started fencing amongst themselves again. Heck! I was tired, so tired, so very tired; I just wanted to lie down and go to sleep and without giving it any more thought I left the rock where it was in the kitchen and retired to my bed. That was one big mistake and I can only justify that my stupidity was due to the fatigue and extreme tiredness clouding my thinking and actions. Every other morning Mrs Wilkinson, the home help, would let herself in and go about her duties in a very industrious and determined way. She was a very proud and neat woman and any papers or debris left lying around would soon be consigned to the rubbish bin. Since my encounters with the Aliens Mrs Wilkinson had become accustomed to my sleeping in late and also leaving the kitchen in a bit of state. On numerous occasions she had remonstrated with me on the parlous state in which I had left the kitchen table. I had told her the reason for such a mess was because I had decided to produce a novel, which often found me writing to the small hours of the morning. Although tired after my evenings efforts and before retiring to bed I would make a cup of tea and a few sandwiches. Sitting at the kitchen table I would scan my efforts whilst eating and drinking. Having satisfied my bodily needs tiredness would overcome me and I would then thoughtlessly retire to bed leaving crumpled paper and dirty dishes on the table.

Only once did Mrs Wilkinson ask me what I was writing about. When I said it was about Aliens and UFO’s I knew that would be the last interest she would ever show in my work. I knew romantic or historical novels were much more to her taste and that my choice of subject would stifle any further interest in my endeavours. No doubt you can now guess what happened to my precious Moon rock. Yes! It ended up in the rubbish bin. But that would not have been totally catastrophic except it was ‘bin morning’ when the refuse men would be around to empty the rubbish bins. It was unbelievable that I could have been so stupid and thoughtless. By the time I had awoken and dressed Mrs Wilkinson had long gone and the rubbish bins had been emptied. I cursed myself for being such an idiot but slightly comforted myself with the thought that if I could head off the refuse wagon before it reached the infill site, I might just have a chance of recovering my precious Moon rock. The possible chance of recovery and salvation was short lived when I tried to start the car. It was unbelievable, Murphy’s Law had kicked in and would the car start, not a chance! Only when the car battery was completely flat, in attempting to start the engine, that I gave in and resigned myself to the fact that the Moon rock had reached an unrecoverable situation and was completely lost; how could I have been so utterly stupid? My thoughts again returned to my latest abduction and the disconnected nature of the events. Why could I not remember the moment of abduction? My first conscious awareness was of being on board the spacecraft and heading toward the Moon - what really was the motivation behind my excursion to the Moon - surely it was not just sight seeing? What was the purpose of the various scenarios about aliens invading the Earth, the Doomsday Device, the horrors of the Earth’s crust moving, the mass extinctions, the threat of asteroids and comets - were these portents of threatening events yet to plague the Earth? My mind still boggles with the discussion on Angels and then the experience in the desert? The observations of Karaz-hu to the plight of the Aral Sea… What did it all mean as there seemed to be no logic to it at all! Perhaps, for whatever reason, my abduction did not end so abruptly and my brain, for whatever reason, cannot recall all of the details.

The Beings may be all powerful but they still have to work with the material of this Universe and Humans are indeed fallible. This must be the reason I convinced myself as the Aliens did say that many seeds had been implanted with numerous people throughout the ages and not all had germinated successfully! Then finally! Why? I have wondered many times since my abduction, was I so utterly stupid to carelessly lose my Lunar rock sample - I really do not know and I truly curse this action on my part! I can only put it down to extreme tiredness and the stress of my experiences - I can only record and have recorded the detail and events you have just read.

DECEPTION & DELUSION

And it came to pass, as they still went on, and talked, that, behold, there appeared a chariot of fire, and horses of fire, and parted them both asunder: and Elijah went up by a whirlwind into heaven.

11 Kings 2:11

Now as I beheld the living creatures, behold one wheel upon the earth by the living creatures, with his four faces. The appearance of the wheels and their work was like unto the colour a beryl: and they four had one likeness: and their appearance and their work was as it were a wheel in the middle of a wheel. When they went, they went upon their four sides: and they turned not when they went. As for their rings, they were so high that they were dreadful: and their rings were full of eyes round about them four. And when the living creatures went, the wheels went by them: and when the living creatures were lifted up from the earth, the wheels were lifted up.

Ezekiel 1:15 - 19

We have almost come to the end of the Stranger’s tale except for what was to be a challenging and dirty roll of documents. These documents were found at the bottom of one of the carrier bags given to me by the Stranger on that fateful night. Unusually, the papers were secured in a bundle with a worn and sticky elastic band, whereas all the others that I had previously studied had been either neatly stapled together or secured with a paper clip! Thus at the time it asked the question, why should these notes be arranged so

differently? This puzzling aspect was also further deepened by the fact that the rolled bundle gave the impression that it had been dropped in a muddy pool, and then a hurried attempt had been made in drying the documents out. As a consequence the outermost pages of this rolled bundle were virtually unreadable. Nevertheless, with the utmost perseverance I eventually managed to extricate some very intriguing information and it was only then that the significance of this roll of notes became apparent. Amazingly I was able to extract data relating to propulsion units for spacecraft which were similar but also had subtle differences in design to the current solid and liquid fuel variety as used by the American, Russian and European Space Agencies; there appeared to be some considerable design detail covering various rocket engines. Incredibly the notes, so far as I could determine, detailed the propulsive units of inter-planetary craft used by the inhabitants of two planets called Quaram and Zmytz. The notes inferred that these two planets belonged to an extra-solar system somewhere on the far side of our Milky Way Galaxy? What was also unbelievable was that the dominant species of these planets appeared, from a number of smudged sketches in the muddied papers, to be very similar to Homo sapiens. The inhabitants of the planet Quaram employed not only solid and liquid fuel as used by the nations of Earth but also compressed air and water as a fuel. There was also an ion drive and electromagnetic propulsion unit described but I was unable to extract any meaningful details of either of these designs. The dominant species of Zmytz, the Zmytzarians, demonstrated a much more technologically advanced approach in using laser and nuclear drives than the inhabitants of Quaram. Although unfortunately due to the difficulty in reading the notes (and I must be honest also to my limited knowledge of rocket engine science), there were only two propulsion methods, apart from the solid and liquid fuel rockets, that I could make some sense of and partially understand. Thus due to the fact that I could not determine any dialogue between the Stranger and the Aliens I have confined the

limited information I was able to extract and understand to Appendix Six, headed ‘Power for Spacecraft’. The Stranger’s muddied notes however inferred not only a high degree of travelling and commercialism between the two planets but they also revealed, surprisingly, that all the inhabitants of Zmytz were female. Indeed, there was an extract from what appeared to be a Quaramite scientific report which was headed, ‘Genetically Modified Life Forms & Redundancy of the Male’; whereby the report began, ‘Greetings to the daughters of Zmytz from the sons and daughters of Quaram’. In the report there was also mention of continuing war and conflicts on the planet Quaram whilst harmony prevailed on Zmytz. The Quaramites appeared to be experimenting with genetically modified life forms and seemed to be appraising the Zmytzarians as a role model; although the Zmytzarians claimed that their Gods had manipulated their chromosomes generations ago to produce only female births with the consequence of far less inherent aggression now within their species and hence planetary harmony. Being less contaminated the inner notes were easier to read and contained details on numerous UFO sighting cases. Not all of the sightings were readable although I have done my best in extracting as many as I possibly could. In the muddied notes there was a reference to the Internet and I wondered if that was where all the sightings had originated, but there was no mention made of an exact Web site. Thus I wondered whether or not the Aliens had imparted this knowledge during this particular encounter? I do know, from the stained documents, that the Stranger was given a brain scan which included subjecting various parts of his brain to a similar pulsating electromagnetic field he was exposed to during his first encounter with the Aliens. During this procedure he was told that information imparted to him would be retrievable at a later date! Now whether the complete data was imparted at this time or whether the information was sufficient only to guide the Stranger to a particular Web site as mentioned earlier, I really could not say, except there were many UFO cases cited in the muddied papers. As I worked from the centre of the roll outwards the task of deciphering the notes became more and more of a challenge. The

information I was able to read quoted examples of UFO sightings from 1947 through to August 1965. The remainder of the notes must have contained information up to almost the present day as on a number of pages I could just make out various dates such as 1969, 1975, 1981, 1990, 1994, and 1997. Apart from the information pertaining to the design of rocket engines, habitable planets and various UFO sightings, there was some decipherable information recording a dialogue between the Aliens and the Stranger. From what I could gather it was another lecture from Karaz-hu whilst on the Alien spacecraft, and as such, I pick up the Stranger’s report of his final abduction as follows:

Up until the point of being taking aboard and ensconced on the Alien spacecraft, my mind was again a complete blank! My first memory was recognising the room we were in, but before I could gather all my thoughts together Karaz-hu began. “World governments, especially the U.S. Government, are in possession of a lot more information relating to contact with extraterrestrial life forms than they care to admit. There are numerous reasons for this continuing secrecy notwithstanding the high probable risk of the collapse of your modern economic and technological driven societies. Both the psychological impact and religious implications, for many people, would be traumatic. The whole issue becomes very complex regarding easement of shock in relation to the truth. In addition you will no doubt appreciate that there are many powerful and evil forces on your planet that will go to any length to keep the ‘status quo’. The sacrifice of millions of people and the destruction of land and property would not inhibit these evil forces in any way and therefore would not be meaningful obstacles to their desires. The United States of America, currently being the foremost World power, have been instrumental in initiating a lot of this secrecy. Although there are numerous scientists, physicists, astronomers, senior industrialists, high ranking civil servants, military officers,

congressmen and politicians who are unaware of what is happening - some do have their suspicions of which they are unable to pursue or prove. With the continuation of testing nuclear weapons after the Second World War, we decided to escalate awareness of extraterrestrial intelligence in the hope of encouraging Human thoughts away from aggressive pursuits to that of higher and more positive endeavours. Indeed the ‘seeding’ of numerous minds resulted in the watershed of 1947 and the description ‘Flying Saucer’, subsequently to be termed as Unidentified Flying Objects (UFO’s). It is a very complex web that is being spun by powerful forces to the extent that there are very few high-ranking officials in the U.S. military and seat of government that are privy to the ‘higher secrets’ of known Alien contacts. These officials have been instrumental in the issuing of disinformation and guilty of obfuscation. They pretend to not believe in or accept that UFO’s exist and are happy to perpetrate the UFO myth as they see it. A kind of double bluff, if you wish; these people justify their acts by accepting that it serves as an excellent smoke screen to the testing and evaluation of various aerial weapons, amongst other secret forms of destruction. Now you should be aware that during the 1950s and 1960s numerous extraterrestrial visitations took place across your planet with the majority within the U.S. It was both envisaged and hoped by us that by the early 1980s acceptance of extraterrestrial life would be commonplace among your nations, especially in the U.S. We have provided numerous situations whereby the United States, United Kingdom, France and Russia could have ‘identified’ a contact with minimal cultural effect. I would suggest a closer evaluation of the American government agency known as the National Aeronautics and Space Administration (NASA), the Moon and Mars missions in the light of what I am revealing to you. The U.S. government had from as early as the late 1940s decided to adopt a ‘cat and mouse’ approach and is still ‘influencing’ other authorities to comply with their philosophy; the U.S. government has its own agenda. In order to contain certain situations some of your

space probes have been ‘terminated’ by us; whilst we have, in the name of our strategy, allowed others to succeed, indeed we have intervened and rejuvenated a number of projects much to the surprise of some of your scientists. NASA is aware of the interference to some of their efforts in space, but at the same time they deny the existence of anything untoward.” At this point I rudely interrupted Karaz-hu spluttering. “But how do you explain the Roswell Incident - especially the images of those socalled Alien bodies?” The look of amazement on Karaz-hu’s face said it all. “Surely you are not deceived by those images of the examination of a purportedly Alien body? Have you not learnt anything?” Karaz-hu, for some reason suddenly stopped and motioned me to lie down on the scanning couch. I found myself quickly obeying his request and positioned myself comfortably on the couch looking upward toward the ceiling. “We are going to scan your brain and subject the cortex, hippocampus and medial thalamus to various subtle electromagnetic pulses. Do not concern yourself as you should know by now that it will not harm you.” Having been subject to this procedure on more than one occasion without any apparent harmful effects I accepted he was saying the truth and nodded my willingness for Karaz-hu to continue. “You will find that the information we are about to impart will be retrievable at a later time, so do not be concerned as it will not harm you,” Karaz-hu further assured me. The next thing I knew was a gentle feeling of warmth around my temples, a just discernable throbbing and then darkness. “Wake up, wake up,” came a soothing voice. As I regained consciousness and turning my head as I rose from the couch, I could see that it was Karaz-hu who then volunteered that I had been asleep and the necessary information had been imparted. For my part I felt quite normal and wondered what information they had implanted in my memory. I was totally unaware of any new thoughts or learning. “Do not be concerned, you will be aware of all the facts when the time is right,” Karaz-hu assured me. Before I could say anything or

indeed return to our discussion about the Roswell incident he quickly continued. “We have identified a listing of selected reports from 1947 to the 1990’s as an example of the deliberate misinformation and obfuscation on the part of the U.S. authorities. We have also identified specific cases over this period of time.” Although I wanted to pursue the issue, I was not given chance to raise the Roswell incident again…

At this point the Stranger’s notes, unfortunately, became completely unreadable. Thus the following which I relate was either, the information imparted to the Stranger when he was on the Alien spacecraft, or possibly the Stranger later obtained the information via the Internet on the guidance of the Aliens. In my opinion many of the sightings quoted do not prove any complicity on part of the U.S. government to any UFO cover up. I can only guess that there must have been other material in the notes that offered such conclusive proof. Unfortunately if this is the case, then this evidence has been lost due to the state of this particular roll of papers. The notes start by confirming that it is basically a listing of unexplained reports from the files of the U.S. Air Force’s Project Blue Book of UFO investigations. There was also a hint that some of the information was obtained from other sources. I must admit to being slightly puzzled by the listing as I am of the opinion that most of the sightings given are due to observer misinterpretation. Although it must be said that I have absolutely no evidence to back such a claim and for all I know they might be quite genuine. Perhaps they are all genuine and this is the reason behind the listing. Therefore in an effort to get at the truth I have, in this chapter, included several photographs of my own choosing; regarding their authenticity I see them as either mistaken or false claims! Thus hopefully they serve a useful purpose in a chapter of this nature as a possible ‘balancing factor’ helping the reader distinguish between

the real and the unreal. Therefore I continue the Stranger’s tale with the additional extracted information from the muddied notes as follows…

The following are unexplained UFO reports from the files of the U.S. Air Force’s Project Blue Book of UFO investigations. The reports cover a period from 1947 to 1965. During 1974 the files were withdrawn from public access at the U.S. Air Force Archives at Maxwell AFB, Montgomery, Alabama. The total collection of relevant information contained material that filled nearly 30 file drawers. Also during 1974 the files were all copied with the use of a Xerox copying machine but with names and other identifying information blanked out. These selectively blanked copies were then microfilmed before sending to the National Archives in Washington. Although the microfilm has been available to the public since 1976, the original Project Blue Book files remain under lock and key at the National Archives. Suspiciously, on almost every page of the more than 12,000 case files, there are large black marks where information that could be used to crosscheck Project Blue Book’s controversial work has been censored. This includes the names and addresses of witnesses of widely publicised cases and even names in newspaper clippings. Thus the reports amongst the Stranger’s bundle of muddied papers that I could read are as follows:

July 3, 1947; Harborside, Maine. 2:30 p.m. EDT. Witness: astronomer John Cole of South Brooksville, Me. Watched 10-15 seconds while ten very light objects, with two dark forms to their left, moved like a swarm of bees to the Northwest. A loud roar was heard.

July 4, 1947; Over Emmet, Idaho. 8:17 p.m. PDT. Witnesses: United Air Lines Capt. E.J. Smith, First Officer Ralph Stevens, Stewardess Marty Morrow. Watched for 12-15 minutes while four objects with flat bottoms and rough tops moved at varying speeds, with one high and to the right of the others. July 6, 1947; Fairfield-Suisan Air Base, California. Daytime. Witnesses: Army Air Forces Capt. and Mrs. James Burniston. Watched for 1 minute while one object having no wings or tail rolled from side-to-side three times and then flew away very fast to the southeast. July 8, 1947; Muroc Air Base, California. 9:30 a.m. PDT. Witness: 1st Lt Joseph McHenry, T/Sgt Ruvolo, S/Sgt Nauman, Miss Janette Scotte. Watched for an unstated length of time while two discshaped or spherical objects-silver and apparently metallic-flew a wide circular pattern, and then one of them later flew a tighter circle. July 9, 1947; Meridian, Idaho. 12:17 p.m. PDT. Witness: Idaho statesman aviation editor and former (AAF) B-29 pilot Dave Johnson. Watched for more than 10 seconds from an Idaho Air National Guard AT-6 while a black disc, which stood out against the clouds, made a half-roll and then a stair-step climb. July 10, 1947; Harmon Field, Newfoundland, Canada. Between 3 p.m. and 5 p.m. local time. Witnesses: three ground crewmen, including Mr. Leidy, for Pan American Airways. Watched briefly while one translucent disc- or wheel- shaped object flew very fast, leaving a dark blue trail and then ascended and cut a path through the clouds. July 29, 1947; Hamilton Air Base, California. 2:50 p.m. PDT. Witnesses: Assistant Base Operations Officer Capt. William Rhyerd, ex-AAF B-29 pilot Ward Stewart. Watched for unknown length of time while two round, shiny, white objects with estimated 15-25 foot diameters, flew 3-4 times the apparent speed of a P-80, also in sight. One object flew straight and level; the other weaved from side-toside like an escort fighter. April 5, 1948; Holloman AFB, New Mexico. Afternoon. Witnesses: Geophysics Lab balloon observers Alsen, Johnson, Chance. Two irregular, round, white or golden objects. One made three loops then

rose and disappeared rapidly; the other flew in a fast arc to the west during the 30-second sighting. July 31, 1948; Indianapolis, Indiana. 8:25 a.m. Witnesses: Mr. and Mrs. Vernon Swigert; he was an electrician. Object was shaped like a cymbal, or domed disc; about 20 foot across and 6-8 foot thick, and was white without any shine. It flew straight and level from horizon in about 10 seconds, shimmering in the sun as if spinning.

Oct.15, 1948; Fusuoka, Japan. 11:05 p.m. Witnesses: pilot Halter and radar operator Hemphill of a P-61 “Black Widow” night fighter. Up to six objects tracked on radar, only one seen visually. Dull or dark object shaped like a dirigible with a flat bottom and clipped tail end. Six seen on radar separately. Pilot attempted to close on visual object, but it dove away fast. Feb. 1, 1951; Johnson air Base, Japan. Witnesses: pilot and radar operator of F-82 night fighter. One amber light made three or four 3600 turns to the right, reversed toward the F-82 and then climbed out of sight. Oct. 2, 1951; Columbus, Ohio. 6 p.m. Witness: Battelle Memorial Institute graduate physicist Howard Cross. One bright oval with a clipped tail flew straight and level, fading into the distance after 1 minute. Oct. 3, 1951; Kadena, Okinawa. 10:27 p.m. Witnesses: Radar operators Sgt. M.W. Watson and Pvt Gonzales and one other Sergeant. One large, sausage-shaped blip tracked at an estimated 4,800 m.p.h. Oct. 9, 1951; Terre Haute, Indiana. 1:42 p.m. Witness: CAA Chief Aircraft Communicator Roy Messmore at Hulman Municipal Airport. One round silver object flew directly overhead, reaching the horizon in 15 seconds. Note: a very similar incident happened 3 minutes later near Paris, Illinois (15 miles NW) and was also listed as “unidentified” for several years, but was eventually reclassified.

Oct. 11, 1951; Minneapolis, Minnesota. 6:30 a.m. Witnesses: General Mills balloon researchers, including aeronautical engineer J.J. Kaliszewski, aerologist C.B.Moore, pilot Dick Reilly in the air, and Doug Smith on the ground. The flight crew saw the first object, a brightly glowing one with a dark underside and a halo around it. The object arrived high and fast, then slowed and made slow climbing circles for about two minutes, and finally sped away to the east. Soon they saw another one, confirmed by ground observers using a theodolite, which sped across the sky. Total time first object was seen was 5 minutes; second time was a few seconds. Nov.18, 1951; Washington, D.C. 3:20 a.m. Witnesses: Crew of Capital Airlines DC-4 Flight 610, Andrews AFB Senior air traffic controller Tom Selby. One object with several lights followed the DC4 for about 20 minutes and then turned back. June 5, 1952; Albuquerque, New Mexico. 6.45 p.m. Witness: S/Sgt T.H. Shorey. One shiny round object flew 5-6 times as fast as an F86 fighter for 6 seconds. June 5, 1952; Offutt AFB, Omaha, Nebraska. 11 p.m. Witnesses: 2nd Lt. W.R.Soper, a Strategic Air Command top secret control officer and former OSI agent; and two other persons. One bright red object remained stationary for 4.5 minutes before speeding away with a short tail. June 6, 1952; Kimpo AFB, Korea. Case missing from official files. June 9, 1952; Minneapolis, Minnesota. Case missing from official files. June 12, 1952; Marakesch, Morocco. 11:26 a.m. Witness: R.S.Thomas, Olmstead AFB employee and former control tower operator. One round, orange object travelled south, stopped for 1 second, turned east, stopped for 1 second, and went down. June 13, 1952; Middletown, Pennsylvania. 8:45 p.m. Witness: R.S. Thomas, Olmstead AFB employee and former control tower operator. One round, orange object travelled south, stopped for 1 second, turned east, stopped 1 second, and went down. June 15, 1952; Louisville, Kentucky. 11:50 p.m. Witness: Edward Duke, ex-U.S. Navy radar technician. One large, cigar-shaped object

with a blunt front, lit sides and a red stern, manoeuvred in a leisurely fashion for 15 minutes. June 16, 1952; Walker AFB, New Mexico. 8:30 p.m. Witness: USAF maintenance specialist S/Sgt. Sparks. Five or six greyish discs, in a half-moon formation, flew at 500-600 m.p.h. for 1 minute. June 17, 1952; McChord AFB, Washington. Between 7:30 and 10:20 p.m. Witnesses: Many and varied. From one to five large silveryellow objects flew erratically, stopped and started for about 15 minutes. June 17, 1952; Cape Cod, Massachusetts. 1:28 a.m. Witness: Pilot of USAF F-94 jet interceptor. A light like a bright star crossed the nose of the airplane while being observed for 15 seconds. No further information in the files. June 28, 1952; Nagoya, Japan. 4:10 p.m. Witness: Capt. T.W.Barger, USAF electronics countermeasures officer. One blue elliptical-shaped object with a pulsing border flew straight and level at 700-800 m.p.h. June 29, 1952; O’Hare Airport, Chicago, Illinois. 5:45 p.m. Witnesses: Three USAF air policemen. One bright silver, flat oval object surrounded by a blue haze, hovered, then moved very fast to the right and to the left, and up and down for 45 minutes. July 5, 1952; Norman, Oklahoma. 7:58 p.m. Witness: Oklahoma State Patrolman Hamilton in State Patrol airplane. Three dark discs hovered and then flew away, silhouetted against a dark cloud. 15 seconds. July 9, 1952; Colorado Springs, Colorado. 12:45 p.m. Witness: USAF pilot Maj. C.K.Griffin. One object shaped like an airfoil less its trailing edge, luminous white, moved slowly and erratically for 12 minutes. July 9, 1952; Kutztown, Pennsylvania. 6:30 p.m. Witness: Farmer John Mittl. One aluminium oval-shaped object changed direction and altitude, finally tipping on end and departing after 20 seconds. Case file includes three vague photographs. July 29, 1952; Ennis, Montana. 12:30 p.m. Witnesses: USAF persons alerted that UFOs were coming from the direction of Seattle, Wash. Two to five flat disc-shaped objects: one hovered 3-4 minutes,

while the others circled it. Sighting length of 30 minutes not explained further. July 30, 1952; Albuquerque, New Mexico. 11:02 p.m. Witness: USAF 1st Lt. George Funk. One orange light remained stationary for 10 minutes. No further details in files. July 30, 1952; San Antonio, Texas. 10 a.m. Witnesses: E.E.Nye and one other person. One round, white object flew slow and then sped away after 20-30 minutes. Aug. 6, 1952; Tokyo, Japan. This is a continuation of the Haneda AFB sightings. Aug. 6, 1952; Port Austin, Michigan. Case missing from official files. Aug. 7, 1952; San Antonio, Texas. 9:08 a.m. Witness: Mrs. Susan Pfuhl. Four glowing white discs: one made a 1800 turn, one flew straight and level, one veered off, and one circled during the 70 minute sighting. Aug. 9, 1952; lake Charles, Louisiana. 10:50 a.m. Witness: USAF A/3c J.P.Raley. One disc-shaped object flew very fast and then hovered for 2 seconds during a 5-6 minute sighting. Aug. 13, 1952; Tokyo, Japan. 9:45 p.m. Witness: USAF Marine Corps pilot Maj. D.McGough. One orange light flew a left orbit at 8,000 feet and 230 m.p.h., spiralled down to no more than 1,500 feet, remained stationary for 2-3 minutes and went out. An attempted interception was unsuccessful. Aug. 24, 1952; Hermanas, Mexico. 10:15 a.m. Witness: Georgia Air national Guard F-84G jet fighter pilot Col. G.W.Johnson. Two 6 feet silver balls in abreast formation, one turned grey rapidly, the other slowly. One changed to long grey shape during a turn. Sighting lasted about 10 minutes. Aug. 26, 1952; Lathrop Wells, Nevada. 12:10 a.m. Witness: USAF Capt. D.A.Woods. One large, round, very bright object with a Vshaped contrail having a dark cone in the centre, flew very fast, hovered, made an instantaneous 900 turn, followed by a gentle climb and finally sudden acceleration. Aug. 29, 1952; West of Thule, Greenland (770 n, 750 w.) 10:50 a.m. Witnesses: Two U.S. Navy pilots flying a P4Y-2 patrol plane. Three

white disc-shaped or spherical objects hovered, then flew very fast in a triangular formation, in 2-3 minutes. Sept. 9, 1952; Rabat, French Morocco. 9 p.m. Witness: E.J.Colisimo, a civilian illustrator with USAF Intelligence. One disc with lights along part of its circumference, flew twice as fast as a T-33 jet trainer, in a slightly curved path for 5 seconds. Sept. 14, 1952; North Atlantic, between Ireland and Iceland. Witnesses: Military persons from several countries aboard ships in the NATO “Operation Mainbrace” exercise. Among the sightings: one blue-green triangle was observed flying 1,500 m.p.h; three objects in a triangular formation gave off white light exhaust at 1,500 m.p.h. Sept. 14, 1952; Ciudad Jaurez, Mexico. 11:30 p.m. to 1:20 a.m. Sep. 15. Witnesses: Consulting engineer R.J.Portis and three others. Six groups of 12-15 luminous spheres or discs, which flew in formations varying from arcs to inverted-Y’s, very fast. Sept. 26, 1952; 400 miles NNW of Azores Islands. 11:16 p.m. Witnesses: Pilot, co-pilot, engineer and aircraft commander of USAF C-124 transport plane. Two distinct green lights were seen to the right and slightly above the C-124, and at one time seemed to turn toward it. The lights alternated leading each other during more than 1 hour of observation. Sept. 29, 1952; Aurora, Colorado. 3:15 p.m. Witness: USAF T/Sgt. B.R.Hughes. Five or six circular objects, bright white but not shiny, circled in trail formation for 5-6 minutes. Oct. 19, 1952; San Antonio, Texas. 1:30 p.m. Witness: One ex-USAF aircrewman Woolsey. Three circular aluminium objects, one of which was olive-drab coloured on the side, flew in a rough V-formation. One object flipped slowly, another object stopped, during the 3-4 minute sighting. Oct. 24, 1952; Elberton, Alabama. 8:26 p.m. Witnesses: USAF Lt. Rau, Capt. Marcinko, flying a Beech T-11 trainer. One object, shaped like a plate, with a brilliant front and vague trail, flew with its concave surface forward for 5 seconds. Oct. 29, 1952; Erding Air Depot, West Germany. 7:50 a.m. Witnesses: USAF S/Sgt. Anderson, A/2c Max Handy. One round

object, silhouetted against a cloud, flew straight and level and smooth at 400 m.p.h. for 20 seconds. Feb.3, 1953; Keflavik, Iceland. 5:25 p.m. Witnesses: Radar operators. Four unidentified targets were tracked for 24 minutes. No further detail. Feb. 4, 1953; Yuma, Arizona. 1:50 p.m. Witness: U.S. Weather Bureau observer Stanley Brown, using a theodolite. One white, oblong object was tracked flying straight up, levelling off and being joined by a second, similar, object. The second twice flew away and returned to the first. After 5 minutes, both were lost to sight behind clouds. Feb. 17, 1953; Port Austin, Michigan. 10:04 p.m. Witnesses: Two officers and three airmen of USAF AC&W squadron, visually and by radar. Visual object appeared to be larger and brighter than a star and changed colour; it was seen for 5 minutes until 10:09 p.m. Radar picked up a target at 10:08 p.m. moving in a similar direction for 17 minutes, at similar speed. April 8, 1953; Fukuoka, Japan. 7:55 p.m. Witness: 1st Lt. D.J.Pichon, pilot of USAF F-94B jet interceptor. One bright blue light descended, accelerated, flew parallel to the F-94, increased its speed and blinked out after 45 seconds. May 1, 1953; Goose AFB, Labrador, Canada. 11:35 p.m. Witnesses: Pilot and radar operator of USAF F-94 jet interceptor, and control tower operator. One white light evaded interception attempt by F-94 during 30 minute sighting. June 22, 1953; Goose AFB, Labrador, Canada. Z: 10 a.m. Witnesses: Pilot and radar operator of USAF F-94 jet interceptor. One red light, flying at an estimated 1,000 kts. (1,100 m.p.h.) eluded the chasing F-94 after 5 minutes. June 24, 1953; Iwo Jima, Bonin Islands. 11:30 p.m. Witnesses: Crew of USAF KB-29 aerial tanker plane. Radar tracked in unidentified target which twice approached to within 0.5 miles of the airplane, and once to within 6 miles, during a 2 minute observation. June 24, 1953; Simiutak, Greenland. 11:30 a.m. Witness: Weather observer A/2c R.A.Hill. One red triangle hovered and rotated for 15 seconds, then climbed for 5 minutes.

Aug. 3, 1953; Amarillo, Texas. 12:04 p.m. Witness: Airport control tower chief C.S.Brown. One round and reflective or translucent object flew straight, stopped for 7 seconds, sped along, stopped again, was joined by a similar object and they flew off in different directions, after a total of 56 minutes. Aug.20, 1953; Near Castle AFB, California. 9:05 p.m. Witnesses: Crew of TB-29 bomber/trainer plane. One greyish oval object made four passes at the airplane (three times at 10-20 miles distance), then dived vertically as if two objects. Aug.20, 1953; Greenville, Mississippi. 9:45 p.m. Witnesses: USAF pilot, M/Sgt., others, all on the ground. One meandering light was observed for 50 minutes. No further details in file. Dec. 28, 1953; Marysville, California. 11:55 a.m. Witness: Yuba County Airport Manager Dick Brandt. One saucer, with brilliant blue light, reflecting on a nearby building, hovered briefly during the 1.5 minute observation. March 5, 1954; Nouasseur, French Morocco. 8 p.m. Witnesses: Crews of USAF KC-97 aerial tanker planes. One object or light made passes at KC-97s, the other flew straight and level. Sighting duration unknown. March 12, 1954; Nouasseur, French Morocco. 9:35 a.m. Witness: USAF 1st Lt. Robert Johnson, flying an F-86 jet fighter. He chased an object at more than 530 m.p.h. for 30 seconds, but was unable to catch it. It appeared to be the size of a fighter plane but had neither tanks nor trails. May 11, 1954; Washington, D.C. 10:45 p.m. Three USAF air policemen at Washington National Airport. Two bright lights were seen on three occasions to fly straight and level, make 900 turns and fade. Each sighting lasted about 45 seconds. June 1, 1954; from 400 miles south to Minneapolis, Minnesota. 9 p.m. Witnesses: Crew of USAF B-47 jet bomber at 34,000 feet altitude. One object with running lights flew at 24-44,000 feet altitude for 1 hour.

June 10, 1954; Estacado, Texas. 9:09 p.m. Witness: USAF pilot Capt. Bill McDonald, in flight. One white light descended at 450 from great altitude, passed under his aircraft, made two 3600 turns and went out after 30 seconds. June 22, 1954; Miami Beach, Florida. 9 p.m. Witnesses: U.S. Marine Corps Maj.E.Buchser and Maj.J.V.Wilkins. One meteor-like object descended, stopped, and became extremely bright. Sighting lasted 7 minutes. Aug.29, 1954; Prince Christian, Greenland. 11:05 a.m. Witnesses: 1st Officer H.G.Gardner, engineer J.V.D.Whitisy, flying Royal Dutch Airlines DC-4 (PH-DBZ). Three or four dark, lens-shaped objects veered north and changed position in formation during the 10 minute sighting. Sept. 18, 1954; Kimpo Air Base, Japan. 5:55 a.m. Witnesses: Two control tower operators, a weather forecaster and a weather observer. One round object, like polished aluminium, flew straight and level for 11-13 minutes. Sept. 23, 1954; Gatlinburg, Tennessee. 9:45 a.m. Witness Dave Owenby. Two bright silver, wheel-shaped objects flew from north to south in trail for 2 minutes. Oct. 13, 1954; Nouasseur, French Morocco. 10:05 a.m. Witness: Weather observer, following a balloon with his theodolite. One round, flat, silver object flew straight and level for 30 seconds. Oct. 28, 1954; Miho Air Base, Japan. 5:32 p.m. Witnesses: USAF pilots Lt. Col.O.C.Cook and Lt.J.W.Brown, on ground using 7x50 binoculars. One brilliant white, round-oval object climbed in front of clouds, brightened, turned 900 to the north. Seen for 45 seconds. Dec. 7, 1954; Cape Province, South Africa. 1:15 p.m. Witness: Weather officer, using theodolite. One white, semi-circular, flat object with a dome flew from west to east, then turned north. Sighting lasted 7 minutes. Jan. 1, 1955; Cochise, New Mexico. 6:44 a.m. Witnesses: Instructor and student pilot in USAF B-25 bomber/trainer. A metallic disc, shaped like two pie pans face-to-face, and 120-130 feet in diameter,

paced the B-25, showing both its edge and its face, for 5-7 minutes. Only item in case file was summary form. Feb. 1, 1955; 20 miles east of Cochise, New Mexico. 7:55 p.m. Witnesses: Instructor Capt. D.F.Ritzdorf, aviation cadet F.W.Miller in TB-25 bomber/trainer. One red and white ball hovered off the left wing of the TB-25 for 5 minutes, then made a very fast climb. Total time of sighting was 8 minutes. Feb.2, 1955; Miramar Naval Air Station, California. 11:50 a.m. Witness: USN Cmdr. J.L.Ingersoll. One highly polished sphere, with reddish-brown colouring, fell, then instantly accelerated to 1,0001,500 m.p.h. Feb. 10, 1955; Bethesda, Maryland. 10:03 p.m. Witness: E.J.Stein, model maker at U.S. Navy ship design facility. One object, shaped like a small portion of the bottom of the Moon. Total sighting lasted 1 - 2 minutes. April 30, 1955; Travis County, Texas. 7:30 a.m. Witness USAF Wing Intelligence Officer Maj. L.J.Pagozalski. Four black objects in a cluster made a whooshing sound like a zephyr. Sighting lasted 2-3 seconds. May 4, 1955; Keflavik, Iceland. 12:38 p.m. Witnesses: Lt. Col.E.J.Stealy, 1st Lt. J.W.Burt. About 10 round, white objects, one of which left a brief smoke trail, flew in an irregular formation, some of them making erratic movements during the 5-8 second sighting. Aug.11, 1955; Iceland. 11:45 a.m. Witness: 2nd Lt. E.J.Marlow. Twelve grey objects, from cigar to egg-shaped, varied their formation from elliptical to wavy line to scattered to straight line to trail formation. Speed varied from hover to 1,000 m.p.h. Sighting lasted 3-4 minutes. Oct. 27, 1958; Lock Raven Dam, Maryland. 10:30 p.m. Witnesses: Phillip Small, Alvin Cohen. One large, flat egg-shaped object affected a car’s electrical system and caused a burning sensation on one of its occupants. Sighting lasted 1 minute. Nov. 3, 1958; Minot, North Dakota. 2:01 p.m. Witness: M/Sgt. William R. Butler, medic. One bright green object, shaped like a 10 cent piece, and one smaller, silver round object. First object

exploded, the second object moved toward the location of the first at high speed. Sighting lasted 1 minute. June 18, 1959; Edmonton, Alberta, Canada. 9:30 p.m. Witnesses: A.Cavelli and R. Blessin, using 7x50 binoculars. One brown, cigarshaped object came from below the horizon (close to the witnesses) ascending to 400-500 above the horizon in 4 minutes.

June 30, 1959; Patuxxent River NAS, Maryland. 8:23 p.m. Witness: USN Cdr.D.Connolly. One gold, oblate-shaped object, nine times as wide as it was thick, metallic and with sharp edges, flew straight and level for 20-30 seconds. July 25, 1959; Irondequoit, New York. 1 p.m. Witness: Technical illustrator W.D.Neva. One thin, crescent moon-shaped object with a small white dome in the centre, flew at tremendous speed for 5-10 seconds. Sept.13, 1959; Bunker Hill AFB, Indiana. 4 p.m. Witnesses: At least two control tower operators and the pilot of a Mooney private airplane. One pear-shaped object, coloured white, cream, and metallic, with a trail under it. Object showed little movement during 3 hours. Attempted intercept by USAF T-33 jet trainer failed. Oct. 4, 1959; Quezon, Philippine Islands. 9:25 p.m. Witness: USN Lt. C.H.Pogson, CPO K.J.Moore. One large round or oval object, changing from red-orange, flew straight and level for 15 minutes. Oct. 6, 1959; Lincoln, Nebraska. 8:15 p.m. Witnesses: Lt. Col.L.Liggett (Selective Service) and wife. One round, white-yellow light made several abrupt turns and flew very fast for 2 minutes. Oct. 19, 1959; Plainville, Kansas. 9.25 p.m. Witness: Capt. F.A.Henney, engineering instructor at USAF Academy, flying a T-33 jet trainer. One bright yellowish light came head-on at the T-33, the pilot avoided it and the light dimmed. Sighting lasted 30 seconds. Nov. 18, 1959; Crystal Springs, Mississippi. 6:25 p.m. Witness: J.M.Porter. A row of red lights flew slow, then speeded up immensely. Sighting lasted 5-6 minutes.

Feb. 27, 1960; Rome AFB, New York. 6:27 p.m. Witnesses: Control tower officer Capt.J.Huey and four other tower operators. One light trailing a white fan shape, made a mild descent for 3-4 minutes. April 24, 1964; Socorro, New Mexico. 5:45 p.m. Witness: Socorro policeman Lonnie Zamora. Watched object with flame underneath descend toward the desert. Two small Humanoids observed near vertical oval on ground. Later watched object take off with a roar, go silent and fly away. Burning and charred brush found at landing sight. May 26, 1964; Cambridge, Massachusetts. 7:43 p.m. Witness: P. Wankowicz, RAF pilot and ex-Smithsonian satellite tracker. One thin, white ellipsoid (3.5 times as long as wide) flew straight and level for 3-4 seconds. May 26, 1964; Pleasantview, Pennsylvania. 11 p.m. Witness: Rev. H.C.Shaw. One yellow-orange light, shaped like the bottom of a ball, was spotted in a field and chased down the road for 2 miles. June 13, 1964; Toledo, Ohio. 9:15 p.m. Witness: B.L.English, announcer for radio station WTOD. Three glowing white spheres, glowing red on their sides, moved slow, hovered and then moved in circles very fast, all the while making a low rumbling sound. July 16, 1964; 15 miles south of Houghton Lake, Michigan. 11:15 p.m. Witness: Northern Air Service pilot K.Jannereth. Four white lights in a stepped-up echelon formation, were joined by two more. They closed in on the airplane, then rapidly slowed and flew along with it for a total of 5 minutes. July 20, 1964; Littleton, Illinois. 4:45 a.m. Witness: J.J.Winkle. One 60 foot diameter round-topped, flat-bottomed object with a long acetylene-coloured flame shooting downward, flew straight and level, made a half loop, then rose up. Sighting lasted 1 minute. July 27, 1964; Norwich, New York. 7:30 p.m. Witness: Duabert, engineering supervisor. One aluminium sphere with a luminous ring, remained stationary for 4-5 minutes. Aug. 10, 1964; Wake Island. 5:16 a.m. Witnesses: Aircraft commander Capt. B.C.Jones and navigator 1st Lt. H.J.Cavender, in parked USAF C-124 transport plane. One reddish, blinking light

approached the runway, stopped and made several reverses during 2 minutes. May 7, 1965; Oxford, Michigan. 7:30 p.m. Witness: M.E.Marshall. One light, like a satellite, split into two parts, one of which was copperish colour, then two more joined up. One object may have been tumbling. Sighting lasted 1 minute. July 6, 1965; Kiel, Wisconsin. 9:30 p.m. Witness: Mrs. E.R.Hayner. One flashing light, like a satellite, was seen for less than 1 minute. No further data was in files. July 25, 1965; Castalia, Ohio. 9:15 p.m. Witness: Amateur astronomer M.D.Harris. One bright blue star crossed 90 per cent of sky in 10-15 seconds. Aug. 19, 1965; Cherry Creek New York. 8:20 p.m. Witnesses: Mrs. William Butcher, son Harold 17, and children. A large elliptical object, with a reddish vapour underneath, came down close to the ground, then shot straight up into the clouds a few seconds later. Radio drowned out by static, a tractor engine stopped. When the object was on the ground, a steady beeping sound could be heard. Afterwards, a strange odour was noticed, and the next day, a purplish liquid, 2 inch x 2 inch marks and patches of singed grass were found at the site. A bull bellowed and tried to break its bonds. Aug. 30, 1965; Urbana, Ohio. 10:30 p.m. Witnesses: M.A.Lilly, N.Smith, T. Nastoff. One white ball, 5-8 inches in diameter and trailed by a 2-3 foot light, hit the road 100 foot in front of the witness’ car, bounced and flew away. Sighting lasted 3-4 seconds…

Unfortunately this brought to an end all the deciphering I was able to accomplish. In concluding my tale of the Stranger and his incredible encounters with Beings beyond our Universe I have more than a strong feeling that this is not the last we are going to hear of such experiences; as such I am convinced there are shattering events just waiting in the wings ready to burst upon the World stage. I greatly fear the inferences and warnings given by the Aliens relating to

climate change, and the subsequent increase in magnitude and frequency of flooding, tidal waves and hurricanes are now upon us; also the incidence of terrorism, wars, pestilence and famine et cetera will become much more threatening as we enter the 21st Century. Currently our scientists are aware that the eruption of supervolcanoes would have the capacity to kill millions of people whilst at the same time creating havoc with the World’s climate. A supervolcano differs from the typical cone-shaped volcano such as Vesuvius or Mount Etna, insomuch that it is a massive collapsed crater filled with magma and gas; these craters are known as caldera. According to scientists, the supervolcano that lies under Yellowstone Park in the United States of America, has erupted at regular intervals of approximately every 600,000 years and last erupted about 640,000 years ago! So it seems we are well overdue to the next eruption? Should such a calamitous eruption occur, then it would abruptly bring about the end of the United States as the World’s most dominant power. Even more terrifying would be the onset of a World wide volcanic winter due to the immense amount of gas, debris and dust blocking out the sunlight. The consequence of this diminished sunlight is bound to have an effect on global warming – but the exact nature is totally unknown and what other consequential threats to the survivors of a caldera eruption would there be? The answer, as far as I am concerned, is academic, as there would be a vast reduction in not only the animal kingdom but the Human population as well. The trauma shock would be decisive and I would imagine that many of the survivors would lose their will to live, whilst others would look to their respective religions for comfort and an answer. Perhaps we should ask ourselves that if Mankind does not make a genuine and collective effort in reducing pollution and the destruction of the environment then maybe the Gods will trigger a massive caldera eruption – who can say? Scientists forecast that global warming will eventually cause large areas of ice to melt and detach from the landmass of Antarctica

which in turn will dilute and increase global sea levels. Indeed, regarding the other pole, recent newspaper reports claim the North Pole is melting for the first time in over 50 million years. During the summer of 2000 oceanographers found an area around the polar ice cap had melted - which resulted in open ocean of about a mile across. Earlier research had shown that the average summer thickness of ice at the North Pole was approximately nine feet thick. During the summer of 2000 a ship was able to sail directly to the pole and float over it. According to researchers the ice cap is losing about four percent of its area annually and by 2100 it will melt completely. There is meaningful talk of gainfully using the North West Passage as a shipping lane due to the melting of the ice. The implication for the Gulf Stream does not bear thinking about, when one considers the consequences of the release of additional icebergs from the Greenland ice sheet to the north Atlantic as a result of global warming; large quantities of fresh water have the ability to switch off the flow of the Gulf Stream. Britain for example, relies upon the warming effect to keep its climate two to three degrees warmer or more, than countries at similar latitudes such as Newfoundland and Kamchatka. Additionally and again as a result of global warming, fresh melt water pouring into the Arctic Ocean from rivers in northern Siberia will greatly exacerbate the situation decreasing further the salinity of the Gulf Stream - a very disturbing situation. The subsequent rise in mean sea levels will also take its toll on many coastlines including that of Britain. This will result in widespread flooding and devastation; with the atmosphere and the oceans warming who can also accurately forecast the effect on the winds and precipitation in the Northern Hemisphere? In the United Kingdom at Abermawr beach in Pembrokeshire, Wales the remnants of a forest that was drowned by a sudden inundation, as the ice sheet (last Ice Age) melted about 8,000 years ago, can be seen during periods of low tide – again at low tides, the sands of the beaches of Aberdovey in North Wales will also reveal sunken petrified tree trunks. Indeed much of Cardigan Bay, Wales, was

above sea level about 8,000 years ago; there is a local legend that the ‘Bells of Aberdovey’ can be heard ringing in the swell from a drowned town there when trouble threatens. Approximately 8,000 years ago the area now called the Bristol Channel was well above mean water level save for the River Severn that flowed through it and formed a Seven Valley - now the River Severn enters the sea at Gloucester. There is a drowned kingdom off the southern tip of Cornwall. According to legend St. Michael’s Mount was once part of the lost kingdom of Lyonese; these lands also encompassed small areas of high land to the south west of the tip of Cornwall, these small areas of high land are now known as the Isles of Scilly. Moving further afield there are remnants of human construction under the seas of the Mediterranean and there are sunken towns off the coast of North Western India. On sea beds that were once dry land in many parts of the World there is evidence of Human endeavours in the shape of walls, terraces and apparent paved areas. It must be appreciated, that during the last Ice Age, Europe and North America were buried under about two miles of ice. This resulted in the seas and oceans being approximately 400 feet lower than they are today. It should be recognised that global warming results not only in the air in the atmosphere warming and expanding, but also the water in the World’s oceans warming up and expanding. It is this combination of warming and expansion of the World’s seas, in addition to the ice caps melting, that will cause the most significant rise in sea levels with the consequence of the drowning of many coastal plains, deltas and lands. Cities such as London and Venice will succumb to the waters and many low lying parts of the Earth such as East Anglia, Bangladesh and the Nile delta will disappear beneath the waves; not forgetting the disappearance of many islands and atolls in the Pacific. No matter what the experts and scientists may claim about all of these apocalyptic changes, the mechanisms and effects are far from being clearly understood. Most people are aware that warm air can

hold more moisture than cold air, but who can forecast accurately the full consequences of atmospheric warming? The Aliens appeared to be hinting that Mother Nature, for want of a better definition, could be holding a number of ace cards up her sleeve to deploy at the worst possible moment? Consider the scenarios such as a global increase in volcanism, undersea and land earthquakes; gigantic earth slides on coastal regions, resulting in enormous tidal waves (tsunamis) that would be capable of wiping out whole cities on exposed coastlines! A greater understanding to the periodicity of asteroids, comets or parts of comets, striking the Earth’s atmosphere and surface with all the dire consequences of such an event; how many Near Earth Objects have yet to be detected, especially those less than a kilometre in size? An asteroid of approximately 200 metres in size and striking the middle of the Atlantic Ocean would result in a massive tsunami devastating coastal cities on both sides of the ocean. What of the Ozone layer and its current thinning, will this activity speed up or slow down? There is clear evidence that the Earth’s magnetic field is diminishing and will eventually reverse its polarity with the north becoming the south magnetic pole and vice versa before increasing in magnetic strength again. This period of decreased strength in the magnetic field will have dire consequences for life on the surface of the planet. It should be remembered that without the magnetosphere, the Earth’s surface would be subject to the full effects of the harmful and lethal ultraviolet rays from the Sun – we are all aware of the dangers of too much sun bathing today but think how lethal the situation would be without the magnetosphere! The reversal of the Earth’s magnetic field has happened many times in the past as evident in the rocks of the planet. While we are on the subject of the magnetosphere, who is to say the Gods might not trigger a supernova explosion - a tremendously gigantic explosion that takes place close enough to the Earth so as to blow away the protective magnetic shield - whilst at the same time showering the Earth with deadly cosmic rays and other harmful radiation! The ‘experts’ would argue that it takes a special star to

become a supernova - such as having a mass of twenty times the mass of the Sun! No doubt they will also argue that any such large stars are too far away as to pose any threat to the Earth – and we know from past experience how much faith we can put in ‘expert advice’ – not to mention that we are dealing with the Gods, who can make all things possible! Are there other hidden horrors yet to be identified, and will they manifest themselves…at the worst possible moment? Yet people will still delude themselves and go on living, giving birth and dying, working and enjoying themselves, oblivious or indifferent to the pending horrors about to burst forth upon them. Similar not only to the days of Noah before the Great Flood but also to the peoples of Atlantis prior to their demise, whereby their ‘world’ disappeared in a night and a day! So sleep well if you can? Remember, time will eventually unveil all of its many secrets and I will leave you as I started this book with a quote from scripture that sits well on all the people of the World today… Son of man, thou dwellest in the midst of a rebellious house, which have eyes to see, and see not; they have ears to hear, and hear not: for they are a rebellious house. Ezekiel 12:2

…Do you not agree?

non semper erit aestas

(be prepared for hard times)

ADDENDUM Although we have come to the end of the Stranger’s tale I feel it is significant to mention that many months after I had met the Stranger, I was again having a quiet drink at the same country Inn. It was a balmy summers evening and I was sitting alone at a table in the beer garden enjoying another good pint of ale and a small cigar; when a smartly dressed young man asked if he could share the table with me. As I was in the mood for a bit of company I beckoned for him to sit down. He introduced himself as Michael and I responded by telling him my name was David. He then commented on it being a lovely evening and it was very pleasant to sit outside watching the world go by whilst delighting in a good pint of beer - thus our conversation began... We talked about the local area and the conversation drifted to the perceived characteristics of town and country dwellers and how we all tend to stereotype people. After a while the young man said he was fascinated by different surnames and that it was a hobby of his which he indulged in when he had some time to spare. He then offered that family names originate in various ways such as a person’s surroundings, job or the name of an ancestor. Michael then went on to explain that names such as John Cook, Robert Miller, William Taylor and Henry Carpenter were derived from the occupation of their respective ancestors. He further ventured that father’s name (Patronymic) surnames are recognisable by their ending such as Jackson, Jameson or Williamson; the Norman’s used the prefix ‘fitz’ to denote the son so that William the son of Gerald became William fitz-Gerald; the Welsh used ‘ap’ so Ifor the son of Rees became Ifor ap Rees. Names such as Eric Wood originated from someone who dwelled in or near a wood. Michael said it is easy to identify surnames that are

derived from a location as they end with a regular place name element such as –ford, -wood, -brook, -well. He continued by saying that characteristic surnames were derived from a trait or characteristic of that respective person such that a tall man might have been called John Longfellow and a cunning person may have been called Fox. Thus it was not that surprising when he eventually asked what my surname was. I told him it was Haskell and he paused slightly before replying that it was an interesting surname insomuch that it could be traced back to the 11th Century and the Huscarls or House-carls. The penny did not drop for a moment or two and then it suddenly struck home! I could feel myself becoming light-headed and nervous as I remembered how Karaz-hu had in Chapter five laboured on about the Battle of Hastings and the part played by the Huscarls! My unease did not appear to faze Michael at all - almost as though he knew what my response would be? He continued in a matter of fact way explaining that Huscarls were crack troops and the elite Anglo-Saxon body guard to King Harold back in the 11th Century… Harold Godwineson, King of England lived from 1022 till he was slain at the Battle of Hastings in 1066. He had just returned from defeating the Vikings at Stamford Bridge. It could be argued that he should have won the battle against William the Conqueror and the Normans - at this point I interrupted Michael not only because I did not feel in the mood for a history lesson but I was beginning to feel rather bothered and queasy - this was far too much of a coincidence… First my meeting with the Stranger at this particular Inn and his incredulous tale of being abducted by Aliens, then his compulsion to record all his experiences and in particular Karaz-hu’s long dialogue about the Saxons in Chapter Five; the Stranger’s insistence I write and publish his notes and then my very own compulsion to write up his story - and now, unbelievably, finding myself in the company with another enigmatic and troubling stranger at the same Inn! Good grief! I thought to myself and I felt my heart beginning to pound, was Michael somehow connected with the Aliens or could he possibly be one of those angelic messengers? My thoughts started

to race, is this the way the Aliens, or perhaps more correctly, the Gods have of confirming the Stranger’s abduction and experiences for me? My mind was in a whirl! At this point I was beginning to feel quite ill so I hurriedly excused myself and rushed off to the gentleman’s toilets where I was not unsurprisingly sick. It took a little while for me to recover myself but after splashing my face with cold water I felt well (and brave) enough to return to my drinking partner; only to find that on reaching the beer garden and our table that Michael had disappeared. I sat there for a moment desperately trying to collect my thoughts but now in no mood for any more beer and still feeling shaky I took myself off home. The journey home helped in settling me and I decided the most rational thing to do and put my mind at ease was to try and trace the Haskell family name. One way or the other the outcome would possibly throw some light on my meeting with Michael, or so I reasoned at the time… Thus the outcome of my, and I have to admit limited research, appeared to indicate that the name Haskell was one of the oldest Welsh names. It was first found in Monmouthshire where they were seated from very ancient times; well before the Norman Conquest and the arrival of Duke William at Hastings in 1066. This made me wonder if there was indeed a connection to King Harold. Had one of the Huscarls or perhaps a few settled in Monmouthshire with the name being eventually corrupted to Haskell? My research did show that the name of Haskell, from time to time, was spelt as Hascall, Askell, Haskill and I believe many are still in use today. I knew from my own limited historical knowledge that the Welsh and Saxons were always feuding along the Welsh and English border and at a later date the Welsh continued their feuding with the Normans. The answer the Normans came up with was to build a string of defensive castles along the border stretching from the River Dee in the north to the estuary of the River Severn in the south, with each castle being no more than a days march from one another; these border lands are known today as the Welsh Marches Regarding the Saxons and the Huscarls it is just about conceivable that perhaps some Welsh and Saxons inter-married in an effort to

pacify their dealings with one another? Or perhaps a Huscarl forcibly settled in Monmouthshire and with the passage of time the name eventually became corrupted to Haskell? Who can tell? I was content to reason that possibly the only way to get at the truth of it all was to carry out DNA testing on a large sample of Haskell descendents, although I did recognise that this was not possible unless there was a real determination on the part of someone or possibly a highly motivated group of people. Thus I was reasonably happy with my hypothesis although my meeting with Michael still troubled me for some time. The chance of him discussing surnames and the linking of my own surname to the Huscarls seemed highly unlikely and at the same time quite disturbing, to say the least – bearing in mind the coincidence to that of Karaz-hu labouring on in Chapter five about King Harold and the Saxons - it really did appear to be stretching credibility! But then again they do say life is stranger than fiction and these coincidences do happen - or do they I wonder? The final twist to this tale is that for whatever reason, I cannot remember Michael’s face - no matter how hard I try to recollect how he looked I always come up with a blank! All I can remember is a smartly dressed young man in a suit and I say young man on the basis of the way he walked and carried himself, his build and the sound of his voice and manner of speaking - perhaps it was the shock at the time that has erased his face from my memory, or maybe there is another reason? Permitte divis cetera (Leave the rest to the Gods)

The reader should kindly note that this Kindle book, titled Revelations, is abridged and thus re-titled. The original book was titled, Countdown to Oblivion. As such this version, due to the very nature of ebooks, has a minimal number of photographs and graphics. Indeed the unabridged version also includes eight graphically illustrated appendices, namely, APPENDIX ONE…….… ILLUSIONS AND MOTION APPENDIX TWO…….… RELATIVITY APPENDIX THREE…… PLANETARY MOTION

APPENDIX FOUR…..… MATTER APPENDIX FIVE…….… POWER FOR SPACECRAFT APPENDIX SIX………… GRAVITY, MASS & TIDES APPENDIX SEVEN…… GALAXIES APPENDIX, EIGHT…… THE UNIVERSE

The unabridged paperback version is available from:

PAPERBACK BOOK BY THE AUTHOR

COUNTDOWN TO OBLIVION The definitive Alien abduction

Obtainable from Amazon Or Trafford Publishing ISBN 141202685-7 www.trafford.com E-mail sales: [email protected]

Children’s Kindle fantasy book by the author

TROLL CASTLE AND THE FORBIDDEN CHAMBER OF GOLD

Cartoon KINDLE books by the author

I just love my computer

Computer Rage

Martian Revelations

Other cartoon KINDLE books by the author

Romans, Greeks, Egyptians and Gauls

Aliens and Space

FI

NI